Genex U-net User Guide(v300r008c00_03)(PDF)-En

GENEX U-NetV300R008C00

User Guide

Issue 03

Date 2012-12-25

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and thecustomer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within thepurchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representationsof any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Issue 03 (2012-12-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

i

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

About This Document

This document provides the guides for installing and using the GENEX U-Net.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

GENEX U-Net V300R008C00

Intended AudienceThe intended audience of this document is network plan engineers.

Change History

03 (2012-12-25)

This is the third release of V300R008C00.

Compared with issue 02 (2012-11-09), this issue incorporates the following changes.

Content Description

Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD BaseStation Templates

The content descriptions are changed.

Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD BaseStation Templates

Parameters for Setting the Parameters ofLTE-FDD Cells

GENEX U-NetUser Guide About This Document


ii

02 (2012-11-09)

This is the second release of V300R008C00.

Compared with issue 01 (2012-08-10), this issue incorporates the following changes.

Content Description

Importing Neighbor Relationships The content descriptions are changed.

Planning PRACH

Managing the Result of Neighboring CellPlanning

5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result

6.9.6 Checking and OptimizingNeighboring Cell Configuration

6.10.3 Checking and OptimizingScrambling Code Configuration

7.8.2 Planning PN Codes

Parameters for Setting PCI DisplayProperties

Parameters for Planning NeighboringLTE-FDD Cells

5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSMNeighboring Cells

6.13.2 Parameters for PlanningNeighboring UMTS Cells

7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMANeighboring Cells

10.15 Importing BCP Data New.

Whole document The content of the document is optimized.

01 (2012-08-10)

This is the first release of V300R008C00.

Compared with issue Draft A (2012-06-30), this issue incorporates the following changes.

Content Description

1.3 Main Window of the U-Net The content descriptions are changed.

2.3 Installing a License



iii

Content Description

Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps

Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of aSingle-Mode Network

Parameters for Viewing CapacitySimulation Results of a Single-ModeNetwork

3.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas

Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result ina Single Snapshot

Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCIPlanning Results

5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers

7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results

6.11 UMTS Measurement ReportsAnalysis

New.

6.11.1 Creating a Measurement ReportAnalysis Group

6.11.2 Geographically DisplayingMeasurement Report Analysis Results

6.13.10 Parameters for Creating aMeasurement Report Analysis Group

6.13.11 Parameters for GeographicallyDisplaying Measurement Report AnalysisResults

Parameters for Viewing the Properties ofLines

Parameters for Setting the Cost231Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model

Parameters for Setting the Clutter RelatedHata Propagation Model

Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of anEntire Network

Parameters for Viewing CapacitySimulation Results of a Single User

Parameters for Viewing CapacitySimulation Results of the Entire Network



iv

Content Description

8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base StationTemplate

8.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results

Setting Parameters for TRXs in GSM Cells Delete.

Parameters for Setting Parameters of TRXs ina GSM Cell

Whole document The content of the document is optimized.

Organization1 Introduction to the U-Net

The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology andUMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTE-FDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to completethe initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.

2 Installing the U-Net Software

This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the U-Net, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted bythe installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then youcan use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstallit.

3 LTE-FDD Network Planning

The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as theneighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, andevaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.

4 LTE-TDD Network Planning

The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actualnetwork environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creatingbase stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parametersand predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements onnetwork planning in different scenarios.

5 GSM Network Planning

The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cell



v

parameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet yournetwork planning requirements.

6 UMTS Network Planning

The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells andscrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity tomeet you network planning requirements.

7 CDMA Network Planning

This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supportsonly the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.

8 Multi-Mode Network Planning

The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on thehybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTSnetwork coverage range to meet your network planning requirements.

9 FAQ

This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net.

10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions

The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zoomingin or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display.

11 Acronyms and Abbreviations

This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.

ConventionsSymbol Conventions

The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, whichif not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance degradation, or unexpected results.

Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or savetime.



vi

Symbol Description

Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

General Conventions

The general conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are inboldface. For example, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Examples of information displayed on the screen are inCourier New.

Command Conventions

The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italics.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional.

{ x | y | ... } Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected.

{ x | y | ... }* Optional items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of allitems can be selected.

[ x | y | ... ]* Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated byvertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.

GUI Conventions

The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.



vii


Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titlesare in boldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operations

The keyboard operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt+A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A meansthe two keys should be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operations

The mouse operations that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without movingthe pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously andquickly without moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move thepointer to a certain position.



viii

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Introduction to the U-Net.............................................................................................................11.1 Overview............................................................................................................................................................21.2 System Structure.................................................................................................................................................41.3 Main Window of the U-Net................................................................................................................................5

2 Installing the U-Net Software...................................................................................................152.1 Preparation for the Installation.........................................................................................................................162.2 Installing the U-Net Main Program..................................................................................................................172.3 Installing a License...........................................................................................................................................202.4 Starting the U-Net.............................................................................................................................................222.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main Program.............................................................................................................23

3 LTE-FDD Network Planning....................................................................................................243.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network Planning..........................................................................................................263.2 Creating a Project.............................................................................................................................................283.3 Importing Geographic Data..............................................................................................................................29

3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic Data....................................................................................................293.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format Quickly...........................................................................333.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files Manually.................................................................................353.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution Level.......................................................................373.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic Data.....................................................................................383.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer Parameters.............................................................................................................403.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.............................................................................413.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display Mode.............................................................................................433.3.9 Creating Vector Objects..........................................................................................................................443.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic Data..............................................................................................51

3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands............................................................................................................633.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation Models...............................................................................................633.4.2 Configuring Propagation Models............................................................................................................673.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models................................................................................................................693.4.4 Setting Bands...........................................................................................................................................703.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation Models...........................................................................................71

3.5 Adding a Device...............................................................................................................................................94

GENEX U-NetUser Guide Contents


ix

3.5.1 Importing Antenna Data..........................................................................................................................943.5.2 Setting Antennas......................................................................................................................................983.5.3 Setting a TMA.......................................................................................................................................1003.5.4 Setting Feeders......................................................................................................................................1013.5.5 Creating Base Stations...........................................................................................................................1013.5.6 Parameters for Creating Antennas.........................................................................................................102

3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................1043.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................1053.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service Types..........................................................................................................1063.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.................................................................................................................1083.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal Types........................................................................................................1103.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................1113.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................1143.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................116

3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................1173.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................1173.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................1183.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station Template........................................................................................1203.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................1223.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................1233.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................1233.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................1253.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters...................................................................126

3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................1513.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction.............................................................................................................1513.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................1573.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................1593.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups..................................................................................................1603.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................1623.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................1633.8.7 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................1653.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................1683.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................1723.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.............................................................................1753.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.................................................................................................................1753.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Prediction.....................................................................................178

3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................1823.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity Simulation.............................................................................................1823.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps...................................................................................................................1933.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group.....................................................................................................1963.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result...............................................................................................1983.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in Batches...............................................................................206



x

3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.......................................................................2073.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network Parameters.....................................................................................................231

3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................2313.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................2363.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................2383.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................2453.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE Cells......................................................................................................2483.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network Parameter Planning.........................................................253

4 LTE-TDD Network Planning..................................................................................................2744.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network Planning........................................................................................................2764.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................2784.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................2794.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................2794.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................2794.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters............................................................................................................280

4.6.1 Setting MCS Types................................................................................................................................2804.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service Types..........................................................................................................2814.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver Types........................................................................................................2834.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type...................................................................................................2854.6.5 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................2864.6.6 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................2874.6.7 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................287

4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters..................................................................................................................2874.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................2874.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................2874.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station Template........................................................................................2884.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................2894.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................2894.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................2904.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell Parameters........................................................................................................2904.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters...................................................................291

4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction......................................................................................................................................3084.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction...........................................................................................3084.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................3144.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................3164.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction Group..............................................................................................3174.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single Cell...............................................................................................3184.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................3194.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction Result............................................................................................................3194.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction Results............................................................................................3194.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................3204.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database Data..................................................................................................320



xi

4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.......................................................................3204.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation......................................................................................................................3224.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network Parameters....................................................................................................322

4.10.1 LTE PCI Planning...............................................................................................................................3234.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning........................................................................................................................3234.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell Planning................................................................................................3234.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.....................................................................................................................3234.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic Planning.............................................................................................................323

5 GSM Network Planning..........................................................................................................3255.1 Process of GSM Network Planning................................................................................................................3275.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................3285.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................3305.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................3305.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................3305.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters....................................................................................................................331

5.6.1 Setting MOS..........................................................................................................................................3315.6.2 Setting GSM Service Types..................................................................................................................3325.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.........................................................................................................................3345.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal Types................................................................................................................3365.6.5 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................337

5.7 Setting GSM NE Parameters..........................................................................................................................3375.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................3375.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................3385.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS Template...............................................................................................................3385.7.4 Creating a Base Station Automatically..................................................................................................3395.7.5 Creating a Repeater...............................................................................................................................3395.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................3405.7.7 Setting GSM Cell Parameters................................................................................................................3405.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE Parameters...........................................................................341

5.8 GSM Prediction..............................................................................................................................................3475.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction...................................................................................................3475.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................3525.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................3545.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction Group........................................................................................................3555.8.5 Viewing the Prediction Result...............................................................................................................3565.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................3575.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning Results..........................................................................................................3585.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................3625.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................362

5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning ..................................................................................................................3625.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................3625.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................363



xii

5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.........................................................................................................3645.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................................................366

5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network Planning...........................................................................................3705.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups...............................................................................3705.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells..............................................................................3725.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................3765.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................3775.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................378

5.11 TSC Planning................................................................................................................................................3795.11.1 Planning TSC.......................................................................................................................................3795.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning Result....................................................................................................3805.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...................................................................................3835.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.............................................384

5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning..........................................................................................3855.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning..............................................................................................................3855.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result..............................................................................3865.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning...........................................................3875.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.......................3885.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display Effect...................................................................................389

6 UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................................3906.1 Process of UMTS Network Planning.............................................................................................................3926.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................3946.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................3956.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................3956.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................3956.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters..................................................................................................................396

6.6.1 Setting MIMO Types.............................................................................................................................3966.6.2 Setting UMTS Service Types................................................................................................................3976.6.3 Setting UMTS Receivers.......................................................................................................................4006.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal Types.............................................................................................................4016.6.5 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................4026.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................4036.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer Table..........................................................................................................4036.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer Table.................................................................................................................4046.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category Table................................................................................................4056.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category Table..............................................................................................406

6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters........................................................................................................................4076.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................4076.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................4076.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.................................................................................................4086.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................4096.7.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................409



xiii

6.7.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................4106.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell Parameters.............................................................................................................4106.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE Parameters.........................................................................411

6.8 UMTS Prediction............................................................................................................................................4186.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction.................................................................................................4186.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................4236.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard Deviation..........................................................................................4256.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction Group......................................................................................................4266.8.5 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................4276.8.6 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................4286.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning Results.......................................................................................................4296.8.8 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data...............................................................................4346.8.9 Exporting the Feature Database Data....................................................................................................434

6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells...............................................................................................................4346.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................4346.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................4356.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network..........................................................................4366.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.........................................................4386.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network...................................................4396.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration..................................................................440

6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code Planning...............................................................................................................4466.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code Planning................................................................................4476.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Network.............................................................4496.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration................................................................451

6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports Analysis........................................................................................................4556.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group................................................................................4556.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results....................................................456

6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Analysis............................................................................................4586.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion Basics.......................................................................................4586.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.................................................................................4596.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.....................................................4606.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion Results.................................................................................462

6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network Planning........................................................................................4636.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.............................................................................4646.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells............................................................................4656.13.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells..................................................4716.13.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations.................4726.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results..............................................................4736.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes............................................................................4746.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTS Scrambling Codes ...........................................4766.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling Code Planning Results........................................4776.13.9 Parameters for Setting Bands..............................................................................................................478



xiv

6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.....................................................4786.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.........................4806.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.......................................................4816.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results...........................4846.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity Expansion Results........................................................484

7 CDMA Network Planning.......................................................................................................4877.1 Process of CDMA Network Planning............................................................................................................4897.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................4907.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................4927.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................4927.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................4927.6 Setting CDMA NE Parameters.......................................................................................................................492

7.6.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................4927.6.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................4937.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station Template...............................................................................................4937.6.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.........................................................................................................4947.6.5 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................4947.6.6 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................4947.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell Parameters............................................................................................................4947.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE Parameters........................................................................495

7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning...............................................................................................................4997.7.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................4997.7.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................5007.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells......................................................................................................5017.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................502

7.8 CDMA PN Code Planning.............................................................................................................................5067.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN Codes.............................................................................................................5067.8.2 Planning PN Codes................................................................................................................................5077.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning Results....................................................................................................5077.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes..........................................................................................510

7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network Planning..........................................................................................5117.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.......................................................................................................5117.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.............................................................................5127.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN Codes.................................................................5127.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.............................................................................5137.9.5 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells....................................................5157.9.6 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Based on Neighboring Relations...................5167.9.7 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................5177.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results........................................................................518

8 Multi-Mode Network Planning..............................................................................................5208.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network Planning.....................................................................................................5228.2 Creating a Project...........................................................................................................................................523



xv

8.3 Importing Geographic Data............................................................................................................................5258.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands..........................................................................................................5258.5 Adding a Device.............................................................................................................................................5258.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode Network...............................................................................526

8.6.1 Setting Environment Types...................................................................................................................5268.6.2 Setting User Types.................................................................................................................................5268.6.3 Setting Mobility Types..........................................................................................................................5268.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service Types........................................................................................................5268.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal Types.....................................................................................................528

8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters...............................................................................................................5298.7.1 Importing Base Station Information......................................................................................................5298.7.2 Creating a Single Site............................................................................................................................5298.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station Template.......................................................................................5308.7.4 Creating Repeaters.................................................................................................................................5318.7.5 Creating a Transceiver...........................................................................................................................5328.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell Parameters.....................................................................................................532

8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network........................................................................................5328.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..............................................5328.8.2 Calculating Path Loss............................................................................................................................5358.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network...................................................5378.8.4 Viewing Coverage Prediction Results...................................................................................................5388.8.5 Analyzing Prediction Results................................................................................................................5388.8.6 Exporting Planning Results...................................................................................................................5398.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network..........................540

8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode Network...................................................................................5428.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell Planning..................................................................................5428.9.2 Importing Neighboring Relations..........................................................................................................5438.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode Network........................................................................5448.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor Cells...................................................................................5458.9.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning Results................................................................549

9 FAQ..............................................................................................................................................5519.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-Net............................................................5539.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei Support Website............5539.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping Area......................................................................5549.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007..............................................................................................................................................................................5569.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory of the Map ContainsChinese Characters...............................................................................................................................................5579.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function Properly...........................................................................................5599.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly..............................................................................................................................................................................5609.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating System....................................................5619.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation Failure......................................561



xvi

10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................................56310.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a Map.....................................................................................56610.2 Measuring Distance on the Map...................................................................................................................56710.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two Points......................................................................................56710.4 Querying the Legend Information................................................................................................................56810.5 Exporting a Map to the Google Earth...........................................................................................................56910.6 Setting Layer Display Properties..................................................................................................................57010.7 Saving Display Effect of Map Layers..........................................................................................................57310.8 Managing Table Windows............................................................................................................................57410.9 Managing Docked Windows........................................................................................................................57610.10 Managing the Explorer Window................................................................................................................57710.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEs........................................................................................................57810.12 Searching Sites and Cells...........................................................................................................................57810.13 Grouping Sites and Cells............................................................................................................................57910.14 Displaying the Cell Hexagon......................................................................................................................58210.15 Importing BCP Data...................................................................................................................................58310.16 Printing Planning Results...........................................................................................................................584

10.16.1 Print Suggestions...............................................................................................................................58410.16.2 Printing Maps....................................................................................................................................58410.16.3 Customizing a Print Template...........................................................................................................585

10.17 Calibrating Propagation Models.................................................................................................................58610.17.1 Importing DT Data............................................................................................................................58610.17.2 Filtering DT Data...............................................................................................................................58710.17.3 Filtering DT Data in Batches.............................................................................................................58810.17.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CW Measurement Data............................................58910.17.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation Model.............................................................591

10.18 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary Functions.....................................................................................59210.18.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.........................................................................59210.18.2 Parameters for Setting Custom Fields...............................................................................................59310.18.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations......................................................................................59310.18.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display Properties..................................................................................59410.18.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting Data...................................................................................59710.18.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties........................................................................................59810.18.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test Data........................................................................................60010.18.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement Data..........................................................................60310.18.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point Information.................................................................................60510.18.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of Propagation Models.................................................60610.18.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data..............................................................................................60710.18.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT Points...........................................................609

11 Acronyms and Abbreviations...............................................................................................610



xvii

1 Introduction to the U-Net

About This Chapter

The GENEX U-Net is a professional tool that fully supports the planning of wireless networks.It supports the planning of single-system network and the planning of multi-system network.For example, the U-Net can be used to plan the network using both the GSM technology andUMTS technology or the network using the GSM technology, UMTS technology, and LTE-FDD technology. During the entire network life cycle, the U-Net helps operators to completethe initial network design, network simulation, coverage prediction, and network optimization.

1.1 OverviewThe U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographicinformation system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently planthe network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,capacity, and quality.

1.2 System StructureThe U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS),service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation,parameter planning, and analysis result output.

1.3 Main Window of the U-NetThis section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorerwindow, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDDnetwork system is selected.

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 1 Introduction to the U-Net


1

1.1 OverviewThe U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, advanced geographicinformation system (GIS), and easy-to-use design. These features help you to efficiently planthe network parameters to obtain the optimum planning result regarding network coverage,capacity, and quality.

PositioningFigure 1-1 shows the position of the U-Net on the network.

Figure 1-1 Position of the U-Net on the network

Entity Description

Probe The Probe is a type of DT software developed by Huawei. It is used forcollecting air interface parameters on the wireless network. The DT data andCW data collected by the Probe can be imported to the U-Net for calibratingpropagation models and comparing the actual network coverage and predictednetwork coverage during network planning.

CME The Configuration Management Express (CME) is used to configure andmanage the data of NEs.

U-Net The U-Net is a type of network planning software developed by Huawei. Itsupports the LTE-FDD, LTE-TDD, GSM, UMTS, and CDMA networksystems.

Product FeaturesThe U-Net provides comprehensive network planning functions, a flexible software architecture,an advanced geographic information system (GIS), rich data resources, and user-friendly GUIs.These features enable network planning engineers to improve the work efficiency significantly.l Advanced LTE planning simulation technology



2

The U-Net supports the planning of neighboring cells, frequency, Physical Cell ID (PCI)codes, and Physical Random Access Channels (PRACHs). In addition, it providesprofessional LTE network optimization by incorporating the rich experience and advancedtechnologies of both Huawei and leading operators.

l Advanced planning algorithmsThe U-Net helps users flexibly perform co-planning of GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDDnetworks, thus appropriately making use of existing site resources. This accelerates theproduct delivery and shortens the network deployment period.

l Advanced semi-dynamic simulation technologyBy providing high-accuracy network prediction, the U-Net helps to accurately estimatenetwork investment and provide a low-cost solution, thus effectively reducing the overallcosts of network deployment.

l Powerful and easy-to-use network planning functionThe U-Net provides mature algorithms for inter-RAT neighboring cell planning and easysettings of planning parameters. This improves work efficiency effectively by reducing thetechnical requirements on network optimization and ensures the quality of networkplanning.

Application ScenarioThe U-Net is applicable in network deployment, network optimization, and network expansion.During the network deployment, the U-Net helps you to properly plan the engineeringparameters, neighboring cell data, and frequency data of the network, thus providing guidancefor the actual project implementation. During the optimization and expansion of the network,the U-Net helps you to optimize the network parameters and verify the optimization bycomparing the network performance before and after the optimization.

Table 1-1 describes the functions provided by the U-Net.

Table 1-1 Functions provided by the U-Net in different scenarios

Function Description

Sitedeployment

After the area for deploying a site is specified, the site can be quicklydeployed on the map by using the base station template. By performing pointanalysis, the U-Net can analyze the altitude height and clutter height alongthe profile of the propagation path to adjust the site deployment.

Propagationmodelcalibration

The propagation model can be adjusted manually or automatically on thebasis of the CW data. The U-Net displays the model on the GIS to analyzethe error in the model-based calculation.

Networkparameterplanning

The U-Net helps users plan configuration parameters of the network, suchas parameters related to the neighboring cells, frequency, PCIs, PRACHs,and TAs.

Prediction The U-Net starts the prediction after importing the map and configuringnetwork data, service model, and propagation model. By analyzing theprediction result, it evaluates the network performance.



3

Function Description

Capacitysimulation

After the traffic parameters are configured and the traffic map is setaccording to the planning, the U-Net performs the simulation calculationbased on the traffic map. In capacity simulation, the U-Net analyzes thethroughput of the cell and the user. In addition, it analyzes the coverage ofcommon channels and traffic channels based on the specific network loadprovided in the simulation calculation results.

Interactionwith the CME

You can obtain configuration parameters from the CME and then importthem to the U-Net for prediction and analysis. The analysis results providedby the U-Net can be imported to the CME and then be delivered to thenetwork.

1.2 System StructureThe U-Net provides a series of functions such as the Geographic Information System (GIS),service modeling, NE modeling, propagation modeling, prediction, capacity simulation,parameter planning, and analysis result output.

Figure 1-2 shows the software architecture of the U-Net.

Figure 1-2 Software architecture of the U-Net

The U-Net system consists of the following parts:



4

l Platform

This part provides the data management function and the basic common functions, such asproject management, GIS, NE modeling, service modeling, and propagation modeling. TheU-Net manages all the platform functions by using the project management function. Inaddition, the project management function provides interfaces to support service functionsof different network systems.

l System application

This part provides service functions for the actual network system, including parameterplanning, capacity simulation, prediction, and result analysis. The parameter planningmainly involves the planning of neighboring cells, PCIs, frequency and PRACHs.

1.3 Main Window of the U-NetThis section describes the main window of the U-Net, including the menu bar, toolbar, explorerwindow, operation GUIs, and entries to related operations using the U-Net when the LTE-FDDnetwork system is selected.

Figure 1-3 shows the main window after you start the U-Net. Table 1-2 lists the items in themain window.

Figure 1-3 Main window of the U-Net



5

Table 1-2 Description of the main window

No. Name Description

1 Menu bar Provides the main menu of the system. For details, see MenuBar.

2 Standard toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related toprojects. For details, see Standard Toolbar.

3 Task toolbar Provides the shortcut icons for common operations related totasks. For details, see Task Toolbar.

4 Explorer window Provides the entries to main operations using a navigation tree.For details, see Explorer Window.

5 Event window Displays the information about the progress of operation taskswhen the U-Net is running.

6 Map window Displays the map.

7 System status bar Displays the information about the system status.

Menu Bar

The menu bar of the U-Net provides the main menu of the system, which is organized based onthe main functions of the U-Net to facilitate your operations.

Table 1-3 describes the menu bar of the U-Net and the corresponding functions.

Table 1-3 Description of the menu bar

Main Menu Description

File Provides entries to operations related to project managementand print management. For details, see Table 1-4.

Edit Provides entries for viewing analysis GUIs. For details, seeTable 1-5.

Window Provides entries to common map-related operations. Fordetails, see Table 1-6.

Help Provides entries to U-Net Help and license management. Fordetails, see Table 1-7.

Table 1-4 Description of the File menu

Menu Item Description

New Create a project.

Open Open an existing project.



6


Close Close a project.

Save Save the current project.

Save As Save the current project as another one.

Print Setting Set print properties.

Print Preview Preview a print task.

Print Start a print task.

Import Excel l Import Excel > Engineering Parameters: Importengineering parameters.

l Import Excel > Configuration Package: Import theBCP data.

l Import Excel > Import New Cell Planning: Import thenew cell data.

The preceding function currently applies only to GSM andUMTS.

Export Export > Engineering Parameters: Export engineeringparameters.The preceding function currently applies only to GSM andUMTS.

Generate Template Create an engineering parameter template.1. Click Generate Template. In the displayed dialog box,

select a network type in the Select Network Type area.2. Select required engineering parameters for the selected

network type in the Select Specific Parameters area andselect engineering parameters under the Site andTransceiver nodes in the navigation tree.

3. Specify the export path and click Export. The settings aresaved as an engineering parameter template.

Recent File View the names of the five projects that are opened recently.This menu item provides shortcut operation entries to the fiveprojects.

Exit Exit the U-Net.



7

Table 1-5 Description of the Edit menu


Undo Undo an operation.You can undo the modifications in the GIS window. Notethat you can perform a maximum of three undo operations ata time. You cannot undo the modifications in the propertywindow.

Resource Usage View the resource usage.

Show Grid Line Whether to display grid lines.

Find Search NEs.

Table 1-6 Description of the Window menu


Project Information Display or hide the explorer window.

Standard Toolbar Display or hide the standard toolbar.

Status Bar Display or hide the status bar.

Event Display or hide the event window.When network planning, coverage prediction, or capacitysimulation is performed, the Event Viewer windowautomatically docks at the lower left part of the mainwindow.

Legend Display or hide the legend window.

Simulation Curve Display or hide the capacity simulation process window.

Point Analysis Tool Display or hide the point analysis window.

Table 1-7 Description of the Help menu


Help Topics View the U-Net Help.

Apply License for self Apply for a license for yourself.

Apply License for others Apply for a license for others.

View ESN View the electronic serial number (ESN).

About License View the remaining valid days of a license.

Update License Update a license locally.



8


About U-Net View the U-Net software information.

Standard ToolbarYou can click an icon on the standard toolbar to perform the corresponding project-relatedoperation quickly.

Figure 1-4 shows the icons on the standard toolbar. Table 1-8 describes the icons shown inFigure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 Standard toolbar

NOTE

You can choose Window > Standard Toolbar and determine whether to display the standard toolbar.

Table 1-8 Description of the standard toolbar

Icon Description

Create a project.

Open a project.

Save a project.

Perform a print task.

View the U-Net software information.

Task ToolbarYou can click an icon on the task toolbar to quickly perform the operations related to the mapand point analysis.

Figure 1-5 shows the icons on the task toolbar. Table 1-9 describes the icons shown in Figure1-5.

Figure 1-5 Task toolbar



9

Table 1-9 Description of the task toolbar

Icon Description

Calculate the path loss.

Forcibly calculate the path loss.

Stop calculating the path loss.

Start the point analysis.

Select a base station template.

Create base stations in batches.

Create a base station.

Create a repeater.

Whether to display hexagons indicating cell coverage.

Select a rectangular area.

Center the map.

Refresh the map.

Select one item at a time.

Move a map.

Select a scaling.

Zoom in or zoom out on the map.

Zoom out on an area.

Measure the distance.

Draw a polygon.

Draw a line.

Draw a point.

Combine polygons.



10

Icon Description

Export a map to the Google Earth.

View detailed results.For example, after performing the coverage prediction, you can select

a coverage prediction counter in the explorer window, click , andmove the pointer to the map window to view detailed results of thecounter.

Draw a clutter analysis line.

Explorer Window

The Explorer window is in the left pane the main window. The Explorer window has four tabpages: GEO, Data, Network, and Operation.

Figure 1-6 GEO tab page

Table 1-10 Description of the GEO tab page

Navigation Tree Description

Special Polygons Operation tasks related to special polygons.

Polygons Operation tasks related to polygons.

Points Operation tasks related to points.



11


Lines Operation tasks related to lines.

Map Operation tasks related to maps.

NOTE

In normal cases, if you select or clear the check box of a node in the navigation tree, the information about thenode is displayed or hidden accordingly in the GIS window. For example, if you select the check box of

Polygons as shown in , polygons are displayed in the GIS window.

Figure 1-7 Data tab page

Table 1-11 Description of the Data tab page


Propagation Models Operation tasks related to propagation models.

CW Measurement Operation tasks related to the CW measurement data.

Drive Test Operation tasks related to the drive test data.

Antennas Operation tasks related to antennas.

Antenna Groups Operation tasks related to antenna groups.

Traffic Parameters Operation tasks related to traffic parameters.

Traffic Map Operation tasks related to traffic maps.



12

Figure 1-8 Network tab page

Table 1-12 Description of the Network tab page


Site Operation tasks related to sites.

Transceiver Operation tasks related to transceivers.

Figure 1-9 Operation tab page

Table 1-13 Description of the Operation tab page


Predictions Operation tasks related to predictions.

Simulations Operation tasks related to capacity simulation.

Neighbor Planning Operation tasks related to neighboring cell planning.

LTE PCI Planning Operation tasks related to PCI planning.



13


LTE PRACHPlanning

Operation tasks related to PRACH planning.

LTE FrequencyPlanning

Operation tasks related to frequency planning.

LTE TAC Planning Operation tasks related to TAC planning.

LTE Cell Planning Operation tasks related to LTE cell planning.



14

2 Installing the U-Net Software

About This Chapter

This section describes how to install the U-Net software. To complete the installation of the U-Net, you only need to run the installation program and then perform operations as prompted bythe installation wizard. After the software is installed, you need to load the license and then youcan use relevant functions provided by the U-Net. If you need not use the U-Net, you can uninstallit.

2.1 Preparation for the InstallationBefore installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met.For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environmentcomponents are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements.

2.2 Installing the U-Net Main ProgramThis section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net mainprogram through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install theU-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes.

2.3 Installing a LicenseThis section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlledby a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly.

2.4 Starting the U-NetYou can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. Ifthe prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted.

2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main ProgramThis section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 2 Installing the U-Net Software


15

2.1 Preparation for the InstallationBefore installing the U-Net software, you need to ensure that the installation conditions are met.For example, you need to ensure that the U-Net software package is prepared, the environmentcomponents are installed, and the configuration of the PC meets the requirements.

Hardware RequirementsTable 2-1 lists the hardware requirements of the PC.

Table 2-1 Hardware requirements

ConfigurationItem

Recommended Configuration Minimum Configuration

CPU Intel dual-core 2.0 GHz P3 1GHz

Memory

2 GB 512 MB

HardDisk

15 GB at least 1 GB at least

Monitor 1280 x 1024 resolution 1024 x 768 resolution

Miscellaneous

DVD-ROM drive, mouse, andkeyboard

DVD-ROM drive, mouse, andkeyboard

Software RequirementsTable 2-2 lists the software requirements of the PC.

Table 2-2 Software requirements

Configuration Item

How to Obtain RecommendedConfiguration

Remarks

Operatingsystem (OS)

- Microsoft Windows XPProfessional SP2 or higher

Mandatory

Environmentcomponents

- l Microsoft .NETFramework4.0 or higher

l Microsoft WindowsInstaller3.1 or higher

Mandatory

Operatingsoftware

- Microsoft Office 2003 orhigher

Mandatory



16

Configuration Item

How to Obtain RecommendedConfiguration

Remarks

GENEX U-Net softwareinstallationpackage

l Download the softwarepackage from http://support.huawei.com.

l Obtain the GENEX U-Net installation DVD-ROM.

l You have a user accountat http://support.huawei.com andhave the permission todownload the GENEX U-Net software installationpackage.

l You have obtained theGENEX U-Net software.

Mandatory

License Contact Huawei technicalsupport engineers to obtainthe license.

- Mandatory

2.2 Installing the U-Net Main ProgramThis section describes how to install the U-Net main program. You can install the U-Net mainprogram through an automatic installation wizard. The wizard helps you successfully install theU-Net. During the installation, the system automatically displays prompt dialog boxes.

PrerequisitesNOTE

l The U-Net installation program is ready. The PC meets the installation requirements. For details, see 2.1Preparation for the Installation.

l You have logged in to the operating system by using an administrator account because the U-Net softwaremust be installed by using an administrator account.

Context

The support website of Huawei provides the U-Net installation package. The installationpackage is classified into four types.

l If you use a 32-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later thanMicrosoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet32 (exclude framework).Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet32.

l If you use a 64-bit OS and have installed a plug-in whose version is equal to or later thanMicrosoft .NET Framework 4.0, select Huawei.UNet64 (exclude framework).Otherwise, select Huawei.UNet64.

Before installing the U-Net main program, you are advised to close all the running programs toensure successful installation of the U-Net main program.

This section takes a 32-bit operating system as an example to describe the installation procedureof the U-Net.



17

http://support.huawei.com



Procedure

Step 1 Download the installation package at the support website of Huawei.Read the background information carefully and download the correct installation package.

Step 2 Double-click Huawei.UNet32.exe to display the setup wizard.

Step 3 Click Next.

Step 4 In the confirmation dialog box, select I accept the terms of the License Agreement.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the user information dialog box, enter the User Name and Company Name.

Step 7 Click Next.

Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, select the required feature components.

Step 9 Click Next.

Step 10 In the displayed dialog box, click Browse to set the installation path.

Step 11 After confirmation, click Install.

If you want to... Then...

Display the Installer setup wizard Follow the prompts to install the software.

After the installation is complete, it is recommended thatyou restart the PC. Then, perform Step 13 to checkwhether the U-Net is installed successfully.

Display the .NET Frameworksetup wizard

Follow the prompts to install the software.

Step 12 After the installation is complete, click Finish.

Step 13 Check whether the U-Net main program is installed successfully.

Choose Start > All Programs > Huawei GENEX > U-Net 3.8 to check whether the informationabout the U-Net software exists.

If... Then...

The U-Net software information exists The U-Net main program is successfullyinstalled.

The U-Net software information does notexist

Repeat Step 1 through Step 13 until the U-Netmain program is successfully installed.

Table 2-3 describes the structure of the U-Net installation folder generated after the U-Net mainprogram is installed.



18


Table 2-3 U-Net installation folder structure

Directory Description

Adjust Saves rectification parameters for the radio propagation model.

Antenna Saves antenna data.

config Saves the configuration file.

CoMP Saves the configuration parameters of the CoMP gain.

IRC Saves the configuration parameters of the IRC gain.

iScript Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine(JVM).

MeasureReport

Saves the configuration parameters for geographic display of MR data.

Data Saves the default configuration parameters of the project.

Gis Saves the default configuration parameters of the GIS.

NbrPlanning Saves various parameter templates for neighbor cell planning.

License Saves the license file.

Prediction Saves the default configuration parameters of the prediction.

Propagation Saves the default configuration parameters of the propagation model.

RF Saves the parameter template for LTE Cell planning.

RuleStore Saves the environment configuration parameters for the Java Virtual Machine(JVM).

Simulation Saves the default configuration parameters of the capacity simulation.

ToolInfo Saves the interface configuration information for domain verification.

TSCPlanning

Saves the parameter template information for TSC planning.

NetEntity Saves the related network information.

NetworkExpansion

Saves the parameters for six-sector expansion of UMTS.

Help Saves the Help files of the U-Net.

Resource Saves the template files required by the U-Net.

Resources Saves the resource files required by the U-Net.

Log Saves operation logs. NOTEThe two folders are generatedonly after the U-Net softwareruns.

Temp Saves the calculation results of path loss,prediction, and capacity simulation.



19

----End

2.3 Installing a LicenseThis section describes how to install a license. The operation rights on the U-Net are controlledby a license. You need to load a valid license to ensure that the U-Net runs properly.

Procedurel Apply for a license for yourself.

1. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for self. The DomainAuthentication dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Domain Authentication

2. Enter the domain account information.3. Click OK.

NOTE

If the entered domain account is valid, the U-Net will automatically update the license.

4. After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.l Apply for a license for others.

1. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Apply License for others. The Off-line License Application dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-2.



20

Figure 2-2 Off-line License Application

2. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters. Table 2-4 describes the parameters.

Table 2-4 Parameters in the Off-line License Application dialog box

Parameter Description

Set the save path of License file Save path of the license file.

Input the ESNs of authorized computers ESN of your PC.NOTE

You can choose Help > View ESN in themain window of the U-Net to learn the ESN.

Select tools and versions to authorize byLicense

U-Net version for domainauthentication.

3. Click Next.4. Enter the domain account information in the displayed Domain Authentication

dialog box.5. Click OK.6. After domain authentication succeeds, click Submit.

NOTE

After the license application succeeds, the U-Net automatically saves the license file to aspecified local path.

7. Update a license locally.

a. In the main window of the U-Net, choose Help > Update License. The UpdateLicense dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 2-3.



21

Figure 2-3 Update License

b. Click Browse, and choose the save path of the license file.c. Click Update License.

8. After the license loading is complete, restart the U-Net.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureAfter loading the license, restart the U-Net and choose Help > About License to view theremaining valid days of the license.

2.4 Starting the U-NetYou can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or the shortcut icon on the desktop. Ifthe prompted message indicates that no license file is loaded, load the license file as prompted.

PrerequisitesWhen the U-Net is running, the read and write operations are performed on the U-Net installationdirectory. Therefore, you must have complete read and write rights to the installation directorybefore starting the U-Net.

Select the folder where the installation directory resides, right-click, and then chooseProperties from the shortcut menu. In the displayed dialog box, view the permission informationon the Security tab page.

Procedurel Double-click the U-Net 3.8 shortcut icon on the desktop to start the U-Net software.

Alternatively, you can start the U-Net software through the Start menu or by double-clicking U-Net software installation path/Huawei.UNet.exe.

If ... Then ...

A correct license file is loaded The U-Net is started.



22

If ... Then ...

No license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that no licensefile is loaded. Obtain the license file and then loadthe license file. For details, see 2.3 Installing aLicense.

After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.

An incorrect license file is loaded A message is displayed, indicating that the licensefile is incorrect. Obtain the correct license file andthen load the license file. For details, see 2.3Installing a License.

After loading the license file, restart the U-Net.

----End

2.5 Uninstalling the U-Net Main ProgramThis section describes how to uninstall the U-Net main program.

ContextThe license file, log files, temporary files, and saved U-Net project files are retained when theU-Net is being uninstalled.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Control Panel window, double-click Add or Remove Programs.

Step 2 Select U-Net 3.8.

Step 3 Click Uninstall/Change. The interface for uninstalling the U-Net main program is displayed.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select Remove, and click Next >. Then, click Uninstall.

Step 5 After the U-Net main program is successfully uninstalled, click Finish.

You can restart the PC as required.

----End



23

3 LTE-FDD Network Planning

About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of an LTE-FDD network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the parameters such as theneighboring cells, and EARFCNs of the network, predict the network coverage range, andevaluate the network capacity to meet your network planning requirements.

3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network PlanningThis section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net.

3.2 Creating a ProjectThis section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates fordifferent network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template.Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.

3.3 Importing Geographic DataYou can import geographic data in various vector and grid formats and set coordinate systems.You can also add points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.The method for importinggeographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is the same.

3.4 Setting Propagation Models and BandsThe U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between a transmitter and a receiver based on apropagation model. Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix to perform prediction.Themethod for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systems onthe U-Net is the same.

3.5 Adding a DeviceYou can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders, or site equipment.The method forcreating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is the same.

3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Trafficparameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 3 LTE-FDD Network Planning


24

Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the trafficparameters are defined before capacity prediction.

3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

3.8 LTE-FDD PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity SimulationCapacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is asfollows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map andallocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overallnetwork performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Netgenerates a statistical report.

3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network ParametersYou can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD networkthrough the U-Net.



25

3.1 Process of LTE-FDD Network PlanningThis section describes the process of LTE-FDD network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning an LTE-FDD network by using the U-Net.

Figure 3-1 shows the process of LTE-FDD network planning.

Figure 3-1 Process of LTE-FDD network planning

Table 3-1describes the detailed information about Figure 3-1.



26

Table 3-1 Description of the LTE-FDD network planning process

No. Procedure Description

1 Creating a project For details, see 3.2 Creating a Project.

2 Importinggeographic data

You can import geographic data in various vector andgrid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also addpoints, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.Themethod for importing geographic data for differentnetwork systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see3.3 Importing Geographic Data.

3 Managingpropagation modelsand bands

The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between atransmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model.Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix toperform prediction.The method for setting propagationmodels and frequency bands for different networksystems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.4Setting Propagation Models and Bands.

4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.

5 Setting trafficparameters

Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services,which are to be used during prediction.For details, see3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters.

6 Setting NEparameters

You can import existing base station data to create basestations or use a base station template to automaticallycreate base stations. You can also create sites,transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 3.7Setting LTE-FDD NE Parameters.

7 Calculating the pathloss

For details, see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.

8 Predicting networkperformance

For details, see 3.8 LTE-FDD Prediction.

9 Planning PCI/frequency/neighboring cells/PRACH/TAC

For details, see 3.10 Planning LTE-FDD NetworkParameters.The planning results can be applied to NEs.

10 Creating a trafficmap

For details, see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.

11 Performingcapacity simulation

For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.The capacity simulation results can be applied toprediction.

12 Exporting networkplanning results

For details, see Prediction and Neighboring CellPlanning.



27


Contextl Only one project can run on the U-Net at a time. In normal cases, one project corresponds

to the network planning for an area or a city.l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.

For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybridnetwork.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Project Templates

Step 2 Select a project template.l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select an

appropriate project template based on the actual network system.l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. For

example, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to selectproject templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks.

l LTE-TDD and CDMA do not support hybrid networking with other network systems.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Save a project file.

Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a projectfile.



28

You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder forsaving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacitysimulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.

NOTE

Based on the save format, the U-Net determines whether to add the calculation result data in theproject name.losses path to the project file in .ipl format.

l Open an existing project file.Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.

NOTE

Alternatively, double-click an .ipl project file to start and open the project.


3.3.1 Basic Knowledge of Geographic DataThis section describes the basic knowledge of the geographic data, such as data type, data format,and coordinate system.

Geographic DataThe U-Net uses two types of geographic data for planning and analysis, that is, Digital ElevationModel (DEM) data and Digital Terrain Model (DTM) data. Currently, the U-Net can importgeographic data files in Planet, Shape, MIF, or Vertical Mapper format.

The two types of geographic data are described as follows:l DEM data:

It is the data about the ground elevation, including the plane coordinates and the value ofthe ground elevation.

l DTM data:It is the data about the altitude, including the plane coordinates and the value of the altitude.

The DTM data is similar to the DEM data. The difference is that the DEM data represents theabove-the-sea height, including the terrain height and the clutter height, whereas the DTM datarepresents only the terrain height.

Geographic Data in Planet FilesPlanet files save the data about the altitude, clutter class, clutter height, vector, point layer, andgeographic projection.

Table 3-2 shows the relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types. Each layercorresponds to several Planet file types.



29

Table 3-2 Relationship between the Planet file types and the layer types

Planet FileType

Layer Type Description

Point Layer File Text Layer (PointLayer)

Point layer files save the identification data of eachtypical land mark (such as a town).Point layer files consist of the following types offiles:l Index file: saves the geographic location

information about each land mark.l Menu file: saves land mark numbers and

names.l Text file: saves the information about a land

mark.

Vector File Vector Layer Vector files save the information about terrainfeatures such as roads, railways, streets, andstreams.Vector files consist of the following types of files:l Index file: saves the geographic location

information about each vector.l Menu file: saves vector numbers and names.l Terrain feature file: saves the information

about each terrain feature.The information about each terrain feature mustbe saved in an individual vector file.

Clutter HeightFile

Buildings Layer(Layer of Clutter andBuilding Heights)

Clutter height files consist of the following typesof files:l Index file: saves the geographic location

information about each binary data file.l Binary data file: saves the clutter heights at

each geographic location on the map.

Clutter ClassFile

Clutter Layer (ClutterClass Layer)

Clutter class files consist of the following types offiles:l Index file: saves the geographic location

information about each clutter.l Menu file: saves clutter class numbers and

names.l Binary data file: saves the information about

the terrain (such as forests, lakes, flat openareas, urban areas, and high buildings) forcalculating the path loss.



30

Planet FileType

Layer Type Description

Altitude File Heights Layer(Altitude Layer)

Altitude files consist of the following types offiles:l Index file (ASCII text file): saves the

geographic location information about eachbinary data file.

l Binary data file: saves the data about the height(excluding the height of the building) abovethe sea level of each geographic location in themap.

GeographicProjection File

Generally, thegeographic projectionfile is stored in thefolder of altitude files.The file name isprojection.

The geographic projection file is in .txt format. Itincludes the required projection information, suchas the projection mode, information about theellipsoid, and information about the coordinateoffset.

Geographic Data in Shape FilesShape files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic featuresin binary mode.

Shape file is a map file format developed by the ESRI company. Shape files save space data andcan be opened by using the ArcExplorer.

Shape files consist of .shp, .shx and .dbf files.l The .shp file saves the geographic data.l The .shx file saves the index information about the geographic data in the .shp file.l The .dbf (dBASE) file saves the feature information about each record.

Geographic Data in Vertical Mapper FilesVertical Mapper file is a type of charting file for satellite remote sensing. Vertical Mapper filessave the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic features. The U-Netsupports the Vertical Mapper files in the same way as it supports the Planet files.

Vertical Mapper files consist of .grc files and .grd files.l The .grc file corresponds to the raster map with discrete values, such as the raster map of

clutter classes.l The .grd file corresponds to the raster map with continuous values, such as the raster map

of altitudes.

Geographic Data in MIF FilesMIF files save the information about the geographic location and relevant geographic featuresin ASCII format. MIF files can be imported to the U-Net and can be displayed on the U-Net asa type of Shape data.



31

MIF file is a map file format developed by the MapInfo company. MIF files can be used on allthe platforms supported by the MapInfo software.

MIF files consist of .mif files and .mid files.l The .mif file consists of the file header and the data.

– The file header contains the information about projection and boundary.– The data contains all the space data records and the coloring scheme for each record.

l The .mid file records the index information about the space data in the .mif file.The .mid file is optional. Not all the MIF files have .mid files.

Geographic Data in .bil Filesl The .bil files save the binary DEM data.l The .hdr file is the header file of a .bil file and saves the information about a .bil file such

as the number of bytes, storage mode, number of rows, and number of columns.l The save path of a .bil file must contain an .hdr file that has the same prefix name as the .bil

file.

Geographic Data in .tab Files (Grid Format)l A .tab file in grid format specifies the table structure of map attribute data, including the

number of fields, field names, field types, field widths, index fields, and key spaceinformation about corresponding layers.

l The save path of a .tab file in grid format must contain the .grc or .grd file specified inthe .tab file.

l You can open a .tab file in .txt format and query the name of the .grc or .grd file specifiedin the .tab file.

Geographic Data in .tab Files (Vector Format)l The .tab file in vector format is a type of map file developed by the MapInfo company.l The save path of a .tab file in vector format must contain the .dat, .id, and .map files that

have the same prefix name as the .tab file.For example, the save path of the River.tab file must contain the River.dat, River.id, andRiver.map files.Otherwise, the U-Net cannot successfully import the geographic data inthis format.

Coordinate SystemsThis section describes the basic concepts about projection, ellipsoid, and coordinate systems.

Projection and EllipsoidA map or a geographic database is a flat representation of data collected from a curved surface.A projection is a means for presenting all or part of a spheroid on a plane. The projection cannotbe done without distortion.

Therefore, you must choose the characteristic (distance, direction, scale, area, or shape) to bepresented accurately at the expense of the other characteristics or make a compromise betweenseveral characteristics. Then, different projection methods are formed.

The ellipsoid is the pattern used to model the earth. It is defined by its geometric parameters.



32

Classification of Coordinate Systems

To determine a geographic location, you need to identify the location by using coordinates. Indifferent coordinate systems, however, the coordinates for the same location are different.

Currently, the U-Net uses two types of coordinate systems, that is, the geodetic coordinate systemand the longitude/latitude coordinate system.

l Geodetic coordinate system

Considering the Earth as a plane, you can create a right-angle coordinate system by takinga point of the Earth as the origin, the east direction as the positive direction of the X-axis,and the north direction as the positive direction of the Y-axis. All the points of the planeare in the first quadrant of the coordinate system. Then, a geographic location can beidentified by a pair of coordinates (x, y). This pair of coordinates is called geodeticcoordinates. Geodetic coordinates are continuous values. The unit is meter.

l Longitude/Latitude coordinate system

The spherical location can be identified by using the longitude/latitude coordinate system.Values on the longitude and latitude coordinates are continuous.

– The longitude of a point refers to the angle between the local meridian and the primemeridian. The east of the prime meridian is the east longitude (180 degrees) and thewest of the prime meridian is the west longitude (180 degrees).

– The latitude of a point refers to the angle between the normal line of the correspondinggeographic point on the ellipsoid and the equator. The north of the equator is callednorth latitude (90 degrees) and the south of the equator is called south latitude (90degrees).

3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data in Planet Format QuicklyThis section describes how to import geographic data in planet format quickly. By using thismethod, you can import multiple graphic layer files in batches at a time.

Prerequisitesl In the digital e-map folder, there are one or more sub-graphic layer folders including

Text, Vector, Building, Clutter, and Heights.

l After including complete file types, a sub-graphic layer can be automatically recognizedby the system and then successfully imported. For example, the Heights graphic layer mustinclude an index file and the corresponding binary file.For the file types included in eachgraphic layer, see Geographic Data.

l After a projection file is put in the Heights folder, it can be automatically recognized bythe system.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.

Step 3 Choose Quick Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-3.



33

Figure 3-3 Quick Import

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a digital e-map folder.

Step 5 Click OK. The Import Map dialog box is displayed.

The system automatically recognizes and matches the data files in the digital e-map folder, asshown in Figure 3-4.



34

Figure 3-4 Import Map Dialog Box

Step 6 Optional: You can select a parameter in Figure 3-4 and click to modify the file path or re-set the parameter.For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Geographic Datain Planet Format.

Step 7 Click OK. The import of the geographic data is complete.

The imported map files are displayed in the map window. On the GEO tab page, you can alsochoose Map > Sub-graphic Layer on the navigation tree to view the imported graphic layerdata.

----End

3.3.3 Importing Sub-graphic Layer Data Files ManuallyThis section describes how to manually import each sub-graphic layer data file.



35

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.

Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type and the file to be imported.

CAUTIONBefore selecting a file type, read the description in Table 3-3 carefully. Otherwise, you may failto import the file.

Table 3-3 Description of Sub-Graphic Layer File Types

Graphic LayerType

Available File Type Description

Satellitic(navigation map)

l .pngl .bmpl .jpg

l When you select a .shp file, there mustbe a .dbf file with the same prefix nameunder the file path. Otherwise, youcannot view geographic featureinformation.

l If an Index file is selected, the folderwhere the selected file is located mustcontain other related files.For the filesincluded in each layer, see GeographicData in Planet Files.

l When you select a .bil file, there mustbe a .hdr file with the same prefix nameunder the file path. If you import a .bilfile in the Clutter layer, you need toimport a .mnu file with the same prefixname.

l When you select a .tab file andmeanwhile import it in the Vectorlayer, there must be .dat, .id, and .mapfiles with the same prefix name underthe file path. For details, seeGeographic Data in .tab Files(Vector Format).

l If a TAB file is selected and the data isimported to the clutter layer, the folderwhere the selected file is located mustcontain a GRC file. For details, seeGeographic Data in .tab Files (GridFormat).

Geometry l .shpl .mif

Text Index File

Vector l Index Filel .tab

Buildings l Index Filel .bil

Clutter l Index Filel .bill .grcl .tab



36

Graphic LayerType

Available File Type Description

Heights l Index Filel .bill .grdl .tab

l When you select a .tab file andmeanwhile import it in the Heightslayer, there must be a .grd file under thefile path. For details, see GeographicData in .tab Files (Grid Format).

You can import .grc, .grd, .bil, .shp, and .mif files in batches.

Step 5 Click Open.

Step 6 If you import a data file of Satellitic layer, do as follows to set the geographic parameters.1. For parameter description, see Parameters for Importing Satellite Maps.2. Click Import.

----End

3.3.4 Selecting Geographic Data of a Proper Resolution LevelWhen geographic data in the calculation area has multiple resolution levels, you must select thegeographic data of a proper resolution level to ensure the accuracy of service planning.

PrerequisitesMultiple geographic data files are imported to the U-Net.

Context

On the U-Net, the geographic area for calculation is defined as follows:

l If only one geographic data file is imported, the U-Net performs calculation based on onlythe geographic area corresponding to this file.

l If multiple geographic data files are imported, geographic data of multiple resolution levelsis available for the overlapped geographic area.

l When geographic data of multiple resolution levels is available for a geographic area, U-Net selects the appropriate resolution level according to the display sequence of thegeographic data in the Clutter/Heights/Buildings layers.

l This section describes how to select the appropriate resolution level in the Heights layer.



37

In this case, the overlapped geographic data has multiple levels of resolution. In this case, selectthe geographic data of a proper resolution level for service calculation.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, click before Map > Heights to expand the node.The imported geographic data is displayed under Heights.

Step 3 Drag the layer of a resolution level to be used as the data source to top.

----End

ExampleFor example, the geographic data of multiple resolution levels (from 5 m to 40 m) have beenimported to the Heights layer. If the geographic data of three resolution levels (5 m, 10 m, and20 m) are available for a calculation area and you want to use the top resolution level (5 m), dragthe layer of 5 m to the top, as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 Heights layer

3.3.5 Setting Display Parameters of Geographic DataThis section describes how to set the display parameters of various geographic data. The U-Netenables you to set the color, the transparency, and the shading effect of clutters of differentheights to clearly and vividly display the geographic data.



38

PrerequisitesThe geographic data is imported.

Procedurel Set the display parameters of each layer.

This section takes the clutter layer as an example to describe how to set the displayparameters. The settings of the display parameters for other layers are similar to the settingsfor the clutter layer. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting DisplayParameters of Geographic Data.

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter > map name.3. Right-click and choose Properties from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-6.

The Clutter dialog box is displayed.

Figure 3-6 Properties

4. Click the Display tab, and set the display parameters for each clutter.

NOTE

For the heights layer, you can set three-dimensional effect by moving the Contrast slider inthe lower left corner.

5. Click OK.

After the setting is complete, the map window is refreshed automatically. Then, youcan view the refreshed window.

l Display the heights layer in plastic mode.1. In the navigation tree, choose Map > Heights.2. Choose Relievo Style from the shortcut menu.

----End



39

3.3.6 Setting Clutter Layer ParametersThis section describes how to set radio propagation parameters for the clutter layer, such aspenetration loss, spatial multiplexing factor, and standard deviation of shadow fading. Theseparameters can be used for coverage prediction and capacity simulation calculation.

PrerequisitesThe geographic data has been imported.

ProcedureStep 1 In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.

Step 2 Choose Map > Clutter in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Clutter and choose ParameterManagement from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Display dialog box isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Clutter Parameters Display

Step 3 Set radio propagation parameters for each clutter.l Actual Value tab page: displays the parameters related to the imported map.l Default Value tab page: displays the default parameters when no map is imported.

For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.

Step 4 Click OK.

----End



40

3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid DataOn the U-Net, each project corresponds to only one projection mode and one type of spheroiddata. The projection mode and spheroid data have impacts on service analysis. This sectiondescribes two methods for setting the projection mode and spheroid data.

Procedurel Use the projection mode and spheroid data in the Planet geographic data file.

Planet geographic data folder generally contains the geographic projection file. After Planetgeographic data is imported, the U-Net automatically identifies the projection mode andspheroid data in the projection file. For details, see 3.3.2 Importing Geographic Data inPlanet Format Quickly.

NOTE

If the Planet geographic data folder does not contain the projection file or if the U-Net fails to identify andimport the projection file, set the projection mode and spheroid data by referring to the followingoperations.

l Use an existing projection mode and spheroid data in the coordinate system group.1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.3. Choose Coordinate from the shortcut menu.4. In the dialog box displayed, select the projection parameters and spheroid data file.

For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Setting Coordinate Systems.

If... Then...

The requiredprojection mode andspheroid data areavailable

1. Select a coordinate system group from the Find indrop-down list.

2. Select a required file from multiple projectionconfiguration files in this group.

3. Click Apply.The names of the current projection system and spheroiddata are displayed in the Current Coordinate Settingwindow, as shown in Figure 3-8.



41

If... Then...

The requiredprojection mode andspheroid data areunavailable

1. Select the favorite coordinate system group from theFind in drop-down list.If the existing coordinate system groups cannot meetyour requirement, click New Group to create arequired coordinate system group.

2. Click New. The Create dialog box is displayed.3. Set parameters related to the projection mode and

spheroid data.4. Click Create.

After the projection mode and spheroid data arecreated, the Coordinate Systems dialog box isdisplayed.

5. Select the new projection configuration file in thedialog box.

6. Click Apply.

Figure 3-8 Coordinate Systems dialog box

----End

Follow-up Procedure

You must manually modify related parameters after setting the projection mode and spheroiddata.

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.



42

3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Set parameters related to the projection mode and spheroid data in the displayed dialog

box.5. Click OK.

3.3.8 Configuring the Coordinate Display ModeThe U-Net supports four modes for displaying coordinates. You can select the proper displaymode of coordinates as required.


ContextOn the U-Net, information about the coordinates is displayed in the status bar and the ruler.Table 3-4 describes the four display modes of coordinates.

Table 3-4 Display modes of coordinates

Display Mode Meaning Example

xy reference frame Indicates the display mode ofgeodetic coordinates.

442472.51

xxdxxmxx.xxsS Indicates the display mode oflongitude/latitudecoordinates in the format ofxx degree.xx minute.xxsecond.

116°19′45″E

xx.xxxxxS Indicates the ESWN displaymode of longitude/latitudecoordinates.

116.32E

-xx.xxxxx Indicates the negative/positive display mode oflongitude/latitudecoordinates.

116.32

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map.

Step 3 Choose Map Setting from the shortcut menu.

If the geographic data is not properly imported, the right-click menu is not available.

Step 4 Select a proper coordinate display mode in Coordinate Style in the displayed dialog box.

BL Style Precision indicates the display precision of coordinates.



43

l When the coordinate display mode is xy reference frame and xxdxxmxx.xxsS, the value ofthis parameter is 2 by default and cannot be changed.

l In other coordinate display modes, the value of this parameter is 6 by default and can bechanged as required.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

3.3.9 Creating Vector ObjectsYou can either import or create vector objects, such as points, lines, and polygons. Vectors aremainly used for display and service calculation. As a type of vector, polygons can be used asfilters, computation zones, and print zones.

Basic Knowledge of Calculation Areas

This section describes the relations between a created calculation area and the base stations thatare actually involved in the prediction.

Common Polygonal Areas

This section takes Figure 3-9 as an example.

Figure 3-9 Example of a calculation area



44

In Figure 3-9, the polygon drawn by users are in blue; the propagation area of each activatedbase station is in green. Propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twicethe cell radius.

The green areas that intersect with the blue rectangle are considered in the prediction. Forexample, though sites 11 and 9 are not included in the polygon, they are considered in theprediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle; sites 10 and 8 arenot considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersect with the bluerectangle.

Linear Polygonal AreasThis section takes Figure 3-10 as an example.

Figure 3-10 Example of a calculation area

In Figure 3-10, the lines drawn by users are in purple; the external polygon of the lines is inblue and the width of the polygon is set by users; the propagation area of each activated basestation is in green. The propagation areas are square, and the side length of the square is twicethe cell radius.

The green areas that intersect with the blue polygon are considered in the prediction. Forexample, though sites 4 and 2 are not included in the external polygon of the lines, they areconsidered in the prediction because their propagation areas intersect with the blue rectangle;sites 0 and 3 are not considered in the prediction because their propagation areas do not intersectwith the blue rectangle.

Importing and Exporting a PolygonYou can import polygon files in different formats, such as .xml, .mif, .tab, .kml, and .kmz. Youcan also export an existing polygon from the system.



45

Prerequisites

To import a polygon represented by longitude/latitude, you must set the longitude/latitudecoordinate. For details, see 3.3.7 Configuring the Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.

Context

You can import an existing polygon or draw a new polygon.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.

Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Import

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported.

Step 5 Click Open and then import a polygon.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Export a polygon.


2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons > a polygon.

3. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.

4. In the displayed dialog box as shown in Figure 3-12, select a coordinate type and thenclick OK.



46

Figure 3-12 Exporting Polygon dialog box

NOTE

If you have not set the coordinate system, Longitude / Latitude grays out.

5. In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name., and thenexport a polygon.

If... Then...

Select the .mif format. Two files are displayed under the saving path with thesuffix names of .mif and .mid.The exported file contains projection information.

Select the .tab format. Four files are displayed under the file path with thesuffixes of .id, .dat, .map, and .tab.The exported file contains projection information.

Select the .xml format. An .xml file is displayed under the saving path.

Select the .kmz or .kmlformat.

An .xml or .kml file is displayed under the saving path.When you perform the operation in 4, select Longitude/Latitude as the coordinate type. After that, the system canexport the polygon in such format.

l Export polygons in batches.

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.3. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, select the coordinate system and export type.5. Click OK.6. In the displayed dialog box, select a path to save the exported polygon files.

Drawing Polygons DirectlyThis section describes how to draw polygons. You can draw new polygons, or export and editthe existing polygons.



47

Procedure

Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose AddPolygon from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Click the workspace to add points to the polygon one by one.l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted line,

indicating that you are drawing this line.l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating

that you have finished drawing this line.l You can right-click to exit.

Step 3 Double-click the last point to finish the creation of the polygon.

In the displayed U-Net dialog box, the geographic area covered by the polygon is displayed.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureView the clutter statistics of a polygon.

After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutterstatistics of this polygon.

Creating Polygons Based on LinesThis section describes how to create polygons based on lines. You can draw a line and create apolygon based on the line.

Procedure

Step 1 Draw a line.

1. Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose AddLine from the shortcut menu.

2. Click in the workspace to draw a straight line or a polygonal line.l If only one point of a line in the polygon is determined, the line is displayed as a dotted

line, indicating that you are drawing this line.l If two points of a line are determined, the line is displayed as a continuous line, indicating

that you have finished drawing this line.l You can right-click to exit.

3. Double-click the point where you want to finish the drawing.

NOTE

You can also click on the toolbar to create an independent point. Alternatively, right-click inthe map window and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu.

4. Optional: Move or delete a line.

Select a line in the map window and drag it to a new position.



48

Select a line in the map window and press Del to delete the line.

5. Optional: Add, delete, or edit a point of a line.

Right-click a point of a line and choose Add Point, Delete Point, or Edit Point from theshortcut menu to add, delete, or edit the point.

Step 2 Set the extended polygon of a line.


2. Choose Lines > A line in the navigation tree.

3. Right-click the line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcut menu.

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the width of the extended polygon in the Strip Width area.

The width ranges from 0 to 1000 meters.

5. Click OK.

Two lines are automatically extended to Strip Width/2 away from the drawn line on thetwo sides of the drawn line, and these lines form an extended polygon.

Alternatively, you can right-click a line and choose Create Strip Polygon from the shortcutmenu to set the extended polygon of the line.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

View the clutter statistics of a polygon.

After importing geographic data, you can choose Polygons > A polygon in the navigation tree.Then, right-click A polygon and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu to view the clutterstatistics of this polygon.

Editing Polygons

You can edit and combine polygons and modify their properties.

Procedurel Edit a polygon.

1. Click on the toolbar. The map window is selected.

2. Edit a polygon.

If you need to... Then...

Move a point 1. Select a point of a polygon.2. Drag this point to a new position. Alternatively, right-

click the point and choose Edit Point from the shortcutmenu to change the coordinates as required.



49


Add a point to a side 1. Select a side.2. Right-click a position on the side where a point needs

to be added.3. Choose Add Point.

A point is added to the side.

Delete a point 1. Right-click a point in a polygon.2. Choose Delete Point.

Move a polygon 1. Select a polygon.2. Drag the polygon to a new position.

Delete a polygon 1. Select a polygon.2. Press Del. Alternatively, right-click a polygon and

choose Delete Polygon from the shortcut menu.If the polygon is referenced, for example it isreferenced by a vector-based traffic map, the systemprompts that the polygon cannot be deleted.

NOTE

l You can press Ctrl+Z, or choose Edit > Undo in the U-Net main interface to undo thepreceding operation.

l The modifications in the map window can be undone at most for three steps. Themodifications on the property page, however, cannot be undone.

l Query and modify the properties of a polygon.1. Select a polygon in the map window.2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Query and modify the polygon properties on various tab pages in the Polygon

Properties dialog box.– Query and modify the names of polygons on the Region Properties tab page.– Query and modify the point coordinates of polygons on the Points List tab page.– Query and modify the font color and character size on the Font tab page.– Query and modify the fill color and line color of polygons on the Color&Line tab

page.4. Click OK.

l Combine polygons.

1. Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, click the Geo tab in the Explorer window,right-click Polygons and choose Polygon Operator from the shortcut menu.

2. Select the polygons to be combined and the combination mode in the PolygonOperator dialog box.



50


Combine the overlappedareas of multiplepolygons as a newpolygon

1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select thepolygons to be combined.

2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.

Combine thecombination areas ofmultiple polygons as anew polygon

1. In the Current Polygons box on the left, select thepolygons to be combined.

2. Select Intersect in Polygon Operator.

Exclude the overlappedarea of two polygonsfrom one polygon to forma new polygon based onthe remaining area of thispolygon.

1. Select one polygon from the left area in the CurrentPolygons window.

2. Select Exclude.3. Select another polygon from the right area in the

Current Polygons window.

3. Click Run.

You can preview the polygon in the Preview area.4. Optional: Select the new polygon in the Output area. Click Rename to change the

name of the polygon.

After typing a new name, press Enter to change the name or Esc.5. Click OK. The combined polygon is displayed in the map window.

l Set polygons in batches.


Modify the propertiesof polygons in batches

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.4. Set the font, fill color, and line color of polygons in batches

in the Display dialog box.

Show/hide names ofpolygons in batches

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Polygons.3. Choose Show/Hide All Polygon's Name from the shortcut

menu.TIP

You can right-click a polygon in the map window and choose ShowPolygon Name from the shortcut menu to show/hide the name of thepolygon.

----End

3.3.10 Interface Reference for Geographic DataThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for managing geographic data.



51

Parameters for Importing Geographic Data in Planet FormatThis section describes the parameters that are involved in the manual and quick import ofgeographic data in Planet format. You can refer to this section when importing geographic datain Planet format through the Import Map dialog box.


Map FilePath:Indicatesthe path ofmap files.

Clutter Indicates the file path of clutter-layer data.

Height Indicates the file path of altitude-layer data.

Vector Indicates the file path of vector-layer data.

Building Indicates the file path of clutter-height-layerdata.

ProjectionFile Path:Indicatesthe path oftheprojectionfile.

Projection Path Indicates the path of the projection file.

Projection File Valid Indicates whether the projection file is valid.

ProjectionParameter

Benchmark Longitude Indicates the central longitudinal line in theprojection zone.The default value is 117. The value range isfrom 0 to 360.The difference between the centrallongitudinal line in the coordinate systemand the longitude of each site must be lessthan 6 degrees.

Benchmark Latitude Indicates the central latitudinal line in theprojection zone.The default value is 0. The value range isfrom -90 to 90.The difference between the centrallatitudinal line in the coordinate system andthe latitude of each site must be less than 6degrees.

Offset in Y Direction Indicates the offset in the Y direction.

Offset in X Direction Indicates the offset in the X direction.

Projectiontype

Projection type Indicates the projection mode.

Spheroid Spheroid Selects a type of spheroid.



52

Parameters for Importing Satellite MapsThis section describes the parameters for importing satellite maps. You can refer to this sectionwhen importing satellite maps in the Import Satellite Map dialog box.

Parameter Description Value

GeographicInformation:indicates thesettings relatedto the positionof a satellitemap in the mapwindow.

BoundType

Indicates the boundarymode.l Long/Lat indicates that

the coordinates at theboundary are longitude/latitude coordinates.This option is availableonly when geographicdata is imported.

l X/Y indicates that thecoordinates at theboundary are geodeticcoordinates.

If no geographic data isimported, the value can onlybe X/Y.

West Indicates the westernboundary of a satellite map.

NOTEl The value of the eastern

boundary must be greaterthan the value of thewestern boundary; thevalue of the northernboundary must be greaterthan the value of thesouthern boundary.

l You can also drag thepreview graph in the mapwindow to change thegraph position.

North Indicates the northernboundary of a satellite map.

East Indicates the easternboundary of a satellite map.

South Indicates the southernboundary of a satellite map.

Transparency Indicates the transparency ofa satellite map.

The default value is 33%.

Source File Indicates the path of thesatellite map file.

-

Parameters for Setting Display Parameters of Geographic DataThis section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of geographic data. Youcan refer to this section when setting the properties for displaying the Clutter layer, Heightslayer, Buildings layer, Vector layer, and geographic projection layer.



53

Parameters in the Clutter Dialog Box


Color Indicates the color of aclutter.

The system maps the defaultcolor of each clutter based onthe keyword. If the mappingfails, the clutter color is blueby default.You can click Color of eachclutter to change the coloringscheme.

Value Indicates the name of aclutter.

The value depends on thegeographic data.

Legend Indicates the name of aclutter in the legend.


Add To Legend Indicates whether to add thecoloring scheme of the clutterclass to the legend.

This option is not selected bydefault.

Transparency Indicates the transparency ofa layer.


Parameter in the Building Dialog Box


Color Indicates the color of a heightrange.

By default, the systemsupports 11 height ranges.One height rangecorresponds to one color. Thenumber of height ranges canbe any number from 2 to 225.You can click Color of eachclutter to change the coloringscheme.

Min Value Indicates the minimum valueof a height range.

The unit is meter.

Max Value Indicates the maximum valueof a height range.

The unit is meter.

Legend Indicates the name of a heightrange in the legend.

The name of a height rangeconsists of its maximumvalue and minimum value.

Add To Legend Indicates whether to add thecoloring scheme of thealtitude to the legend.




54




Parameter in the Height Dialog BoxParameter Description Value

Color Indicates the color of a heightrange.

By default, the systemsupports 14 height ranges.One height rangecorresponds to one color.You can click Color of eachclutter to change the coloringscheme.

Min Value Indicates the minimum valueof a height range.

The unit is meter.

Max Value Indicates the maximum valueof a height range.

The unit is meter.

Legend Indicates the name of a heightrange in the legend.

The name of a height rangeconsists of its maximumvalue and minimum value.

Add To Legend Indicates whether to add thecoloring scheme of the clutterheight to the legend.




Contrast Indicates the three-dimensional display contrast.

The default value is 7.NOTEl If the slider is moved to

10, it indicates themaximum contrast effect.

l If the slider is moved to 1,it indicates there is nothree-dimensional effect.



55

Parameters in the Vectors Dialog BoxParameter Description Value

Color Indicates the line pattern andcolor of each vector (such asthe street and railway) indisplay.

The system maps the defaultcolor of each clutter based onthe keyword. If the mappingfails, the clutter color isorange by default.You can click Color of eachvector to change the coloringscheme.

Legend Indicates the name of a vectorin the legend.


Add To Legend Indicates whether to add thecoloring scheme of the vectorlayer to the legend.


Parameters in the Text Dialog BoxParameter Description Value

Symbol Indicates the pattern, color,and size of a point layer.

You can click Symbol ofeach point layer to change thecoloring scheme.

Legend Indicates the name of a pointlayer in the legend.


Add To Legend Indicates whether to add thecoloring scheme of the pointlayer to the legend.


Parameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer

This section describes the parameters for setting the clutter class layer. You can refer to thissection when setting the clutter class layer parameters in the Clutter Parameters Display dialogbox.


Code Indicates the number of a clutterclass.


Clutter Class Indicates the name of a clutterclass.


Clutter Height Indicates the height of a clutter. The default value is 0 and theunit is meter.



56


Spatial MultiplexFactor

Indicates the spatialmultiplexing factor.

The default value is 1.

Penetration Loss Indicates the penetration loss. The default value is 0 and theunit is dB.The penetration loss variesaccording to the propagationenvironment.

Model StandardDeviation

Indicates the standard deviationof the slow fading margin.

The default value is 7 and theunit is dB.The standard deviation variesaccording to the propagationenvironment.

Shadow Corr Indicates the factor of shadowfading.

The default value is 0.5.The factor varies according tothe propagation environment.

C/(I+N)StandardDeviation

Indicates the standard deviationbased on C/(I + N).

The default value is 8 and theunit is dB.

Parameters for Setting Coordinate SystemsThis section describes the parameters for setting the projection mode and spheroid data. Youcan refer to this section when setting the projection mode and spheroid data in the CoordinateSystems dialog box.

Parameters in the Coordinate Systems dialog boxParameter Description Value

Find in Selects a coordinatesystem group from thedrop-down list.

The default value isfavorite.

New Group Creates a coordinatesystem group.Click this button. The NewGroup dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the nameof the new coordinatesystem group.

The name of a coordinatesystem group contains amaximum of 248characters including onlynumerals, letters, andunderscores.



57


Delete Group Deletes a coordinatesystem group.

You can delete customcoordinate system groupsbut cannot deletepredefined coordinatesystem groups. That is,deleting favoritecoordinate system groupsis not allowed.

List of existingcoordinatesystems in theselected group

Name Indicates the name of anexisting coordinatesystem.

-

Projection Indicates the projectionmode of a coordinatesystem.

-

Spheroid Indicates the spheroid dataof a coordinate system.

-

Region Indicates a region. The value is determinedby the projection modeand spheroid data. You donot need to set thisparameter.

New Creates a coordinatesystem.Click this button. TheCreate dialog box isdisplayed. Enter the nameof the new coordinatesystem. Then, set theproject mode and spheroiddata.

For details about theparameters, seeParameters in the Createdialog box.

Property Checks the properties ofthe selected coordinatesystem.

-

Delete Deletes the selectedcoordinate system.

-

Parameters in the Create dialog boxParameter Description Value

General Name Indicates the name of acoordinate system.

The default value isNewSystem.



58


ProjectionParameterNOTE

The projectionparametersvary accordingto theprojectionmode.

BenchmarkLongitude

Indicates the centrallongitudinal line in theprojection zone.

The default value is 117.The value range is from 0to 360.NOTE

The difference between thecentral longitudinal line inthe coordinate system and thelongitude of each site must beless than 6 degrees.

BenchmarkLatitude

Indicates the centrallatitudinal line in theprojection zone.

The default value is 0. Thevalue range is from -90 to90.NOTE

The difference between thecentral latitudinal line in thecoordinate system and thelatitude of each site must beless than 6 degrees.

Offset in YDirection

Indicates the offset in the Ydirection.

The default value is 0 andthe unit is meter. The valuerange is from 0 to1,000,000.

Offset in XDirection

Indicates the offset in the Xdirection.

The default value is500,000 and the unit ismeter. The value range isfrom 0 to 600,000.

First Parallel Indicates the first standardlatitudinal line.


SecondParallel

Indicates the secondstandard latitudinal line.


AzCentralLine

Indicates the azimuth of thecentral line in theprojection.


RectifiedToSkew

Indicates the rectified angleof the oblique angle.


LongitudeZone

Indicates the longitudinalzone.

The default value is 0 andthe value range is from 0 to60.

Projection type Projectiontype

Indicates the projectionmode.

-

Spheroid Spheroid Selects a type of spheroid. -



59

Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Lines

This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of lines. You can refer to thissection when viewing the properties of lines in the Line Properties dialog box.

Table 3-5 Parameters on the Line Properties Tab Page


Name Indicates the name of a line.The default value is Line_*.

Show Line Name Indicates whether to show the name of a linein the map window.By default, this option is selected.

Length(m) Indicates the length of a line.Unit: m.

Line Width(px) Indicates the width of a line.The default value is 2. The unit is pixel.

Line Type Indicates the type of a line.

Line Color Indicates the color of a line.

Comments Indicates the comments on the line.

Table 3-6 Parameters on the Points List Tab Page


Point Type Indicates the display mode of the coordinatesat the points of a line. The default value is X/Y.l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates.l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as

longitude/latitude coordinates.NOTE

If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/Latitude is unavailable.

X Indicates the X coordinate of a point.

Y Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.

Parameters for Viewing the Properties of Polygons

This section describes the parameters for viewing the properties of polygons or viewing theclutter information about polygons. You can refer to this section when viewing the properties



60

of polygons in the Polygon Properties dialog box or viewing the clutter information aboutpolygons in the Clutter Statistics of XXX dialog box.

Parameters in the Polygon Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-7 Parameters displayed on the Region Properties tab page


Name Indicates the name of a polygon. The defaultvalue is Polygon_Draw_*.

Show Polygon Information Indicates whether to show the name of apolygon in the map window. By default, thisoption is selected.

Area Indicates the area of a polygon. The unit issquare kilometer.

Comments Indicates the comments on a polygon.

Table 3-8 Parameters displayed on the Points List tab page


Point Type Indicates the display mode of the coordinatesat the points of a polygon. The default valueis X/Y.l X/Y: displayed as geodetic coordinates.l Longitude/Latitude: displayed as

longitude/latitude coordinates.NOTE

If projection parameters are not set, Longitude/Latitude is unavailable.

Polygon Order Indicates the number of a polygon. Thedefault value is 1. This parameter is set to 1for simple polygons by default.

X Indicates the X coordinate of a point.

Y Indicates the Y coordinate of a point.

Longitude Indicates the longitude of a point.

Latitude Indicates the latitude of a point.



61

Table 3-9 Parameters displayed on the Font tab page


Color Color.

Font Font.

Size Size.

Style Style.

Example Example of words.

Table 3-10 Parameters displayed on the Color&Line tab page


Color Color for filling.

Transparency Transparence.

Lines Color Indicates the color of lines in a polygon. Thedefault color is blue.

Lines Type Indicates the display mode of lines in apolygon. The default value is solid.

Line Width Indicates the display width of lines in apolygon. The default value is 2 and the unit ispixel.

Parameters in the Clutter Statistics of XXX Dialog BoxParameter Description Value

ID Indicates the ID of a clutter class on the U-Net. The value dependson the geographicdata.

Clutter Class Indicates the name of a clutter class. The value dependson the geographicdata.

Area(sq.km.) Indicates the size of a clutter in the polygon. The value dependson the size of thepolygon and thegeographic data.The unit is squarekilometer.



62


Percent Indicates the percentage of a clutter in thepolygon.

The value dependson the size of thepolygon and thegeographic data.The unit is %.


3.4.1 Basic Knowledge of Propagation ModelsEvery propagation model provided by the U-Net is applicable to a certain situation, frequency,and radio technology.

Table 3-11 describes the bands, required geographic data, factors, configuration requirements,and application scenarios of propagation models.



63

Table 3-11 Characteristics of propagation models

Propagation Model

Band Factor ConfigurationRequirement

RecommendedApplicationScenario

Cost-Hatamodel(including theCost-HataHW model)

1500 MHz to2000 MHz

l Terraincondition.

l Clutterstatistics.

l A formulacorrespondsto a clutter.

l Whether tocalculate thediffraction.

l Limited by thefree spaceloss.

l Loss inmunicipalareas.

1 km < Cell radius< 20 kmApplicable to theGSM1800,UMTS, and LTEtechnologies.Not applicable tohighly populatedurban areas butapplicable tocommon urbanareas, suburbs,and villages. Inaddition, theantenna of thebase station mustbe higher than thesurroundingbuildings.Usually used forprediction andrarely used forcapacitysimulation.



64

Propagation Model



OkumuraHata model(including theOkumuraHata HWmodel)

150 MHz to2000 MHz

l Terraincondition.


l A formulacorrespondsto a clutter.

l Whether tocalculate thediffraction.


l Loss inmunicipalareas.

1 km < Cell radius< 20 kmApplicable to theGSM900, CDMA2000, and LTEtechnologies.Not applicable tohighly populatedurban areas butapplicable tocommon urbanareas, suburbs,and villages. Inaddition, theantenna of thebase station mustbe higher than thesurroundingbuildings.Usually used forprediction andrarely used forcapacitysimulation.

SPM model(including theSPM900 andSPM2Gmodels)

150 MHz to2000 MHz

l Terraincondition.


l Effectiveantennaheight.There are sixmethods ofcalculatingthe effectiveantennaheight.

l Thediffractionweight isdifferentiatedin the case ofLOS orNLOS.


l Loss andweight of eachtype of clutter.

l Clearance areaof the receiver

0.5 km < Cellradius < 20 kmApplicable to theGSM900,GSM1800,UMTS, CDMA2000, WiMAX,and LTEtechnologies.Compared withthe Hata models,the SPM modelsare widelyapplicable to thescenarios ofmacro cells.Widely used forcapacitysimulation.



65

Propagation Model



ITURP model(that is, 1238model)

1800 MHz to2000 MHz

l Distance(LOS andNLOS) andfrequency.

l Margin ofslow fading.

l NLOSconsiders theloss inpenetrationthroughfloors indifferentenvironments. The lossdepends onthe number ofpenetratedfloors.

l NLOSconsiders thedistance losscoefficient N.

l Propagationscenarios areclassified intoLOS andNLOSscenarios.

l The margin ofslow fadingdepends on therequirementon thecoverageprobabilityand thestandarddeviation ofindoor slowfading.

l In the cases ofresidentialbuildings,officebuildings, andmalls, N is 28,30, and 22,respectively.

Indoor scenarios.Used for onlyprediction.

COST231-WIM

800 MHz to2000 MHz

l Terraincondition.


Three parts areinvolved: freespace propagationloss, rooftop-to-street diffractionand scatteringloss, and multi-shielding loss.Configureparameters foreach part.

Urban areas witha lot of highbuildings.



66

Propagation Model



Keenan-Motley

Around 2000MHz

l Distance andfrequency.

l Loss inpenetrationthroughwalls.

l Number ofwalls.

l The impact ofmultipathpropagationis notconsidered.Thepenetrationloss of eachwall is thesame.

- Indoor scenarios.Used for onlyprediction.

VolcanoUrban

2G, 3G, and4G frequencybands

NOTEl The Volcano model is a third-party

model. To install this model, you needto purchase the correspondingsoftware. Volcano 3.1.2 or later needsto be installed for U-Net 3.8 or a laterversion.

l After the Volcano model is installed,you need to run the U-Net again. TheU-Net automatically detects theinstalled Volcano model and loads theVolcano model.

l For details about the Volcano modeland how to install the Volcano model,see the user guide of the Volcanomodel software.

Denselypopulated urbanareas with manybuildings.

VolcanoRural

Suburbs and ruralareas.

VolcanoIndoor

Indoor scenarios.

3.4.2 Configuring Propagation ModelsBy default, the U-Net provides multiple common propagation models. You can directly modifythe properties of a propagation model or duplicate a propagation model and modify the propertiesof the duplicated propagation model.

ContextPropagation model of different types has different properties, which, however, are configuredin the same way. This section takes the Cost Hata (default) propagation model as an example todescribe how to configure a propagation model.



67

Procedure

Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Propagation Models > Cost231 Hata > Cost Hata (default).

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-13.


NOTEIf you do not want to directly modify the properties of the propagation model, choose Duplicate from the shortcutmenu and modify the properties of the duplicated propagation model.

Step 4 Set the properties of the propagation model in the displayed dialog box. For detailed descriptionof parameters, see Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model.1. On the General tab page, change the name and description of the propagation model.2. On the Parameters tab page, configure the parameters related to the propagation model

and set the formula.3. Click OK.

Step 5 Optional: You can set the parameters related to the propagation model in a centralized modeby exporting and importing the parameters.1. Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.2. Right-click and choose Export from the shortcut menu to export the parameters related to

the propagation model as an .xls file.



68

3. Open the .xls file. You can set and modify the parameters.4. Select the propagation model from the navigation tree.5. Right-click and choose Import from the shortcut menu to import the parameters related to

the propagation model.

If the parameters are successfully imported, the system prompts that the import is successfuland updates the parameters based on the imported file.

If the parameters fail to be imported, check whether the information about the .xls file, suchas the heading, is correct and complete.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel To delete a propagation model, choose Delete from the shortcut menu.l After the propagation model is configured, you can assign it to cells for calculating the path

loss. For details, see 3.4.3 Assigning Propagation Models.

NOTE

If you have set the Volcano propagation model for a cell, you need to manually import the map data on theSetting tab page of the corresponding model (the map data imported from U-Net does not take effect forthe Volcano propagation model). Otherwise, path loss calculation cannot proceed.

3.4.3 Assigning Propagation ModelsThis section describes how to assign propagation models. You need to select a properpropagation model for each cell based on the technical and engineering conditions. You canassign the same propagation model to all cells or assign different propagation models to eachcells.

Prerequisitesl Propagation models are available in the project.l Cells exist in the project.

Context

To shorten the calculation time, the U-Net enables users to assign the following propagationmodels to each cell:l Main propagation model: high calculation accuracy and short calculation radiusl Extended propagation model: low calculation accuracy and long calculation radius

If the calculation accuracy of the main propagation model is not defined, the U-Net calculatesthe main propagation model based on the calculation accuracy of the imported geographic data.

In addition, the U-Net can calculate the extended propagation model only when the propagationmodel, calculation radius, and calculation precision of the extended propagation model aredefined.

Procedurel Assign a propagation model to a group of cells.



69

In normal cases, cells with the same parameters and in the same environment use the samepropagation model. You can group these cells together and assign a propagation model tothe cell group.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.

3. Right-click the cell group and choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.The table of the selected cell group is displayed.The property values of all the cells in the cell group are displayed in the table.

4. Modify the values in each column (such as the Main Propagation Model column) toensure that parameter values of all the cells are the same.

TIPYou can set the parameters in the first row. Then, press Ctrl+D so that the parameter valuesin the following rows are the same as those in the first row. In this way, parameter values ofall the cells are the same.

l Assign a propagation model to a single cell.


2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.

3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

4. Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box. For example, for the LTE-FDDnetwork, click the LTE-FDDCell tab.

5. Click following Propagation Model.

6. Set propagation model parameters in the displayed Propagation dialog box. Fordetails, see Parameters on the Propagation Tab Page in the Repeater PropertiesDialog Box.

For a multi-mode network, you need to set Propagation Model on the tab pagescorresponding to each RAT.

----End

3.4.4 Setting BandsBefore performing frequency planning, you must set bands. The U-Net provides multiplepredefined bands. You can modify the properties of the predefined bands. When the predefinedbands cannot meet your requirements, you can define bands.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.

Step 3 Right-click and choose Frequency Bands > Open Table from the shortcut menu.

NOTEIf the project is about a hybrid network, the Open Table menu has a submenu.

Step 4 Set bands in the window containing a band table. For detailed description of parameters, seeParameters for Setting Bands.



70

You can also double-click the heading in the table, and set properties of all bands in theBandwidth Configuration dialog box.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Assign the band to a cell.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Click the cell property tab in the displayed dialog box.

Click GSMTRX for a GSM network and LTE-FDDCell for an LTE-FDD network.5. Set the value of Frequency Band on the tab page to assign the band to a cell.

l You can also import and export band information in the window that contains a band table.For detailed description of parameters, see 10.8 Managing Table Windows.

3.4.5 Interface Reference for Propagation ModelsThis section describes the interfaces and parameters involved in the management of propagationmodels.

Parameters for Setting BandsThis section describes the parameters involved in band settings. You can refer to this sectionwhen setting bands in the Frequency Bands dialog box.

Table 3-12 Parameters in the LTE-FDD/LTE-TDD/CDMA network


Name Indicates the name of a band. -

Bandwidth(MHz) Indicates the bandwidth. l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDDnetworks: 1.4, 3, 5, 10,15, and 20.

l CDMA network: 1.25.

Start Channel Index Indicates the start index ofthe available frequenciescorresponding to a band.

l LTE-FDD and LTE-TDDnetworks: from 0 to 128.

l CDMA network: from 0to 2

The value of Start ChannelIndex must be less than orequal to the value of EndChannel Index.

End Channel Index Indicates the end index of theavailable frequenciescorresponding to a band.



71


Excluded Channels Indicates the index of anexcluded channel.

The default value is null.Multiple values can beentered. Use commas toseparate the values.

ACIR Indicates the adjacentchannel signal-to-interference ratio.

The default value is 30 andthe unit is dB.The value range is from 0 to231.

Band Number Indicates the number of aband.

The value range is from 1 to40.

Frequency(DL)(MHz) Indicates the downlinkfrequency.

A parameter for LTE-FDD/CDMA.

Frequency(UL)(MHz) Indicates the uplinkfrequency.

A parameter for LTE-FDD/CDMA.

Frequency(MHz) Indicates the uplink ordownlink frequency.

A parameter for LTE-TDD.

Actual Bandwidth(MHz) Indicates the actualbandwidth.

A parameter for LTE-FDD.

Useable RB Num Indicates the number of RBsavailable for use.

A parameter for LTE-FDD.

Table 3-13 Parameters in the GSM network


Name Frequency band name. -

ARFCN Absolute radio frequencychannel number.

For example, 512-885indicates that the range is[512,885]. 975-1023;0-124indicates that the range is[975,1023];[0,124].

Frequency(UL)(MHz) Uplink start frequency. Unit: MHz.Value range: real numbers,separated by semicolons. Thenumber is consistent withthat of UARFCN(UL)s.For example, if ARFCN isset to 975-1023;0-124, youneed to set Frequency(UL)(MHz) to 880.2;890.



72


Frequency(DL)(MHz) Downlink start frequency. Unit: MHz.Value range: real numbers,separated by semicolons. Thenumber is consistent withthat of UARFCN(DL)s.For example, if ARFCN isset to 975-1023;0-124, youneed to set Frequency(DL)(MHz) to 925.2;935.

ACIR Adjacent channelinterference ratio.

Unit: dB.Value range: real number thatis greater than 0.

Table 3-14 Parameters in the UMTS network



UARFCN(UL) Uplink UTRA absolute radiofrequency channel number.

For example, 9612-9888indicates that the range is[9612,9888]. 9262-9538;12indicates that the range is[9262,9538];[12,12].

UARFCN(DL) Downlink UTRA absoluteradio frequency channelnumber.


Frequency(UL)(MHz) Uplink start frequency. Unit: MHz.Value range: real numbers,separated by semicolons. Thenumber is consistent withthat of UARFCN(UL)s.

Frequency(DL)(MHz) Downlink start frequency. Unit: MHz.Value range: real numbers,separated by semicolons. Thenumber is consistent withthat of UARFCN(DL)s.





73

Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata propagation model. You canrefer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model


DiffractionCalculate:Sets theparametersforcalculatingthediffraction.

Diffraction LossMethod

Indicates whether toconsider diffractionduring path losscalculation.

Available algorithmsare as follows:l Nonel Atlasl Bullingtonl Deygoutl Epstein

Effect Tx HeightCalculate Method

Indicates the algorithmfor calculating theeffective height of thetransmitter antenna.

Available algorithmsare as follows:l AbsSpotl Height above the

groundl Height above the

average groundl Spot Hrl Slope At Receiverl Enhanced Slope at

receiver

General:Sets theparametersfor commoncalculation.

Limitation to freespace loss

Indicates whether tolimit the loss in the freespace.

The default value isTrue.

Formula For the description ofparameters in theformula, see Formulaof the Cost231 HataPropagation Model.

For the parametervalues, see Values ofthe Parameters of theCost231 HataPropagation Model inTypical Scenarios.

Formula of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model

The formula is as follows:

l Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)

l Suburban: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - 2 x (lg(f/28))2 - K13



74

l Rural: Total = Lu - a(Hm) - K14 x lg(f)2 + K15 x lg(f) - K16

Parameters in the formula are described as follows:


Lu Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)

a(Hm) Indicates the factor for correcting the effective antenna and also afunction of the size of the coverage area.

l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12l In the Rural/Small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6×lg(f) - K7) x Hm

- (K8× x lg(f) - K9)

Cm Indicates the factor for central calibration in large cities. The valuevaries according to the scenario. The value is already calculated inK1, and thus is not presented in this formula.

f Indicates the frequency range. The value rang is from 1,500 MHz to2,000 MHz.

Hb Indicates the height of the base station antenna. The value range isfrom 30 m to 200 m.

d Indicates the distance between the base station and the mobilestation. The unit is kilometer.

Hm Indicates the height of the mobile station. The value range is from 1m to 10 m.

Values of the Parameters of the Cost231 Hata Propagation Model in TypicalScenarios

Scenario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10

K11

K12

K13

K14

K15

K16

Denseurban

49.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.11

0.7

1.56

0.8

3 0 0 5.4

4.78

18.33

40.94

Urban/Suburb

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.11

0.7

1.56

0.8

0 0 0 5.4

4.78

18.33

40.94



75

Scenario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10

K11

K12

K13

K14

K15

K16

Rural

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.11

0.7

1.56

0.8

0 18.33

35.94

5.4

4.78

18.33

35.94

Highway/High-speedrailway

46.3

33.9

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.11

0.7

1.56

0.8

0 18.33

40.94

5.4

4.78

18.33

40.94

Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation ModelThis section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model. Youcan refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Hata HW propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation ModelParameter Description Value

DiffractionCalculate:parameters fordiffractioncalculation


Indicates whether toconsider diffractionduring path losscalculation.

Available algorithms areas follows:l Nonel Atlasl Bullingtonl Deygoutl Epstein



76




Available algorithms areas follows:l AbsSpotl Height above the



receiver

General:commoncalculationparameters

Limitation to free spaceloss



Formula For the description ofparameters in theformula, see Formula ofthe Cost231 Hata HWPropagation Model.

For the parametervalues, see Values of theParameters of theFormula in TypicalScenarios.

Formula of the Cost231 Hata HW Propagation ModelThe formula is as follows:l Urban: Total = Lu - a(Hm)





Lu Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)


l In the large city scenario: a(Hm) = K10 x [lg(K11 x Hm)]2 - K12l In the rural or small city scenario: a(Hm) = (K6 x lg(f) - K7) x

Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)




77


f Indicates the frequency range. The value ranges from 1500 MHz to2000 MHz.




Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical Scenarios

Scenario

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10~K16

Denseurban

49.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Urban

46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Suburb

46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Rural 46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Highway

46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

High-speedrailway

46.3 33.9 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Parameters for Setting the SPM2G Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the SPM2G propagation model. You can referto this section when setting the SPM2G propagation model.

Parameters Related to the SPM2G Propagation Model


DiffractionCalcul

Add buildingheight

Indicates whether toconsider building height.

The default value is False.



78


ate:parameters fordiffractioncalculation

Clutter LossCalculate Method

Indicates the algorithm forcalculating the clutter loss.

Available algorithms are asfollows:l Nonel Uniforml Triangularl Logarithmicl Exponential


Indicates whether toconsider diffraction duringpath loss calculation.

Available algorithms are asfollows:l Nonel Atlasl Bullingtonl Deygoutl Epstein


Indicates the algorithm forcalculating the effectiveheight of the transmitterantenna.

Available algorithms are asfollows:l AbsSpotl Height above the groundl Height above the average

groundl Spot Hrl Slope At Receiverl Enhanced Slope at

receiver

Receiver on topclutter

Indicates whether thereceiver is on the top of theclutter.

The default value is True.



Indicates whether to limitthe loss in the free space.


Parameters:calculationparameters

K1 - K7 For the description ofparameters in the formula,see Formula of the SPM2GPropagation Model.

For the parameter values, seeValues of the Parametersof the Formula in TypicalScenarios.



79

Formula of the SPM2G Propagation Model

Formula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 xlg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter)



K1 Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on thefrequency.

K2 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strengththat changes with the distance.

d Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antennaand the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.

K3 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of thisparameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changeswith the height of the transmitter antenna.

HTxeff Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit ismeter.

K4 Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of thisparameter indicates the diffraction status.

DiffractionLoss Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unitis dB.

K5 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).

K6 Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of thisparameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changeswith the height of the receiver antenna.

HRxeff Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit ismeter.

K7 Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of thisparameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.

f(clutter) Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.


Scenario

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7

Denseurban

27.425 44.9 5.83 1 -6.55 0 1

Urban 23.455 44.9 5.83 1 -6.55 0 1



80

Scenario

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7

Suburb 11.955 44.9 5.83 1 -6.55 0 1

Rural 3.065 44.9 5.83 1 -6.55 0 1

Highway -3.455 44.9 5.83 1 -6.55 0 1

High-speedrailway

-3.455 44.9 5.83 1 -6.55 0 1

Parameters for Setting the SPM900 Propagation ModelThis section describes the parameters related to the SPM900 propagation model. You can referto this section when setting the SPM900 propagation model.

Parameters Related to the SPM900 Propagation ModelParameter Description Value


Add buildingheight

Indicates whether to considerbuilding height.


Clutter LossCalculateMethod

Indicates the algorithm forcalculating the clutter loss.

Available algorithms are asfollows:l Nonel Uniforml Triangularl Logarithmicl Exponential

DiffractionLoss Method

Indicates whether to considerdiffraction during path losscalculation.

Available algorithms are asfollows:l Nonel Atlasl Bullingtonl Deygoutl Epstein



81


Effect TxHeightCalculateMethod

Indicates the algorithm forcalculating the effective heightof the transmitter antenna.


groundl Spot Hrl Slope At Receiverl Enhanced Slope at receiver

Receiver ontop clutter

Indicates whether the receiveris on the top of the clutter.



Limitation tofree space loss

Indicates whether to limit theloss in the free space.


Parameters:calculationparameters

K1~K7 For the description ofparameters in the formula, seeFormula of the SPM900Propagation Model.

For the parameter values, seeValues of the Parameters ofthe Formula in TypicalScenarios.

Formula of the SPM900 Propagation ModelFormula: PathLoss (dB) = K1 + K2 x lg(d) + K3 x lg(HTxeff) + K4 x DiffractionLoss + K5 xlg(d) x lg(HTxeff) + K6 x (HRxeff) + K7 x f(clutter)



K1 Indicates a constant. Its unit is dB and its value depends on thefrequency.

K2 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d), that is, the distance factor.The value of this parameter reflects the variation of the field strengththat changes with the distance.

d Indicates the horizontal distance between the transmitter antennaand the receiver antenna. The unit is meter.



82


K3 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(HTxeff). The value of thisparameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changeswith the height of the transmitter antenna.

HTxeff Indicates the effective height of the transmitter antenna. The unit ismeter.

K4 Indicates the multiplying factor for diffraction loss. The value of thisparameter indicates the diffraction status.

DiffractionLoss Indicates the diffraction loss that is caused by obstruction. The unitis dB.

K5 Indicates the multiplying factor for lg(d) x lg(HTxeff).

K6 Indicates the multiplying factor for HRxeff. The value of thisparameter reflects the variation of the field strength that changeswith the height of the receiver antenna.

HRxeff Indicates the effective height of the receiver antenna. The unit ismeter.

K7 Indicates the multiplying factor for f(clutter). The value of thisparameter indicates the weight of clutter loss.

f(clutter) Indicates the average of weighted loss due to clutter.


Scenario

K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7

Denseurban

12.13 44.9 5.83 1 0 0 1

Urban 12.12 44.9 5.83 1 0 0 1

Suburb 2.17 44.9 5.83 1 0 0 1

Rural -11.39 44.9 5.83 1 0 0 1

Highway -16.39 44.9 5.83 1 0 0 1

High-speedrailway

-16.39 44.9 5.83 1 0 0 1

Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata propagation model. You canrefer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata propagation model.



83

Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata Propagation Model


DiffractionCalculate:parametersfordiffractioncalculation


Indicates whether to considerdiffraction during path losscalculation.

Available algorithms are asfollows:l Nonel Atlasl Bullingtonl Deygoutl EpsteinThe default value is None.

Effect Tx HeightCalculateMethod



groundl Spot Hrl Slope At Receiverl Enhanced Slope at

receiverThe default value is None.


Limitation tofree space loss

Indicates whether to limit theloss in the free space.


Formula For the description ofparameters in the formula, seeFormula of the OkumuraHata Propagation Model.

For the parameter values, seeValues of the Parameters ofthe Formula in TypicalScenarios.

Formula of the Okumura Hata Propagation Model








84


Lu Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5 x lg(Hb)) x lg(d)



Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)






Values of the Parameters of the Formula in Typical ScenariosScenario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10

K11

K12

K13

K14

K15

K16

High-speedrailway

64.77

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

-4.78

18.33

40.94

0 4.78

18.33

40.94

Denseurban

69.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0 3.2

11.75

4.97

4.78

18.33

40.94



85

Scenario

K1

K2

K3

K4

K5

K6

K7

K8

K9

K10

K11

K12

K13

K14

K15

K16

Urban

69.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

0 0 0 0 4.78

18.33

40.94

Suburb

67.55

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

-2 5.4

0 0 4.78

18.33

40.94

Rural

64.77

26.16

13.82

44.9

6.55

1.1

0.7

1.56

0.8

-4.78

18.33

35.94

0 4.78

18.33

40.94

Parameters for Setting the Okumura Hata HW Propagation ModelThis section describes the parameters related to the Okumura Hata HW propagation model. Youcan refer to this section when setting the Okumura Hata HW propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Okumura Hata HW Propagation ModelParameter Description Value


Diffraction Loss Method Indicates whether toconsider diffraction duringpath loss calculation.

Available algorithms areas follows:l Nonel Atlasl Bullingtonl Deygoutl EpsteinThe default value is None.



Available algorithms areas follows:l AbsSpotl Height above the



receiver



86



Limitation to free spaceloss



Formula For the description ofparameters in the formula,see Formula of theOkumura Hata HWPropagation Model.

For the parameter values,see Values of theParameters of theFormula in TypicalScenarios.

Formula of the Okumura Hata HW Propagation Model







Lu Lu = K1 + K2 x lg(f) - K3 x lg(Hb) + (K4 - K5lg(Hb)) x lg(d)



Hm - (K8 x lg(f) - K9)







87




K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10~K16

Denseurban

72.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Urban

69.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Suburb

61.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Rural 54.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Highway

54.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

High-speedrailway

54.55 26.16 13.82 44.9 6.55 1.1 0.7 1.56 0.8 0

Parameters for Setting the ITURP Propagation ModelThis section describes the parameters related to the ITURP propagation model. You can referto this section when setting the ITURP propagation model.



88

Parameters Related to the ITURP Propagation ModelParameter Description Value




Available algorithms are asfollows:l AbsSpotl Height above the groundl Height above the


receiver





Formula For the description ofparameters in the formula,see Formula of the ITURPPropagation Model.

For the parameter values,see Values of theParameters of theFormula in TypicalScenarios.

Formula of the ITURP Propagation ModelFormula: Total = K2 + K1 x lg(f) + N x lg(d x 1000) + Lf



K2 Indicates an empirical coefficient. It is a constant.

K1 Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(f). It is a constant.

f Indicates the frequency range.

N Indicates a coefficient corresponding to lg(d x 1000). It is a constant.


Lf Indicates the logarithm of the frequency range. The value variesaccording to the scenario.



89


Lf K2 K1 N K4 K5 K6

NLOShouse

K4 + K5x K6

-28 20 28 0 4 2

NLOSoffice

K4 + K5x (K6-1)

-28 20 30 15 4 2

NLOSstore

K4 + K5x (K6-1)

-28 20 22 6 3 2

LOS 0 -28 20 20 0 0 0

Parameters for Setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation ModelThis section describes the parameters related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagationmodel. You can refer to this section when setting the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami propagationmodel.

Parameters Related to the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation ModelParameter Description Value

DiffractionCalculate: Sets theparameters forcalculating thediffraction.


Indicates thealgorithm forcalculating theeffective height ofthe transmitterantenna.



average groundl Spot Hrl Slope At

Receiverl Enhanced Slope

at receiver

Parameters: Sets theparameters forcommon calculation.

Angel betweenincident-wave androad

Indicates the anglebetween the road andthe incident wave.

The default value is30.Unit: degree.

Building height Indicates the averageheight ofsurroundingbuildings.

The default value is12.Unit: m.



90


Distance betweenbuildings

Indicates thedistance betweenbuildings.


Road Width Indicates the roadwidth.


Formula of the Cost231 Walfish-Ikegami Propagation Model


l In the Los scenario: Total = K1 + K2 * lg(d) + K3

l In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd <=0: Total = PL0

l In the NLoss scenario and PLrts + PLmsd >0: Total = PL0 + PLrts + PLmsd



PL0 Indicates the free space propagation loss.Unit: dB.PL0 =NK1 + NK2*lg(d) + NK3*lg(f)

PLrts Indicates the rooftop-to-street diffraction and scattering loss.PLrts = NK4 –NK5*lg(w) +NK6*lg(f) + NK7*lg(Hroof -Hue)+Lcri

PLmsd Indicates the multi-shielding loss.PLmsd =Lbsk+ Ka + Kd*lg(d) + Kf*lg(f) - NK6*lg(b)

Lcri Indicates the directional loss.l -10<= φ < 35 deg: Lcri = NKL1 + NKL2*φl 35 <= φ <55deg: Lcri = NKL3 + NKL4(φ-35)l 55<= φ <90deg: Lcri = NKL4 – NKL5(φ-55)

Lbsk l Hbs>Hroof: Lbsk = NKL5*lg(1+Hbs -Hroof)l Hbs<=Hroof: Lbsk = 0

Ka l Hbs>Hroof: Ka = NKL6l Hbs<=Hroof And d>=0.5 km: Ka = NKL7 – NKL8*(Hbs -

Hroof)l Hbs<=Hroof And d<0.5 km: Ka = NKL9-NKL10*(Hbs -

Hroof)*(d/0.5)

Kd l Hbs>Hroof: Kd = NKL11l Hbs<=Hroof: Kd = NKL12 – NKL13*((Hbs -Hroof)/Hroof)



91


Kf Kf = NKL14 + NKL15 * (f/925 -1)

f Indicates the carrier frequency.Unit: MHz.

d Indicates the distance between the base station and a terminal'santenna.Unit: km.

w Indicates the road width.Unit: m.

Hroof Indicates the height of surrounding buildings.Unit: m.

Hbs Indicates the height of the base station antenna.Unit: m.

Hue Indicates the height of the mobile station antenna.

φ Indicates the angle between the road and the incident wave.Unit: degree.

K1 Indicates a constant item.

K2 Indicates a coefficient corresponding to Lg(d). It is a constant.

K3 Indicates a coefficient corresponding to Lg(f). It is a constant.

Default Parameter Values of the Cost Walfish-Ikegami Propagation ModelParameter

K1 K2 K3 NK1 NK2 NK3 NK4 NK5 NK6 NK7

DefaultValue

42.6 26 20 32.4 20 20 -16.9 10 10 20

Parameters for Setting the Keenan-Motley Propagation ModelThis section describes the parameters related to the Keenan-Motley propagation model. You canrefer to this section when setting the Keenan-Motley propagation model.



92

Parameters Related to the Keenan-Motley Propagation ModelParameter Description Value







receiver





Parameters: calculationparameters

K1-K5 For the description ofparameters in theformula, see Formulaof the Keenan-MotleyPropagation Model.

For the parametervalues, see Values ofthe Parameters of theFormula in TypicalScenarios.

Formula of the Keenan-Motley Propagation ModelFormula: Total = K1 + K2 x lg(f) + K3 x lg(d) + K4 x K5





f Indicates the frequency range.

K2 Indicates a coefficient corresponding to log(f). It is a constant.

K3 Indicates a coefficient corresponding to log(d). It is a constant.





93


Scenario K1 K2 K3 K4 K5

Keenan-Motley

32.5 20 20 20 2

Parameters for Setting the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model

This section describes the parameters related to the Clutter Related Hata propagation model.You can refer to this section when setting the Clutter Related Hata propagation model.

Parameters Related to the Clutter Related Hata Propagation Model


Clutter Clutter.

Propagation Model Indicates the Hata propagation model relatedto the clutter.

Loss Path loss.


3.5.1 Importing Antenna DataThis section describes how to import antenna data as .txt and .msi files.

Contextl The U-Net allows you to import and export antenna data, including 2D and 3D data, as .txt

and .msi files.

l Before importing antenna files, you can manually set the value of each parameter in theantenna files. If a value in the antenna file is not within the specified value range, the antennafile may fail to be imported.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.

Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu., as shown in Figure 3-14.



94

Figure 3-14 Import

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and the file to the imported..

l If data of a single antenna is imported, select the .txt or .msi file corresponding to the antenna.

l If data of multiple antennas is imported, select .txt or .msi files in batches.

l If an imported antenna name is the same as the name of an existing antenna, the U-Net addsa number to the imported antenna name to distinguish the two antennas.

Step 5 Click Open. The Import Antenna File dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-15.

Figure 3-15 Import Antenna File

l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lowerpart indicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.

l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.



95

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, configure antenna parameters. For details about the parameters, seeTable 3-15.

Table 3-15 Parameters for importing antenna files


File Name File name used for identifying the userantenna attribute name in the antenna file.

Field Separator Field separator used by a file. A .txt file usesthe Tab separator, and an .msi file uses thespace separator.

Source User antenna attribute name parsed based onFileName.Indicates the parsing reference.l Use the separator specified by the file

format to parse file fields.l If the current row has only one piece of

data, the data is the antenna attributename. The next row is the fieldinformation.NOTE

This rule is executed from the first row of thefile.

l If the current row has several pieces ofdata (separated by separators), the firstpiece of data is the attribute name.

l Data rows ranging from 0 to 359 have nofield name.NOTE

The purpose is to avoid the angle informationdisplayed after fields such as Horizontal orVertical.

l If the user antenna data does not complywith the preceding rules, you will beprompted that the user antenna attributename cannot be identified.NOTE

When antenna data files are imported inbatches, user antenna and U-Net antennaattribute names in other antenna data files aremapped based on the attribute name mappingin the Import Antenna Filedialog box.

Destination Standard antenna field name used by the U-Net. You can switch cell values in the drop-down list to configure the mapping betweenuser antenna attribute names and U-Netantenna attribute names. <IGNORE>indicates that the corresponding fieldinformation is ignored.



96

Step 7 After the configuration, click Import to import the antenna file to the project.

NOTE

l In the U-Net main window, a message is displayed in the Event Viewer window in the lower partindicating whether the antenna files are successfully imported.

l You can view the imported antenna data under the Antennas node.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel You can export data of a single antenna.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an antenna.3. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, select the file type, saving path, and file name.. Then,

export the antenna data.l You can export the antenna data in batches.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.3. Right-click antennas and choose Export > Export File Type from the shortcut menu.

Then, export antenna data to files in batches.l You can view antennas in the window.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.2. Choose Antennas > an antenna from the navigation tree.3. Right-click an antenna and choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Antenna

Properties dialog box is displayed.4. View the antennas in the window on the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern

tab pages.

If you have imported 3D data of an antenna, you can drag the slider in the lower left cornerof the Horizontal Pattern and Vertical Pattern tab pages to change the value ofAttenuation, as shown in Figure 3-16.



97

Figure 3-16 scroll bar

3.5.2 Setting AntennasEach U-Net project contains multiple defined antennas of specific technologies. You can createan antenna either directly or copy an existing antenna file and modify the related parameters tocreate an antenna.

Procedurel Create an antenna

1. Select a method for creating an antenna.

If... Then...

Create an antenna directly 1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.3. Choose New from the shortcut menu. The

Antenna Properties dialog box is displayed.



98

If... Then...

Copy an existing antennafile to create an antenna

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas > an

antenna.3. Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.4. Select the copied antenna.5. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2. In the antenna property dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, seeParameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box.

3. Click OK.

l Create an antenna group.

When an antenna group supports multiple carriers, the U-Net can automatically match theantenna gains with different bands to perform calculations. The antenna group supportssmart antenna.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas Groups.

3. Choose Add Group from the shortcut menu. The New Antenna Group dialog boxis displayed.

4. Set the property parameters of the antenna group. For parameter description, seeParameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Modifying antenna properties

1. In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Antennas.

3. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The Antenna Table dialog box isdisplayed.

4. Double-click the target cell, and then modify the antenna properties in the displayeddialog box.

l Allocating antennas to cells

You can perform this operation after creating or importing cells.




4. On the Antenna Config tab page, select an antenna type from the Antenna drop-down list.

5. Click OK.



99

3.5.3 Setting a TMATower mounted amplifiers (TMAs) are used to reduce the overall noise figure of base stations.You can assign configured TMAs to cells for calculating the total loss.

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > TMA Equipment from the shortcut menu. The TMAEquipment dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a TMA. For detailed description of parameters, seeTable 3-16.

NOTE

l After you set the TMA parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row forsetting other TMAs.

l You can modify the original TMA parameter settings by referring to Table 3-16.

Table 3-16 TMA parameters

Parameter Meaning

Name Indicates the name of a TMA.

NoiseFigure(dB) Indicates the noise figure. The unit is dB.

Gain(UL)(dB) Indicates the uplink gain. The unit is dB.

Loss(DL)(dB) Indicates the downlink loss. The unit is dB.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

You can assign the TMAs to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign theconfigured TMA, by default, the system does not consider the TMA during the calculation oftotal loss.




4. On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click next toEquipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5. Clear Input Total Loss.

6. Select a TMA in TMA.

7. Click OK.



100

3.5.4 Setting FeedersFeeders are used to connect TMAs to base stations (eNodeBs, BTSs, or NodeBs). You can assignconfigured feeders to cells for calculating the total loss.

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Feeder Equipment from the shortcut menu. TheFeeders dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a feeder. For detailed description of parameters, seeTable 3-17.

NOTE

l After you set the feeder parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank row forsetting other feeders.

l You can modify the original feeder parameter settings by referring to Table 3-17.

Table 3-17 Feeder parameters

Parameter Meaning

Name Indicates the name of a feeder.

dB/100m Indicates the loss of every 100 meters.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can assign the feeders to cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do not assign theconfigured feeder, by default, the system does not consider the feeder during the calculation oftotal loss.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

4. On the Antenna Config tab page in the displayed dialog box, click next toEquipment. The Equipment Configuration dialog box is displayed.

5. Clear Input Total Loss.6. Select a feeder in Feeder.7. Set the feeder length of the transmitter and the receiver in Feeder Length(m).8. Click OK.

3.5.5 Creating Base StationsYou can create base stations and assign the base stations to cells.



101

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose Equipment > Site Equipment from the shortcut menu. The SiteEquipment dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Click a blank row (marked with *) to create a base station. For details about the parameters, seeTable 3-18.

NOTE

l After you set the base station parameters in the blank row, the system automatically adds a new blank rowfor setting other sites.

l You can modify the original base station parameter settings by referring to Table 3-18.

Table 3-18 Base station parameters


Name Indicates the name of a base station.

NoiseFigure(dB) Indicates the noise figure.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can assign the base stations to all cells after creating or importing the cells. If you do notassign the configured base station, the system calculates the total loss based on the default basestation.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. In the Antenna Config area of the displayed Transceiver Properties dialog box, click

following the Equipment parameter. The Equipment Configuration dialog box isdisplayed.

5. Select a base station from the Site drop-down list.6. Click OK.

3.5.6 Parameters for Creating AntennasThis section describes the parameters for creating or modifying antennas or antenna groups. Youcan refer to this section when setting antenna properties in the antenna property setting dialogbox or setting antenna group properties in the antenna group property setting dialog box.



102

Parameters in the Antenna Property Setting Dialog Box

Table 3-19 Parameters on the General tab page


Name Indicates the name of an antenna, whichuniquely identifies the antenna.The U-Net automatically fills in a defaultname for each new antenna.

Manufacturer Indicates the vendor of an antenna.

Gain Indicates the antenna gain. The value range isfrom 0 to 100 and the unit is dBi.

Pattern Electrical Tilt: (For information only) Indicates the electrical downtilt of an antenna.The value range is from -90 to 90 and the unitis degree.

Comments Indicates the comments on an antenna. Amaximum of 128 bytes are allowed.

Table 3-20 Parameters on the Horizontal Pattern tab page


Angle(°) Indicates the horizontal angle of an antenna.The value range is from 0 to 359 and the unitis degree.

Attenuation(dB) Indicates the attenuation value at thehorizontal angle of an antenna. The unit is dB.

Table 3-21 Parameters on the Vertical Pattern tab page


Angle(°) Indicates the vertical angle of an antenna. Thevalue range is from 0 to 359 and the unit isdegree.

Attenuation(dB) Indicates the attenuation value at the verticalangle of an antenna. The unit is dB.



103

Table 3-22 Parameters on the Other Properties tab page


Beamwidth Indicates the antenna beamwidth. The valuerange is from 0 to 360 and the unit is degree.

Max Frequency Indicates the maximum frequency of anantenna. The value range is from 0 to 32767and the unit is MHz.

Min Frequency Indicates the minimum frequency of anantenna. The value range is from 0 to 32767and the unit is MHz.The value of Min Frequency must be smallerthan or equal to the value of MaxFrequency.

Parameters in the Antenna Group Property Setting Dialog Box

Table 3-23 Parameters in the New Antenna Groupdialog box


Group Name Indicates the name of an antenna group.

No. Indicates the number of an antenna group.

Antenna Name Indicates the name of an existing antenna, that is, the nameof an antenna in the antenna group.After an antenna is selected, a bland row is addedautomatically for users to add a new antenna.

Minimum Frequency Indicates the minimum transmit frequency of an antenna.Minimum Frequency must be less than or equal toMaximum Frequency.

Maximum Frequency Indicates the maximum transmit frequency of an antenna.

Comments Indicates the comments on the antenna group.

3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Trafficparameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the trafficparameters are defined before capacity prediction.



104

3.6.1 Setting MCS TypesThis section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly thedemodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS typesdo not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.

ContextThe U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD.

Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.

Step 4 Click a blank line marked with * in the table to set an MCS type, as shown in Figure 3-17. Forthe detailed description of parameters, see Table 3-24.

Figure 3-17 MCS

Table 3-24 Parameters for Setting the MCS


Index Indicates the index of an MCS.

Highest modulation Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of thefollowing:l QPSKl 16QAMl 64QAM

Modulation Order Indicates a modulation exponent.

Coding Rate Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to2.



105


Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE) Indicates the bearer efficiency.Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulationexponent

Step 5 Click to close the table.

----End

3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD Service TypesSet the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parametersof existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate service types.

ContextFor an LTE-FDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideoConferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.

Procedure


Step 2 Set service type parameters.


Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >LTE-FDD.

2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-18.3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to Table

3-25.

Modify an existingservice type

1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-FDD > theexisting service type in the navigation tree.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Change parameter values for the existing service type by referring

to Table 3-25.



106

Figure 3-18 New

Table 3-25 Description of service parameters


Name Name of a service type.

Type Service type.l Voice: CS services.l Data: PS services.

GBR GBR service.

Priority Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the servicepriority for subscribers in capacity simulation.1 indicates the lowest priority.

Activity Factor Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required onlyfor CS services.l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0

to 1.

AMR Rate(kbit/s) Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s.Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

MAC PDU(kbit) Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.



107


Max Throughput(kbit/s)

Maximum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to

107.l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value ranges

from 0 to 107.NOTE

Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput.

Min Throughput(kbit/s)

Minimum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to

107.l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value ranges

from 0 to 107.NOTE


Average Throughput(kbit/s)

Average uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: average uplink throughput.l Downlink: average downlink throughput.

TransmissionEfficiency

Uplink/downlink transmission rate.l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0

to 1.

Offset(kbit/s) Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to anencapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLClayer.

l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to

107.

IBLER(%) Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Body Loss(dB) Body loss.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD ReceiversYou can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do notmeet the requirements, you can create receiver types.

Procedure




108

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-FDD.

Step 3 Choose Reception Equipment from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Set the name of a receiver.

If... Then...

Create a receiver type. In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the newreceiver and select type of MCS Table.

Modify an existing receivertype.

Perform Step 5.

Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parametersfor the receiver type by referring to Table 3-26.

If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.

Step 6 Click OK.

Table 3-26 Parameters for setting LTE-FDD receivers


Name Indicates the name of a receiver.

MCS Table Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.

Mobility Indicates the mobility type of a receiver.

MIMO Indicates the efficiency of adjusting codes by the receiver.

IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0 to100.

Channel Relativity Indicates the channel relativity.

Transmission Mode Indicates the transmission mode.This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is set toPDSCH MCS.

MCS Threshold Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver.You can double-click a cell and then view the detailed MCSbearer information in the Demodulation area.l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required during

demodulation.l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the

spectrum.l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation

thresholds.

----End



109

3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDD Terminal TypesSet the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters ofexisting terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate terminal types.

Procedure


Step 2 Set parameters of the terminal type.


Create a terminaltype

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >LTE-FDD.

2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.3. Set parameters for the new terminal type by referring to Table 3-27.

Modify anexisting terminaltype

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >LTE-FDD > the existing terminal type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify the parameters of the existing terminal type by referring to

Table 3-27.

Table 3-27 Parameters for setting terminal types


Name Indicates the name of a terminal type.

UE Category Indicates the category of a terminal.The terminals are classified into five categories ranging from1 to 5.

UL Peak Throughput(Kbps) Indicates the peak throughput in the uplink direction.

DL Peak Throughput(Kbps) Indicates the peak throughput in the downlink direction.

Support UL 64 QAM Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplink direction.

Maximum Layer Number Indicates the maximum number of layers.

Min Tx Power(dBm) Indicates the minimum transmit power of a terminal.

Max Tx Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power of a terminal.

Noise Figure(dB) Indicates the noise figure of a terminal.

Cable Loss(dB) Indicates the feeder loss of a terminal.

UL RS Offset(dB) Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in the uplinkdirection.



110


RB Number Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs) supported bythe terminal. This parameter is only applicable to prediction.

Reception Equipment Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.

Gain(dBi) Indicates the antenna gain.

Number of TransmissionAntenna Ports

Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for aterminal.

Number of ReceptionAntenna Ports

Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for a terminal.

Step 3 ClickOK.

----End

3.6.5 Setting Environment TypesThis section describes how to set environment types. You can modify the parameters of existingenvironment types, such as user, mobility type, and user density. If the existing environmenttypes do not meet the requirements, you can create environment types.

Procedure


Step 2 Perform the following operations as required.


Create anenvironment type

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments.2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.3. Set parameters for the new environment type by referring to Table

3-28 and Table 3-29.

Modify anexistingenvironment type

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments> the existing environment type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify the parameters of the existing environment type by referring

to Table 3-28 and Table 3-29.



111


Compareattributes ofmultiple trafficenvironments

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Environments.2. Right-click and choose Compare Environment Elements from the

shortcut menu. The Environment Compare dialog box is displayed,as shown in Figure 3-19.NOTE

You can select two traffic environments or more to compare in the SelectEnvironments area and select the comparison items in the EnvironmentItems area.

3. Click Compare. In the displayed Environment Compare Resultdialog box, check the attributes of the compared traffic environments,as shown in Figure 3-20.

4. Compare attributes of multiple traffic environments by referring toTable 3-28 and Table 3-29.



Name Indicates the name of an environment type.

User Indicates a user type.

Mobility Indicates a mobility type.

Density(Subscribers/km2) Indicates the user density (number of users ineach square kilometer).

The unit is n/km 2, where n indicates thenumber of users.

Table 3-29 Parameters on the Clutter Weight tab page


Clutter Class Indicates the name of a surface feature. Thenames are relevant to the importedgeographical data.

Weight Indicates the weight occupied by each surfacefeature. This parameter is used for calculatingthe number of users allocated to each surfacefeature.This parameter is available only when Cluttermap data exists.

% Indoor Indicates the proportion of indoor users of asurface feature.



112

Figure 3-19 Environment Compare

Figure 3-20 Environment Compare Result



113

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

3.6.6 Setting User TypesYou can modify the parameters of existing user types, such as user priority, service type, anduser type. If the existing user types do not meet the requirements, you can create user types.

Procedure




Create a usertype

1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-click and thenchoose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles from the shortcut menu.

2. Set parameters for the new user type by referring to Table 3-30.

Modify anexisting user type

1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose TrafficParameters > User Profiles > An existing user type; right-click andthen choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

2. Modify the parameters of the existing user type by referring to Table3-30.

Compareattributes of usertypes

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > User Profiles.2. Right-click and choose Compare User Profiles Elements from the

shortcut menu. The User Profiles Compare dialog box is displayed,as shown in Figure 3-21.NOTE

You can select two user types or more to compare in the Select User Profilesarea.

3. Click Compare. In the displayed User Profiles Compare Resultdialog box, check the attributes of the compared user types, as shownin Figure 3-22.

4. Compare attributes of user types by referring to Table 3-30.

Table 3-30 Parameters for Setting User Types


Name Indicates the name of a user.

Priority Indicates the priority of a user.The value 1 indicates the lowest priority. Thelarger the number, the higher the priority.

Service Indicates a service type.



114


Terminal Indicates a terminal type.

Calls/hour Indicates the number of calls per hour.

Duration(s) Indicates the duration of a call.

Volume(DL)(Kbyte) Indicates the downlink data volume.

Volume(UL)(Kbyte) Indicates the uplink data volume.

Figure 3-21 User Profiles Compare

Figure 3-22 User Profiles Compare Result

Step 3 Click OK.

----End



115

3.6.7 Setting Mobility TypesThis section describes how to set mobility types for terminals. You can modify the parametersof existing mobility types, such as the velocity. If the existing mobility types do not meet therequirements, you can create mobility types.

ContextThe U-Net provides six default mobility types: 30 km/h, 50 km/h, 60 km/h, 90 km/h, Fixed, andPedestrian.

Procedure

Step 1 Create or modify a mobility type.


Create a mobility type 1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, right-clickTraffic Parameters > Mobility Types, and then chooseNew from the shortcut menu. The Mobility Propertiesdialog box is displayed.

2. Set parameters for the new mobility type by referring toTable 3-31.

3. Click OK.

Modify an existing mobilitytype

1. Under the Data tab in the Explorer window, choose TrafficParameters > Mobility Types > An existing mobilitytype; right-click and then choose Properties from theshortcut menu. The Mobility Properties dialog box isdisplayed.

2. Modify the parameters for the existing mobility type byreferring to Table 3-31.

3. Click OK.

Table 3-31 Parameters for Setting Mobility Types


Name Indicates the name of a mobility type.

Average Speed(km/h) Indicates the mobility speed.

Step 2 Click OK.

----End



116

3.7 Setting LTE-FDD NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

3.7.1 Importing Base Station InformationYou can import a data file of base station to the U-Net. After that, the system automaticallycreates sites, cells, and transceivers according to the base station data. You can also export basestation data in a project for easy viewing of site information, cell information, and transceiverinformation. For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports base station information inthe same way.

Contextl Not all the base station data files can be imported to the U-Net. The U-Net has certain

requirements on the format of the data files (site data, cell data, or transceiver data) to beimported.

l Generally, you can export base station data and the corresponding configuration file fromthe U-Net, modify the relevant parameters, and then import the data to the U-Net foranalysis.

Procedure

Step 1 After exporting base station data and the corresponding configuration file, save or edit the datafor future use.1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. Select the objects to be exported.

If... Then...

Export site data. a. In the navigation tree, choose Site.b. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.

Exporttransceiver data.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.b. Choose Export from the shortcut menu.

Export cell data. a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.b. Choose Cells > Export from the shortcut menu.

3. In the Data Export dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see

Parameters in the Data Export Dialog Box.TIP

l You can click Save to save the current parameter configuration in the dialog box as aconfiguration file.

l You can also click Load to load an existing configuration file. The U-Net exports data based onthe parameter configuration in the configuration file.

4. Click Export.



117

5. Set the file type, saving path, and file name. Then, save the settings.

After the data export is complete, you can open the exported file, and view or modify thebase station data of the current project.

Step 2 Import the base station data and the corresponding configuration file into the U-Net toautomatically create base stations.1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. Select the objects to be imported.

If... Then...

Import sitedata.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Site.b. Choose Import from the shortcut menu.c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog

box.

Importtransceiverdata.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.b. Choose Import from the shortcut menu.c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog

box.

Import celldata.

a. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.b. Choose Cells > Import from the shortcut menu.c. Select the file to be imported, and open the Data Import dialog

box.

3. To ensure that the data is successfully exported, see 9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching

in the Field Mapping Area to check field matching.4. Optional: In the Data Import dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description,

see Parameters in the Data Import Dialog Box.5. Click Import.

l After the data import is complete, the system creates base stations based on the basestation data and displays the base stations in the map window.

l If a file fails to be imported, modify the file based on the error information displayedin the system.

----End

3.7.2 Creating a Single SiteThis section describes how to create a single site. You can create a site or modify the propertiesof an existing site to obtain a new one. For networks using different radio access technologies(RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a single site in the same way.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Site.



118

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 Set site parameters on the General tab page of the displayed dialog box. For details, seeParameters for Creating Sites.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel You can view or modify site properties. In addition, you can move or delete a single site.

1. Select the site in the map window.2. Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

You want to view ormodify site properties

1. Choose Site Properties from the shortcut menu.2. In the displayed dialog box, view or modify site

properties such as site name and coordinate values.

You want to move a site Directly drag the mouse to move the position of theselected site.

You want to delete asite

Choose Delete from the shortcut menu.

The preceding operations can be performed in both the Explorer window and the mapwindow. This section describes the operations performed in only the map window.

l You can also rank or group sites, audit the distance between two sites, and set the displayeffect of a site.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Site.3. Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

You want to group sites Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcutmenu.

You want to rank sites Choose Order from the shortcut menu.

You want to audit thedistance between twosites

1. Right-click and choose Distance Audit from theshortcut menu.

2. In the displayed dialog box, set Distance(m)<=,which specifies the audit distance.

3. Click Audit.The names of sites whose distances are within thedistance specified by the preset value and their actualdistances are displayed in the main window of the U-Net.



119

If... Then...

You want to set thedisplay effect of a basestation

1. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.2. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as the

display field and color.NOTE

When Display Type is set to GroupBy, you can select orclear the check boxes after the group information to controlthe display effect of base station information. Foroverlapped areas upon base station grouping, the basestation display effect is determined by the sequence whenyou select the check boxes. Provided that area 1 and area 2overlap for example, if you select area 1 and then area 2,then the base station display effect in the overlapped area isthe same as that in area 2.

3. Click OK.

You want to enable thedisplay or hiding ofproperty columns ofbasic site parameters

1. Right-click and choose Open Table from the shortcutmenu. The Sites table is displayed.

2. Right-click a point in the Sites table and chooseDisplay Columns from the shortcut menu.

3. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box,view the basic site parameters in the Sites table andselect or clear the check boxes of columns that needto be displayed or hidden in the Sites table. For details,see Basic Parameters of a Site.

4. Close the Columns to be displayed dialog box. TheSites table is updated and displays property columnsbased on the preceding settings.

3.7.3 Setting an LTE-FDD Base Station TemplateThis section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations byusing the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet yourrequirements, you can customize a base station template.

Procedurel View base station templates.

1. On the toolbar, select Template Management from the drop-down list. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown inFigure 3-23.



120

Figure 3-23 Station Template Properties

The name of the default base station template will be displayed on the toolbar of theU-Net main window. The names of other base station templates are available in thedrop-down list.

For example, .2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.

Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.l Create a base station template.

1. Click Add. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

Alternatively, click Duplicate to duplicate the selected base station template. Then,a new base station template is generated on the basis of the selected template.

2. Set the properties in the LTE-FDD base station template. For details, see Parametersfor Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.

3. Click OK.l View and modify properties of the base station template.

1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.3. View and modify the properties in the base station template. For details, see

Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.4. Click OK.

----End



121

Follow-up ProcedureYou can create base stations based on a predefined base station template or a customized basestation template.

When a base station template is not required, you can select the template in the Station TemplateProperties dialog box and then click Delete to delete it.

You cannot delete the last base station template.

3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in BatchesThe system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations withthe same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base stationautomatically in the same way.

Prerequisites

The required base station template is created.

Procedurel Create a single site in batches.

1. On the toolbar, select a base station template from the drop-down list.

2. Click on the toolbar.

3. Move the mouse pointer to the target position in the map window.

4. Click the target position. A base station is created.

l Create sites in batches.

1. On the toolbar, select a base station template from the drop-down list.


By clicking (a hexagon-shaped icon), you can create a batch of base stations byusing the same base station template.

3. Draw the area where the base stations are to be placed.

The U-Net places a batch of base stations in the area. In the meantime, sites and cellsof the base stations are created.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel View and modify site properties.

You can right-click a site in the Explorer window or in the map window and then choosethe corresponding menu item to view and modify site properties.

l Move the site.



122

When modifying site properties, you can change the position of the site by changingcoordinates. Alternatively, you can drag the site to a new position in the map window.

l Delete the site.You can right-click the site in the explorer window or in the map window and then chooseDelete from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, you can select the site in the map windowand then press the Delete key.

l Export, search for, and group the site, set display properties of the base station.

3.7.5 Creating RepeatersThis section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards theRF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides,that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signalsfrom the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radiolinks or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks ofdifferent types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.

PrerequisitesBase stations (including sites and cells) are available.

ProcedureStep 1 Create repeater equipment.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.3. Choose Equipment > Repeater Equipment from the shortcut menu. The Repeater

Equipment window is displayed.4. To set the parameters of the new repeater equipment in the blank row, see Parameters for

Creating Repeaters.l Enter the name of the new repeater equipment. After you enter the name, the system

creates a blank row to configure other repeater equipment.l Click a property cell to change the value of the property.

Step 2 Create a repeater.1. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.2. Choose Repeaters > New from the shortcut menu. The Repeater Properties dialog box

is displayed.

Alternatively, select the transceiver to which a repeater is added and then click on thetoolbar. Then, you can add a repeater directly in the map window.

3. To configure the properties of the repeater, see Parameters for Creating Repeaters.4. Click OK.

----End

3.7.6 Creating a TransceiverThis section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver withcells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports a



123

multi-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using differentradio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.

Prerequisites

A site has been created on the U-Net.

Procedure




Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set the transceiver parameters. For details, see Parameters forCreating Transceivers.

Step 5 Click OK.

NOTE

If an independent site exists, you can click on the toolbar and move the cursor to the site. When asquare frame appears around the site, click the left mouse key. After that, the system automatically createsa transceiver and corresponding cells for the site.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel You can group transceivers.


2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.

3. Right-click Transceiver and choose Group By > Grouping Mode. The U-Netautomatically groups the transceivers based on the selected grouping mode. Twolevels of grouping are supported. Table 3-32 lists the default grouping modes oftransceivers.

NOTE

You can choose Group By > More and set to display the grouping dimension in Group By.

Table 3-32 Group By

Grouping Mode Description

None No grouping mode is applied.

Polygon Calculation area.

Network Type RAT.

Comments Indicates the description information.

Site Equipment Indicates the site equipment.



124

Grouping Mode Description

Active Indicates whether a cell is activated ornot.

Frequency Band Indicates the frequency band of a cell.

Scene Indicates the scenario of a cell.

BSC ID Indicates the BSC ID of a GSM orCDMA cell.

RNC Name Indicates the RNC Name of a UMTScell.

l Alternatively, you can view common properties of a transceiver in the transceiver table and

manually set the property columns to be displayed in the table.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.3. Right-click Transceiver and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The

Transceiver table table is displayed.

NOTECommon engineering parameters such as Total loss DL, Total loss UL, Number ofTransmission Antenna Ports, Number of Transmission Antennas, Number of ReceptionAntennas, and Input Total Loss are displayed in the Transceiver table table by default toreduce the time required for selection.

4. Right-click in the Transceiver table table and choose Display Columns from theshortcut menu.

5. In the displayed Columns to be displayed dialog box, view the basic site parametersin the Sites table and select or clear the check boxes of columns that need to bedisplayed or hidden in the Sites table.

6. Close the dialog box. The Transceiver table table is updated and displays the propertycolumns based on the preceding settings.

3.7.7 Setting LTE-FDD Cell ParametersThis section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you canset cell parameters.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 On the LTE-FDDCell tab page, set LTE-FDD cell parameters, as shown in Figure 3-24.Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells describes the parameters.l Table 3-42 describes the Transmission Mode parameter.



125

l Table 3-43 describes the Advance Parameters parameter.

l Table 3-44 describes the Neighbours list parameter.

l Table 3-45 describes the Propagation Models parameter.

Figure 3-24 LTE-FDDCell

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

3.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-FDD NE ParametersThis section describes the parameters for setting LTE-FDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Creating Sites

This section describes the parameters for creating a site or modifying the properties of a site.You can refer to this section when viewing the properties of a site in the Site Properties dialogbox.


Name Indicates the name of a site. Thisparameter uniquely identifies a site.The U-Net specifies the default name ofeach new site.



126


Support Type Indicates the base station type.Macro indicates a macro base station,and Micro indicates a micro base station.

PositionNOTE

If no map is imported,parameters in this area areX and Y. If a map isimported, parameters in thisarea are Longitude andLatitude.

X Indicates a geodetic coordinate X (Xcoordinate).

Y Indicates a geodetic coordinate Y (Ycoordinate).

Longitude Indicates a longitudinal coordinate.

Latitude Indicates a latitudinal coordinate.

Altitude(m) Real Indicates the real altitude.l If no map is imported, the default

value is 0.l If a map is imported, the default

value is the altitude at the center ofthe map.

DTM Indicates the altitude obtained from theDTM map.l If no map is imported, the default

value is 0.l If a map is imported, the default

value is the altitude at the center ofthe map.

Use Altitude ForCalculation

Indicates whether to manually enter thealtitude of a site for calculation. If thisoption is selected, you enter the altitudeof a site manually for calculation.

Comments Displays the comments on thecorresponding site.

Parameters for Creating Transceivers

This section describes the parameters used for creating transceivers. You can refer to this sectionwhen setting transceiver parameters on the General and Antenna Config tab pages in theTransceiver Properties dialog box or in the Antenna Config table.



Name Name of a transceiver. This parameter uniquely identifies atransceiver.



127


Site Name of the site that a transceiver belongs to.You can click New to create a site.

Hexagon Radius(m) Radius of the hexagon indicating the cell coverage. The valueranges from 1 to 100000.l If a transceiver is directly added in the main window, the

radius of the hexagon is the value of Hexagon Radius(m) in the current site template by default.

l If a transceiver is added under the Transceiver node inthe navigation tree, the value of this parameter is emptyby default.

Transmission in the Numberof Antennas area

Number of transmission antennas on a base station.

Reception in the Number ofAntennas area

Number of receive antennas on a base station.

Transmission in the Numberof Antenna Ports area

Number of transmission antenna ports.

Comments Comments on a transceiver.

Table 3-34 Parameters on the Antenna Config tab page


Antenna ID ID of an antenna for a transceiver.The ID of each antenna must be unique for a transceiver.

Power Ratio Power allocation ratio. The value ranges from 0 to 1.

Sector ID ID of a sector. This parameter uniquely identifies an antenna.

Dx(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antennabelongs to in the X direction. The unit is meter.

Dy(m) Offset of the antenna relative to the site that the antennabelongs to in the Y direction. The unit is meter.

Longitude Longitude of an antenna.

Latitude Latitude of an antenna.

Main Antenna Main antenna of a transceiver.Each cell has only one main antenna.

Azimuth Antenna azimuth. The value ranges from 0 to 360. The unitis degree.



128


Antenna Type of an antenna.The default value is determined based on the configurationof the system antennas. In normal cases, the default antennatype is the type of the first antenna.

Mechanical Downtilt Mechanical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Electrical Downtilt Electrical downtilt of an antenna. The unit is degree.

Height(m) Height of an antenna. The unit is meter.

RRU ID l ID of a remote radio unit (RRU).l The value ranges from 0 to 100. The default value is 0.l If the value of RRU ID differs among the antennas for a

transceiver, the cell served by the transceiver is a singlefrequency network (SFN) cell. In this case, you canconfigure only one cell for this transceiver.

Equipment Equipment properties.For details, see Table 3-35.

Table 3-35 Parameters in the Equipment Configuration dialog box


Input Total Loss l If you select the check box, you need to manually typethe total loss.

l If you clear the check box, the U-Net calculates the totalloss.


TMATower-mounted amplifier (TMA). You can click tomodify its properties.

FeederAntenna feeder. You can click to modify its properties.

Feeder Length(m) Length of a feeder. You need to set this parameter for theuplink and downlink.

Miscellaneous Loss(dB) Miscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for theuplink and downlink.

JumpLoss Ant-TMA(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the antenna port. Youneed to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

JumpLoss Ant-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the top of cabinet and the antenna port.You need to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.



129


JumpLoss TMA-BS(dB) Jumper loss between the TMA and the top of cabinet. Youneed to set this parameter for the uplink and downlink.

Total Loss(dB) Total loss, including the TMA, feeder, jumper, andmiscellaneous loss. You need to set this parameter for theuplink and downlink.

Parameters for Creating RepeatersThis section describes the parameters for creating repeaters or repeater equipment. You can referto this section when viewing the properties of repeaters in the Repeater Properties dialog boxor the properties of repeater equipment in the Repeater Equipment dialog box.

Parameters in the Repeater Equipment Dialog BoxParameter Description

Name Indicates the name of repeater equipment.This parameter uniquely identifies repeaterequipment.

Noise Figure(dB) Indicates the noise figure of the repeaterequipment.The value range is from 0 to 32767 and theunit is dB.

Min AMP Gain(dB) Indicates the minimum amplification gain ofthe repeater equipment.The value range is from 0 to 32767 and theunit is dB.

Max AMP Gain(dB) Indicates the maximum amplification gain ofthe repeater equipment.The value range is from 0 to 32767 and theunit is dB.

Max Output Power(UL)(dBm) Indicates the maximum uploaded transmitpower of the repeater equipment.The value range is from 0 to 32767 and theunit is dBm.

Max Output Power(DL)(dBm) Indicates the maximum downloaded transmitpower of the repeater equipment.The value range is from 0 to 32767 and theunit is dBm.



130


Time Delay(ms) Indicates the time delay of the repeaterequipment.The value range is from 0 to 32767 and theunit is ms.

Parameters in the Repeater Properties Dialog Box



Name Indicates the name of a repeater. Thisparameter uniquely identifies a repeater.The U-Net enters the default name of eachnew site.

Donor Indicates the donor cell of the repeater.

Equipment Indicates the repeater equipment.

Dx Indicates the offset of the repeater to the sitein the X direction.

Dy Indicates the offset of the repeater to the sitein the Y direction.

Comments Displays the comments on the repeater.

Table 3-37 Parameters on the Donor Side tab page


Link Type Air Indicates the loss of a radio link.The unit is dB.

Microwave Indicates the loss of a microwave link.The unit is dB.

Optical Fibre Indicates the loss of an optical cable link.The unit is dB.

Antenna Model Indicates the model of the antenna on thedonor side.

Height(m) Indicates the height of the antenna on thedonor side.



131


Azimuth Indicates the azimuth of the antenna on thedonor side.The unit is degree.

Mechanical Downtilt Indicates the mechanical downtilt of theantenna on the donor side.The unit is degree.

Electrical Downtilt Indicates the electrical downtilt of theantenna on the donor side.The unit is degree.

Feeder Type Indicates the type of the feeder on the donorside.You can select a feeder type, click ..., and thenmodify the properties of the feeders.

Length(m) l Transmission: Indicates the feeder lengthon the donor side.

l Reception: Indicates the feeder length ofthe reception equipment on the donor side.

Table 3-38 Parameters on the Coverage Side tab page


Active Indicates whether the repeater is active.

Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power.

Total Gain Downlink Indicates the total gain on the downlink.

Uplink Indicates the total gain on the uplink.

Antenna Model Indicates the model of the antenna on thecoverage side.

Height(m) Indicates the height of the antenna on thecoverage side.

Azimuth Indicates the azimuth of the antenna on thecoverage side.The unit is degree.

Mechanical Downtilt Indicates the mechanical downtilt of theantenna on the coverage side.The unit is degree.



132


Electrical Downtilt Indicates the electrical downtilt of theantenna on the coverage side.The unit is degree.

Feeder Type Indicates the type of the feeder on thecoverage side.You can select a feeder type, click ..., and thenmodify the properties of the feeders.

Length(m) l Transmission: Indicates the feeder lengthon the coverage side.

l Reception: Indicates the feeder length ofthe reception equipment on the coverageside.

Table 3-39 Parameters on the Propagation tab page


MainMatrix MainMatrix

Propagation Model Indicates the main propagation model.

Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of the mainpropagation model.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation resolution of themain propagation model.

ExtendedMatrixExtendedMatrix

Propagation Model Indicates the extended propagation model.

Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of theextended propagation model.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation resolution of theextended propagation model.

Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station TemplatesThis section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying theproperties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base stationtemplates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.

Site Tab PageParameter Description

Name Indicates the name of a base station template.



133


Support Type Indicates the base station type.Macro indicates a macro base station, and Micro indicates amicro base station.

Use Altitude For Calculation Indicates whether to manually enter the altitude of a site forcalculation. If this option is selected, you manually enter thealtitude of a site for calculation.

Hexagon Radius Indicates the radius of a cell.

Comments Description.

Transceiver area on the LTE-FDD tab page


Transceivers Indicates the number of transceivers in a site.

Model Indicates the type of an antenna.


Mechanical Downtilt Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.

Electrical Downtilt Indicates the electrical tilt angle.

Height/Ground(m) Indicates the height of an antenna.

First Sector Azimuth Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.

Transmission in theNumber of Antennas area




Transmission in theNumber of Antenna Portsarea


Total Loss(DL) Indicates the total downlink loss.

Total Loss(UL) Indicates the total uplink loss.


General tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab page


Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit is dBm.



134


RS Power(dBm) Indicates the power of the reference signal on a subcarrier.The unit is dBm.

Actual Load(DL) Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The value rangesfrom 0 to 1.

Actual Load(UL) Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value ranges from0 to 1.

Target IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the target ratio of the sum of interference and noiseto the volume of increased noise on the uplink.

Actual IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the actual Interface Over Thermal (IoT) on theuplink.

CCU IoT(dB) Indicates the IoT of users in the cell center.The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is12.5.

CEU IoT(dB) Indicates the IoT of users at the cell edge.The value ranges from -100 to 100. The default value is10.5.

Frequency Band Indicates a frequency band.

Channel Index Indicates a channel index.

Reception Indicates a receiver.

Transmission Mode Indicates the transmission mode.For details about parameter values, see Table 3-40.

Priority Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cell is,the higher the priority of the cell is.

Channel Relativity Indicates whether channel relativity is considered.By default, this option is not selected.

COMP Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabledon the base station.Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for thebase station to increase cell edge capacity and average cellthroughput. By default, this option is not selected.

IRC Indicates whether the interference rejection combining(IRC) function is enabled.If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC to suppresscombining signal interference and increase uplink gain. Bydefault, this option is not selected.



135

Advance tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab pageParameter Description

Downlink Indicates the downlink parameters.You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.

Uplink Indicates the uplink parameters.You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.

Frequency SelectivitySchedule

Indicates whether to enable the frequency schedulingfunction.If this option is selected, the system allocates the propernetwork resources to users during capacity simulation.

ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interferencecoordination (ICIC) in the uplink.l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not

enabled, the U-Net uses Actual IoT(UL) in the cellproperties.

l If ICIC is enabled, CCU IoT is used for the cell centerand CEU IoT is used for the cell edge.

ICIC(DL) Indicates whether to perform ICIC in the downlink.l When this parameter is set to ICIC Off, the PA value set

in cell attributes is used.l When this parameter is set to Static ICIC, ICIC is

enabled. In this case, the CCU PA value is used for thecell center and the CEU PA value for the cell edge.

l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC canbe enabled automatically and edge band mode can beconfigured automatically. Users can plan the edge bandmodes and then deliver the band modes without having toconfigure the parameter for the cells one by one.

Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge usersin the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2,or Style3).



136


Edge Frequency Style(DL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge usersin the downlink.l When ICIC(DL) is set to Static ICIC, the Reuse3 state

is supported (Style1, Style2, or Style3).l When ICIC(DL) is set to Adaptive ICIC, the following

4 states and 11 modes are supported: Reuse3 (Style1,Style2, or Style3), Reuse6 (Style1a, Style1b, Style2a,Style2b, Style3a, or Style3b), full power Reuse1(AllPowerReuse1), and low power Reuse1(LowPowerReuse1).

l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all usersand the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameteris set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users inthe cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter isset to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in thecell is set to the value of CCU PA.

Power Control Indicates the power control in the downlink.

Target Load Indicates the target load.

Control Channel Overhead l Uplink area: Indicates the number of resource blocks(RBs) on the uplink control channels. The value range isfrom 1 to N-1. The unit is RB. N indicates the number ofRBs of the entire bandwidth.

l Downlink area: Indicates the number of orthogonalfrequency division multiplexing (OFDM) on thedownlink PDCCH.

Max Schedule Users Indicates the maximum number of scheduled subscribers onthe uplink and downlink.

RS SINR Access Threshold(DL)(dB)

Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit isdB.

Schedule Policy Indicates a scheduling policy.l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling

algorithm.l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the polling

algorithm and the maximum signal to interference ratio.l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the

maximum signal to interference ratio.

TTI Bundling Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.

VMIMO Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output(VMIMO) is considered.By default, this option is not selected.



137

Power Offset tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab pageParameter Description

PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 andthe unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 andthe unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relativeto the power of the reference signal. The value range is from-15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relativeto the power of the reference signal. The value range is from-15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. Theunit is dB.

PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDSCH RErelative to that on the RS RE.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -3.

CCU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received byusers in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to the RSpower.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -6.

CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received byusers at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.

PB(dB) Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and B symbolsof the RE relative to the RSRE power. The value can be 0,1, 2, or 3.



138

Propagation Models tab page in the Cell area of the LTE-FDD tab pageParameter Description

Propagation Model Indicates a propagation model.l When the parameter is present in the Main Matrix area,

it indicates the main propagation model.l When the parameter is present in the Extended Matrix

area, it indicates the extended propagation model.

Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of a propagation model.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation resolution of a propagation model.

Table 3-40 Description of Transmission Mode Values

Value Description

TM1 Indicates a single antenna port for eNodeBs.

TM2 Indicates the open-loop transmit diversity, which is used forthe eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R/8T8R configuration.

TM3 Indicates the open-loop space reuse, which is used for theeNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.

TM4 Indicates the closed-loop space reuse, which is used for theeNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.

TM6 Indicates the closed-loop transmit diversity, which is usedfor the eNodeB 2T2R/4T2R/4T4R configuration.

TM7 Indicates the signal-stream beamforming.This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDDnetwork.

TM8 Indicates the signal-stream and dual-stream beamforming.This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDDnetwork.

OL_Adaptive Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2and TM3.

CL_Adaptive Indicates the closed-loop adaptive handover between TM4and TM6.

OL_CL_Adaptive Indicates the open-loop adaptive handover between TM2,TM3, TM4, and TM6.



139

Value Description

TM7_MIMO_Adaptive Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that arecompatible with the 3GPP R8 specification and do notsupport the selection of uplink transmit antenna can performadaptive handovers between TM2, TM3, and TM7.This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDDnetwork.

TM8_MIMO_Adaptive Indicates beamforming or MIMO adaptive. UEs that arecompatible with the 3GPP R9 specification and support theselection of uplink transmit antenna can perform adaptivehandovers between TM2, TM3, and TM8.This transmission mode is unavailable in the LTE-FDDnetwork.

Parameters for Setting the Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-FDD cell or modifying the propertiesof an LTE-FDD cell.

LTE-FDDCell Tab Page

Table 3-41 LTE-FDDCell tab page


GCI Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.

Name Indicates the name of a carrier.The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.

Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.



Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value ranges from0 to 1.

Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value rangesfrom 0 to 1.






140


PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink physical control formatindicator channel (PCFICH) power relative to the power ofthe reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. Theunit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relativeto the power of the reference signal. The value ranges from-15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQindicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the power ofthe reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15. Theunit is dB.



High Speed Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be set to oneof the following values:l LowSpeedl HighSpeedl HighwaySpeed

Radius(m) Indicates the radius of a cell.

Min Root Sequence Index Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.

Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends on theneighbor relationship).The value of this parameter must be an integer larger than 0.



Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unitis dB.





141






PCI Indicates the physical ID of a cell.

PCI Reuse Distance(Km) Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.

PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on theneighbor relationship).


MCC Indicates the mobile country code (MCC).

MNC Indicates the mobile network code (MNC).

CI Indicates the ID of a cell.

DlEarfcn Indicates a downlink ARFCN.

UlEarfcn Indicates an uplink ARFCN.

TAC Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).

Local Cell ID Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiating the cellfrom other cells under the same eNodeB.

Reselect Priority Indicates the cell reselection priority.



CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received byusers at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is-1.77.




142



Alpha This is an open loop power control parameter and indicatesthe path loss compensation coefficient.

Po(dBm) This is an open loop power control parameter.

TTI Bundling Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.By default, this option is not selected.



COMP Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function isenabled on the base station.Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink forthe base station to increase cell edge capacity and averagecell throughput. By default, this option is not selected.


Transmission Mode Indicates the transmission mode.For the details of the value, see Table 3-42.

VIP For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameters cannotbe changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt, and pilotpower.

Throughput(UL) Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The value rangesfrom 0 to int.Max.The default value is 0.

Throughput(DL) Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The valueranges from 0 to int.Max.The default value is 0.

Cell Throughput(UL) Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 toint.Max.The default value is 0.



143


Cell Throughput(DL) Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 toint.Max.The default value is 0.

Density Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 to int.Max.The default value is 800.

Azimuth Locked Whether the azimuth is locked.

Azimuth Min. Value Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The value rangesfrom -360 to 360.The default value is -20.

Azimuth Max. Value Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The valueranges from -360 to 360.The default value is 20.

Electronic Downtilt Locked Whether the electrical tilt is locked.

Electronic Downtilt Min.Value

Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The valueranges from -90 to 90.The default value is -10.

Electronic Downtilt Max.Value

Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. The valueranges from -90 to 90.The default value is 14.

RsPower Locked Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.

RsPower Min. Value(dB) Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. The valueranges from 0 to 46.The default value is 10.

RsPower Max. Value(dB) Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. The valueranges from 0 to 46.The default value is 20.

Fitness Threshold(%) Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100.The default value is 90.

State Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage. Thevalue can be Working or Outage.The default value is Working.

Status Indicates the swapping status.l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in swapping state.l NEW: Indicates a new cell.l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell.The default value is NONE.



144


Advance Parameters Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button.For details, see Table 3-43.

Neighbors list Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button.For details, see Table 3-44.

Propagation Models Sets the propagation model by clicking this button.For details, see Table 3-45.


Value Description














145

Value Description


Table 3-43 Advance Parameters tab page




ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interferencecoordination (ICIC) on the uplink.l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not






l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC canbe enabled automatically and edge band mode can beconfigured automatically. Users can plan the edge bandmodes and then deliver the band modes without havingto configure the parameter for the cells one by one.

Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge usersin the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1,Style2, or Style3).



146





l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all usersand the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameteris set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users inthe cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter isset to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users inthe cell is set to the value of CCU PA.

Power Control Indicates the power control on the downlink.

Edge Frequency Style Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge userson the uplink and downlink.





Table 3-44 Cell Neighbors tab page


Intra-frequency Neighbors Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-frequency Neighbors Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Neighbors Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.



147

Table 3-45 Propagation tab page



Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of the main propagationmodel.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagationmodel.

Propagation Model Indicates the extension propagation model.

Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of the extended propagationmodel.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation precision of the extendedpropagation model.

General Tab Page
















148







Antenna Config Tab Page

















149





















150

3.8 LTE-FDD PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

3.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PredictionThis chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculatinglink loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, andprediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function bylearning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDD Prediction Counters

This section describes the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.

NOTE

Certain counters are not displayed by default. To enable the U-Net to display these counters, select thecorresponding network technology, right-click a counter type and then choose More Coverage from the shortcutmenu.

Table 3-49 lists the LTE-FDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.

Table 3-49 Description of LTE-FDD prediction counters

Category Counter Description

Coverage bySignal Level(DL)

Best Server Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells thatreceive downlink signals.

DL RSRP Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS)received from the primary serving cell.

DL BandWidth RSRP Strength of downlink reference signals on the entirebandwidth.

DL RSSI Total power received by a UE on the entirebandwidth. The power includes the receive power ofthe serving cell, interference power of other cells,and the noise power of the UE.

DL PDSCH SignalLevel

Power received on the PDSCH on a resource element(RE).

Handover Area Whether an area is a handover area.

DL PBCH SignalLevel

PBCH signal strength on an RE.

DL PCFICH SignalLevel

PCFICH signal strength on an RE.



151


DL PDCCH SignalLevel

Downlink PDCCH signal strength.

DL PHICH SignalLevel

PHICH signal strength on an RE.

DL SCH Signal Level SCH signal strength on an RE.

DL ICIC Zone Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink centralarea and edge area that meet the downlink ICICthreshold.

Overlapping Zones Number of cells in a coverage spot.

Pilot Pollution Determines whether a point has pilot pollution andchecks the number of points having pilot pollution.To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised toselect With Shadow.NOTE

By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot thatreaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn aboutpilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage areaintuitively.

Coverage byC/(I+N)Level(DL)

DL RS SINR Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of thedownlink reference signal that a UE receives. Thiscounter reflects the quality of the downlink referencesignal.

DL PDSCH SINR SINR of the downlink PDSCH. This counter reflectsthe quality of the downlink PDSCH.

DL RSRQ Quality of the received downlink reference signals.

Geometry Difference between the power of the strongest signalthat a UE receives on the entire bandwidth and thepower of the interference and noise that the UEreceives on the entire bandwidth.

DL PBCH SINR Downlink PBCH SINR.

DL PCFICH SINR Downlink PCFICH SINR.

DL PDCCH SINR Downlink PDCCH SINR.

DL PHICH SINR Downlink PHICH SINR.

DL SCH SINR Downlink SCH SINR.

Coverage bySignal Level(UL)

UL RSRP Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.

UL User RB Txpower Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).

UL User BandTxpower

Uplink transmit power on the user bandwidth.



152


UL PUSCH SignalLevel

Power that a cell receives on the PUSCH RE.

PRACH Signal Level PRACH signal strength on an RE.

UL ICIC ZONE Uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplink central area andedge area that meet the uplink ICIC threshold.

PUCCH Signal Level PUCCH signal strength on an RE.

Coverage byC/(I+N)Level(UL)

UL RS SINR SINR of the uplink reference signal.

UL PUSCH SINR SINR of the uplink PUSCH. This counter reflects thequality of the uplink PUSCH.

PRACH SINR PRACH SINR.

PUCCH SINR PUCCH SINR.

Coverage byMCS(DL)

PDSCH MCS The highest MCS supported by the downlinkPDSCH.

Coverage byThroughput(DL)

DL MAC PeakThroughput

Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

DL Application PeakThroughput

Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.

Coverage byMCS(UL)

PUSCH MCS The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.

Coverage byThroughput(UL)

UL MAC PeakThroughput

Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.Predicting IRC gain is supported if Actual IoT(UL)(dB) is set and the IRC.xml file is modified.

UL Application PeakThroughput

Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.

Procedure for Performing PredictionThis section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.

Figure 3-25 shows the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.



153

Figure 3-25 Procedure of prediction

LTE-FDD Prediction AlgorithmBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality. This section describes the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm through a schematicdiagram.

Figure 3-26 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm.



154

Figure 3-26 LTE-FDD prediction algorithm

Table 3-50 describes the processes shown in Figure 3-26.

Table 3-50 Description of the LTE-FDD prediction algorithm

Procedure

Operation Description

1 Traversing all the cells Determine whether the cells in the calculation area areactivated. If a cell is not activated, the predictioncounters of this cell are not calculated.

2 Obtaining the pathloss matrix

l If the path loss matrix does not exist, calculate thepath loss matrix.

l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtaineddirectly.

3 Querying the antennagain, equipment loss,and penetration loss

You can enable the U-Net to consider the antenna gain,equipment loss, and penetration loss during thecalculation of link loss.



155

Procedure


4 Predicting slow fadingby using theshadowing margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges witha certain probability. Certain power of the base stationis reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reservedpower is called shadowing margin.You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowingmargin into account during the calculation of link loss.

5 Calculating the DLRSRP to determine theprimary serving cell

The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at thedownlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You candetermine the primary serving cell based on thiscounter.

6 Calculating the powerof interference noisesto determine thehandover area

You can calculate the power of interference noises anddetermine the handover area.

7 Calculating countersof the traffic channeland common channelbased on the BIN

Calculate the DL RSSI, DL RS SINR, and trafficchannel counters. The U-Net calculates the PUSCHSINR when the uplink throughput reaches themaximum value. When the PUSCH SINR iscalculated, the PUSCH MCS and PUSCH PeakThroughput are also calculated.

8 Displaying predictionresults

The U-Net displays the prediction results in differentcolors in the window and provides a prediction report.

Basic Knowledge of Link LossLink loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculatinglink loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadowfading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink.

The formulas for calculating uplink loss and downlink loss are as follows:

l Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gainof the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the basestation + Total loss of the base station

l Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antennagain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of thebase station + Total loss of the base station

The difference between the two formulas are as follows: The uplink has TMA gains which areincluded into the antenna gain of the base station in calculation. The downlink has TMA losswhich is included into the total loss of the base station.

Table 3-51 describes the meanings of factors in the formulas.



156

Table 3-51 Meanings of factors in the formulas

Factor Meaning

Loss caused by thehuman body

Loss of transmit or receive power of the mobile station (MS) due tothe shielding or absorption of the human body.

Feeder loss of aterminal

Loss of the feeder on a terminal.

Antenna gain of aterminal

Gain of the antenna on a terminal.

Path loss Loss on the path between the transmit antenna and the receiveantenna, which excludes the antenna gain and shadow fading.

Shadow fading When an electromagnetic wave is blocked by fluctuant terrains,buildings, or vegetation areas in the propagation path, the shadowof the magnetic field exits.When an MS travels through the shadow of different barriers, thereceived signal strength decreases, and the field strength at thereceiving antenna changes. In this case, fading is generated. Thisfading is called shadow fading.

Penetration loss Loss that is caused when signals travel through buildings, vehicles,and leaves.

Antenna gain of a basestation

Gain of the antenna on a base station.

Total loss of the basestation

Power loss that is caused when signals travel through all the TMAs,feeders (including the main feeder, jumpers, and lightningarresters), and connectors

3.8.2 Calculating Path LossThe path loss refers to the loss of strength of signals transmitted from a TX end to an RX end.You must calculate the path loss because it is an input required for prediction. The U-Netautomatically calculates the path loss and generates a .loss file for each cell. Alternatively, youcan manually calculate the path loss before performing the prediction. This section describeshow to manually calculate the path loss.

Prerequisitesl Base stations (sites and cells) are available.l Propagation models are assigned to cells.

ContextYou can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.l Calculation



157

– If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file isavailable, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Netchecks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.

– If path loss matrices are available but the parameters related to radio data and calculationarea are modified, the path loss matrices of some cells may become invalid. In this case,the U-Net calculates only these invalid path loss matrices again.

l Force calculationIf path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of thevalidity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checksthe validity of calculation results and updates the results.

Procedure



Step 3 Select a calculation mode to calculate the path loss of all cells on the Transceiver node.


Calculate Right-click and choose Calculation > Calculate Path LossMatrices from the shortcut menu.

Calculate forcibly Right-click and choose Calculation > Force Calculate PathLoss Matrices from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 If you have not saved the project file, save it as prompted.

The U-Net automatically creates a Project Name.losses folder that saves the information aboutthe path loss matrix and an .ipl project file in the specified save path. Afterwards, the U-Netstarts calculating the path loss.

Step 5 Query the calculation results

After the calculation is complete, the calculation results will be automatically saved in the ProjectName.losses folder that saves the project file.

Click to stop ongoing calculations.

Step 6 Optional: Check the progress of path loss calculation

In the Event Viewer docked window, query the start time and end time of path loss on the EventViewer tab page and the progress of the path loss calculation on the Task tab page, as shownin Figure 3-27.



158

Figure 3-27 Event Viewer

----End

Follow-up ProcedureThe MCL with the default value of 70 dB indicates the minimum path loss between the basestation and the terminal or between one terminal and another terminal. If you want to changethe default value of the MCL, modify the LinkLossConfig.xml file in the U-Net installationdirectory.

3.8.3 Setting Shadow Fading Standard DeviationDuring the network prediction, the standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set for certainprediction counters.

Contextl In the LTE-FDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be

set for the following predication counters:DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, Geometry, PBCH SINR, PCFICH SINR, PDCCH SINR, PRACHSINR, PUCCH SINR, SCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, PHICH SINR, and ULRS SINR.

l In the LTE-TDD network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to beset for the following predication counters: DL RS SINR, DL RSRQ, PDCCH SINR,PDSCH SINR, PUSCH SINR, UL RS SINR.

l In the GSM network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be set forthe following predication counters:Geometry, DL BCCH CIR, DL Service CIR, and UL Service CIR.

l In the UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs to be setfor the following predication counters:CPICH Ec/Io, DL DPCH Eb/Nt, HS PDSCH Ec/Nt, UL DPCH Eb/Nt, and E DPDCH Ec/Nt.

l In the GSM/UMTS network, the C/(I + N) standard deviation of shadow fading needs tobe set for the following predication counters:Coverage By CIR.



159

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Map > Clutter.

Step 3 Choose Parameter Management from the shortcut menu. The Clutter Parameters Displaydialog box is displayed.


If ... Then ...

The map information isnot imported

Click Default Value to change the default values of parametersunder Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) StandardDeviation.

The map information isimported

Click Actual Value to change the actual values of parametersunder Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) StandardDeviation.

NOTE

For the meanings of parameters under Model Standard Deviation and C/(I + N) Standard Deviation, seeParameters for Setting the Clutter Class Layer.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

3.8.4 Creating LTE-FDD Prediction GroupsThe U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists ofone or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.

Prerequisitesl A U-Net project is already created.l The geographic data is imported.l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method

for creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.

Procedure

Step 1 Optional: Setting common properties for prediction groups.

Before creating coverage prediction groups, you need to set common properties for predictiongroups so that new prediction groups have the common properties.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.



160

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.

You are advised to set the precision of prediction to be the same as that of the propagationmodel.

5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.6. Click OK.

Step 2 Skip this step if you have set the power offset of the PBCH channel relative to the RS channelin the cell properties. Otherwise, proceed with the following steps.1. Select a transceiver in the map window.2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Set the related parameters on the cell property tab.

For example, to calculate the DL PBCH Signal Level prediction indicator, you need to setthe PBCH to RS parameter.

Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.

Step 4 Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 New

Step 5 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, andselect prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-FDDPrediction Counters.

Step 6 Click Next.

Step 7 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.See Figure 3-29 For parameterdescription, see Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction Groups.



161

Figure 3-29 Group Properties

Step 8 Click OK

Step 9 Optional: If you deselect Calculate Now in creating prediction groups, right-click the predictiongroup, and then choose Calculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, andview detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.

3.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single CellThe U-Net can predict the performance of a single cell in a specified area. In this case, othercells are deactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe theprediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data is imported.



162

l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.l The calculation area is created.

Procedure

Step 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.


Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialogbox is displayed.

Step 4 Set the name of a prediction group by referring to Parameters in the New Prediction GroupDialog Box, and select prediction items for the prediction group.

Step 5 Click Next. Then, set properties such as calculation area, prediction conditions, prediction bandsfor new prediction groups by referring to Parameter in the LTE Group Properties DialogBox.

Step 6 Click OK.

Step 7 Optional: If you clear Calculate Now in Step 4, right-click the prediction group and chooseCalculate from the shortcut menu after creating a prediction group.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureThe number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the numberof cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to viewdetails.

3.8.6 Managing the Prediction ResultAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, andview detailed KPI result reports.

PrerequisitesThe prediction calculation is complete.

Procedure





163

Option Description

Re-calculate counters. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >counter item.

2. Choose Unlock from the shortcut menu.This counter is in the unlocked state.If Lock is displayed in the shortcut menu, this counter isin the unlocked state.

3. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.4. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.

All the unlocked counters in this group will be used forcalculation.If all the counters are in the locked state, Calculate isunavailable.

Add or delete a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.2. Choose Edit Studies from the shortcut menu.3. In the displayed dialog box, select or clear the check box

of the counter to be added or deleted.4. Click OK.5. Perform the following operations as required.l if a counter is added, the system displays the new

counter under the prediction group node in thenavigation tree. In this case, you need to re-calculatecounters. For detailed operations, see Re-calculatecounters.

l If a counter is deleted, the system deletes the counterfrom the prediction group node in the navigation tree.In addition, the corresponding rendering color isremoved.If the deleted counter is Best Server and a traffic mapuses this prediction group, data of this predictiongroup will also be deleted from the traffic map.

View detailed report on acounter.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >counter item.

2. Right-click and choose Generate Report from theshortcut menu.

3. In the displayed dialog box, view detailed informationabout the counter. For detailed operations, seeParameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction ResultReports.

NOTEYou can select a hot spot from the drop-down list box in theStatistics Zone area to view information about the specified hotspot.



164

Option Description

Set the properties of a counter. 1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >counter item.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. In the displayed dialog box, set parameters such as

display color on the Display tab page.

Lock or unlock counters inbatches.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.2. Right-click and select or clear the check box of Studies

Locked from the shortcut menu.

All the unlocked counters inthe prediction group arecalculated in batches.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.2. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.

----End

3.8.7 Viewing the Prediction ResultYou can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicatorsby using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Querying Prediction Statistical Results (on a Map)After calculating the prediction, you can query the prediction results in different legend colorsin the map window.


Procedure

Step 1 Optional: Set the legend information and display properties of prediction.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Study Properties dialog box is displayed.4. Click the Display tab.5. Set items such as counter range, display color, and transparency.6. Select the ranges to be displayed in the Legend window. See Figure 3-30.



165

Figure 3-30 Display tab

7. Select Add to legend. The selected ranges are displayed in the Legend window.8. Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the

Legend window.9. Click OK.

Step 2 Query the legend information.

Choose Window > Legend on the menu bar. The Legend window is displayed.

In the displayed window, you can query the name and color corresponding to each range. If youhave selected Show Statistic, you can also query the coverage area corresponding to a rangeand the percentage of the area to the whole calculation area.

Step 3 Query the prediction results of each cell.

The map displays the cell coverage according to the preset legend color and transparency. Inaddition, the Legend window displays the size and percentage of coverage areas, helping youto query the coverage and perform relevant analysis.

----End

Viewing Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart)

After performing a coverage prediction, you can view each coverage prediction counter in thecumulative distribution function (CDF) chart, inverse CDF chart, and probability distributionfunction (PDF) chart based on coverage prediction groups.



166

PrerequisitesThe coverage prediction calculation is complete.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx in the navigation tree. Then, right-click Groupx and chooseStatistics(CDF) or Statistics(PDF) from the shortcut menu. The Statistics dialog box isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 3-31. The following takes the CDF chart for example.

Figure 3-31 Statistics

Step 3 Select a prediction counter, hot spot area, statistical area, and display mode from the Study,Zone, Statistics Area, and Figure Style drop-down list boxes respectively.

The CDF, inverse CDF, or PDF chart of the selected counter is displayed in the Statistics dialogbox.



167

NOTE

l You can select a hot spot from the Zone drop-down list box to view the information about the selected hotspot.

l For the LTE-FDD and LTE-TDD networks, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters BestServer, Handover Area, DL ICIC Zone, UL ICIC Zone, Pilot Pollution, PDSCH MCS, and PUSCHMCS cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results are discrete values. You can selectDL MAC Peak Throughput, UL MAC Peak Throughput, DL Application Peak Throughput, and ULApplication Peak Throughput to view the average throughput and cell edge throughput.

l For the GSM network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,Coverage Area, and Coding Scheme cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart because their results arediscrete values.

l For the UMTS network, the coverage prediction statistics on the counters Best Server, Handover Area,HSDPA CQI, Pilot Pollution, and Number Of Service cannot be displayed in a PDF or CDF chart becausetheir results are discrete values.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Save Image As from the shortcut menu to

save the chart in the Statistics dialog box. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif,or .bmp format.

l Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Print from the shortcut menu to print thechart in the Statistics dialog box.

l Right-click the PDF or CDF chart and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy thechart in the Statistics dialog box to the clipboard.

3.8.8 Analyzing the Prediction ResultAfter calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, afterimproving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare theprediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of predictionanalysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.

Analyzing Prediction ResultsThe U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences.This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.

Procedure

Step 1 Create and calculate a prediction group.

Step 2 View the prediction result and check whether any counter needs to be optimized.

Step 3 Adjust the setting of the counter that needs to be optimized to improve the coverage.

Step 4 Duplicate the prediction group.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > first prediction group.3. Choose Duplicate from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group.



168

1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.2. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.

Step 6 Compare the original prediction result and the new prediction result.1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.2. Choose Compare from the shortcut menu. The CDF Compare window is displayed.3. Select the counters from the drop-down list on the left.

NOTE

l Coverage Area: The area that is actually covered by the counters. It is the area rendered by colorson the map window.

l Calculate Area: The Polygon area that you select when creating a new prediction group

4. Select the prediction groups from the pane on the left and the corresponding display colors.5. View the CDF comparison chart in the pane on the right.

----End

ExampleThis section takes the antenna downtilt as an example to describe the function of comparison.

The coverage of a cell in a prediction group is not good. Based on the analysis, the antennadowntilt may be improperly set. Perform the following steps to adjust the antenna downtilt.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.5. Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.

After the downtilt is adjusted, you can recalculate the prediction group but cannot compare thetwo coverage predictions, that is, the prediction before and the prediction after the adjustment.Therefore, duplicate the existing prediction group before the recalculation. After therecalculation, you can view the coverage change in the map window.

To know the detailed change, compare the change of counters by referring to Step 6.

Follow-up Procedurel To save the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Save Image As from

the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.l To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcut

menu.l To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcut

menu.

Analyzing Terrain Profiles by Using Point AnalysisThis section describes how to analyze terrain profiles by using the point analysis function. Youcan analyze the signal receive status between a cell and a terminal on the terrain profile by usingthe point analysis function. A terrain profile is calculated through the propagation model in realtime. Therefore, you can analyze any selected point on the terrain profile. After a propagation



169

model is allocated to a cell, the U-Net provides the profile terrain and calculates the path lossbetween the cell and the receive point and the receive level of the corresponding terminal basedon the NE data and geographic data.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data has been imported.l Base stations are available.

Procedure

Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The Point Analysis Tool dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell and a carrier from the Transceiver and Cell drop-downlist boxes respectively.

Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set cell edge coverage probability in the Cell Edge CoverageProbability(%) text box. If Indoor Coverage is selected, penetration loss will be taken intoaccount.

Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, select a capacity simulation group, terminal type, service type,and mobility type from the Simulation Group, Terminal, Service, and Mobility drop-downlist boxes, respectively. Then, set neighboring cell PDSCH load and neighboring cell PDCCHload in the Neighbour PDSCH Load and Neighbour PDCCH Load text boxes respectively.

Step 5 Switch back to the Profile tab page and click a point on the map.

The point changes to , which represents a terminal. Then, a line connecting the terminal and

the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the pointer to move the cursor.

NOTE

The preceding operations can also be performed on other tab pages including the Reception tab page. Thecursor, however, moves slowly on these tab pages. Therefore, you are advised to switch to the Profile tabpage to perform the operation.

Step 6 On the Profile tab page, view the terrain profile analysis information.l The grey area indicates the terrain condition between the cell and the receive point.

The X-coordinate indicates the geographic distance between the cell and the receive point.The Y-coordinate indicates the altitude.

l The blue ellipse indicates the Fresnel region of diffraction.l The green straight line indicates the line-of-sight distance.l Select DL RSRP to view the receive level of the terminal.l Select Path Loss to view the path loss between the cell and the receive point.l Propagation model used by the cell.l Geographic distance between the cell and the terminal.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel View detailed link budget.



170

Right-click the profile and choose Link Budget from the shortcut menu. The LinkBudget dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see ParameterDescription of the Link Budget Window.

l View detailed information about the propagation model. You can perform this operationonly when the propagation model is SPM.Right-click the profile and choose Model Details from the shortcut menu. The ModelDetails dialog box is displayed. For details about the parameters, see ParameterDescription of the Model Details Window.

l Copy a profile.Right-click the profile and choose Copy from the shortcut menu. The profile is copied tothe clipboard of the operating system.

l You can move the cursor to dynamically view the profile analysis information about anypoint.

Analyzing Prediction Results by Using the Point Analysis FunctionAfter prediction is complete, you can further analyze the prediction of certain positions by usingthe point analysis function. For example, you can check the list of cells that receive signals andanalyze the strength of received signals.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data is imported.l Base stations are available.

Procedure


Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.

Step 3 Optional: On the Profile tab page, set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge CoverageProbability(%).

Step 4 Click a point on the map.


the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the cursor.

Step 5 On the Reception tab page, check the list of cells from which signals can be received and checkthe strength of the received signal.

The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending orderfrom top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reception tab page. The cell that has the highest signalstrength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.

Keep the cursor at the selected point. Then, you can check the received signal strength of eachcell.

Step 6 Query the statistical information about the selected point on the Results tab page.

The statistics are related to the following items:



171

l Longitude, latitude, and altitudel Clutter classl List of cells from which signals can be received, and the received signal strength

----End

3.8.9 Exporting and Printing Prediction ResultsYou can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result byBin point.

Exporting Prediction Results in BatchesAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then exporta statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.


ProcedureStep 1 In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.

Step 3 Choose Export Results from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the Export Results dialog box, set the parameters. For parameter description, see Parametersfor Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.

Step 5 Optional: You can also select the detailed export contents (such as the name, coverage area,current coverage percentage, and cumulative coverage percentage) of each counter in SelectStatistics Data.

Step 6 Click Export.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. The file is named in thefollowing format: Name of the prediction group_Name of the counter.Export format.

Exporting the Detailed LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin PointAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Binpoints in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinaland latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.

Procedurel Export the detailed prediction results of Bin points according to the specified area.

You can specify a calculation area and export the detailed prediction results of all Bin pointsin this area.



172

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. Select the objects to be exported.

If... Then...

Export the detailedprediction results of aprediction group

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx.

Export the detailedprediction results of asingle counter in aprediction group

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx> counter item.

3. Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.5. Click Export.

l The U-Net exports the detailed prediction results of Bin points based on the pilot power.This function supports the single-mode network only.

You can specify the range of receive level and just export the detailed prediction results ofBin points in the specified range.


If... Then...




In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx> DL RSRP.

NOTE

You can set ranges in the property dialog box corresponding to the DL RSRP.

3. Choose Export BIN By > DL RSRP from the shortcut menu.

– When you do not select the DL RSRP indicator when performing predictioncalculation, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.

– The dialog box displayed lists the value segments of the selected KPI, the coveragearea of the selected value segment, the percentage of the coverage area, and thecumulative percentage of the coverage area.

4. Select the range of the DL RSRP.

The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points whose DLRSRP is within the selected range.



173

5. Click Export.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents. By default, the file is savedon the desktop of the PC and the default file name is PredictionData.csv.

The following contents are exported:l BINID: It is automatically identified by the U-Net.l X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates

are exported.l Counter value: indicates the value of selected counter.

Printing Prediction Results in BatchesAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters inbatches. The results include a prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.

Prerequisitesl The prediction calculation is complete.l The printer is properly set.

Choose File > Print Setting. In the displayed Print Setting dialog box, click Printer....

Procedure



Step 3 Select counters to be printed from the prediction group, as shown in Figure 3-32.

Figure 3-32 Select counters to be printed


Step 5 Choose Batch Print from the shortcut menu. The Batch Print dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 In Select Polygon, select the target area for print.

If you select a polygon, the external rectangle of this polygon is the target area for print.



174

Step 7 In Prediction, select the counters to be printed.

Step 8 Click Print.The coverage prediction results of all the selected counters are printed.

----End

3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT DataAfter a coverage prediction group is calculated, you can use DT data to adjust the group toimprove the accuracy of feature data and positioning. If no DT data is to be adjusted, you canskip this section.

Prerequisites

l Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has beenimported or created.

l Coverage prediction about the DL RSRP counter has been completed.l A DT data file has been imported.

Procedure

Step 1 In the browser window, click the Operation tab.

Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose DT Adjust Feature Database from the shortcut menu. TheDT Adjust Feature Database dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 DT Adjust Feature Database

Step 4 Set related parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about parameters, see Parametersfor Adjusting the DT Feature Database.

Step 5 Click Adjust.

----End

3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature DataThis section describes how to export data from the feature database after the prediction isperformed to implement geographical positioning.



175

ContextFeature data indicates the geographical distribution of network signals. On an actual network, ageographical location may be covered by signals from multiple cells. The cell signal strengthand cell information are the signal features of this geographical location. The feature databasecontains information about the signal features of all geographical locations on a network. TheMR positioning technology determines the geographical information about the actualmeasurement points by matching the actual network coverage information and the featuredatabase.

This function exports Top N data of all received levels within each lattice and applies only tosingle-mode networks.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Predictions > Groupx > DL RSRP from the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click DL RSRP and choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box shown in Figure 3-34 is displayed.

Figure 3-34 Export By Top Signal Level

Step 4 Set the minimum value and the top N maximum receive levels to be exported.


Step 6 Set the save path, file name, and file type. Then, export the preset information.

NOTE

l To use this function successfully, you must select the DL RSRP counter when creating a predictiongroup, as shown in Figure 3-35.

l To export top N receive levels within the lattice, you must set TopNSignalLevel when creating aprediction group. This parameter indicates that the top N maximum receive levels will be calculated,as shown in Figure 3-36.



176

Figure 3-35 New_Prediction_Group



177

Figure 3-36 TopNSignalLevel

----End

3.8.12 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD PredictionThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for creating prediction groups and exportingprediction results by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Creating LTE-FDD Prediction GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the propertiesof a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the NewPrediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the GroupProperties dialog box.



178

Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog BoxParameter Description

Group Name Name of a prediction group. This parameteruniquely identifies a prediction group.The U-Net provides a default name for eachcreated prediction group in this parameter field.

Prediction Type Prediction type.

Study Selected Prediction counter.

Calculate Now Whether to calculate each prediction counterimmediately.

Parameter in the LTE Group Properties Dialog Box

Table 3-52 Parameters on the General tab Page


Name Name of a prediction group.

Resolution(m) Precision of the prediction.

Intra-Frequency Handover(dB) Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells.This parameter is valid only after HandoverArea and Overlapping Zones are set.

Inter-Frequency Handover(dB) Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells.This parameter is valid only after HandoverArea and Overlapping Zones are set.

Polygon Calculation area for the prediction.

Neighbour PDSCH Load Whether the load on the neighboring cell is takeninto account in the calculation.The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Neighbour PDCCH Load Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboring cellis taken into account in the calculation.The value ranges from 0 to 100.

With Shadow Whether the shadow fading is taken into accountin the calculation.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, theprobability that the receive signal strength isstronger than the specified threshold at the edgeof a cell.

Indoor Coverage Whether the penetration loss is taken into account.



179

Table 3-53 Parameters on the Condition tab Page


Signal Level(DL)(dBm) Receive threshold of the downlink referencesignal.

Signal Level(UL)(dBm) Receive threshold of the uplink reference signal.

Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm) Interference threshold.

Terminal Terminal type.

Service Service type.

Mobility Mobility type.

Table 3-54 Parameters on the Advanced tab Page


Frequency Name Name of a frequency band.

Channel Index Frequency corresponding to a frequency band.

TopNSignalLevel TopN maximum receive levels to be calculated.

Parameters for Exporting Prediction Results in Batches

This section describes the parameters for exporting prediction results in .csv, .mif, or .jpg formatin batches. You can refer to this section when exporting prediction results from the ExportResults dialog box.


Path Indicates the path to save the data to be exported. You canclick Browse to specify a save path.

Select Export Content Selects the contents to be exported.

Select Polygon Selects an area where counters are to be exported.

Prediction Group Indicates the name of a prediction group.

Study Indicates the object to be exported, that is, the predictioncounter items in each prediction group.

MIF Exports the prediction chart in .mif format.The exported file contains projection information.

JPG Exports the prediction chart in .jpg format.

Statistics Exports the prediction report in .csv format.



180


SelectStatisticsData

Name Indicates the name of an exported prediction counter.

Area(km2) Indicates the coverage area of an exported predictioncounter.

Percentage(%) Indicates the percentage of the coverage area of an exportedprediction counter.

Cumulate(%) Indicates the cumulative percentage of the coverage area ofan exported prediction counter.

Parameters for Viewing Detailed Prediction Result ReportsThis section describes the parameters for viewing detailed prediction result reports. You canrefer to this section when viewing the detailed prediction result reports in the Export Datawindow.

Parameters in the Export Data WindowParameter Description

Name Indicates the name of a KPI.The value segments of the KPI are listed under the KPI name.

Coverage Area(km2) Indicates the coverage area.

% of Calculate Area Indicates the percentage of the calculation area.Indicates the percentage of the calculation area within the valuesegment to the total coverage area of this KPI.

% of Cumulate CalculateArea

Indicates the cumulative percentage of the calculation area.For example, the cumulative percentage value in row 3 in a listsorted in ascending order is the sum of the value in row 3 andthe values in all the subsequent rows.

Click or to sort the list in ascending or descending order.

% of Coverage Area Indicates the percentage of the coverage area.For example, the value in row 3 is the percentage of thecoverage area of row 3 to the total coverage area.

% of Cumulate CoverageArea

Indicates the cumulative percentage of the coverage area.For example, the cumulative percentage value in row 3 in a listsorted in ascending order is the sum of the percentage of row 3and the percentages in all the subsequent rows.

DefaultName Indicates the default name.



181

Parameters for Adjusting the DT Feature DatabaseThis section describes the parameters for adjusting the DT feature database in the DT AdjustFeature Database dialog box.


Drive Test File DT data file.Selected from a drop-down list. The defaultvalue is All.

Clutter Resolution(m) Indicates the clutter resolution. The defaultvalue is 300.

Clutter Shift Threshold(%) Indicates the clutter shift threshold. Thedefault value is 50.

3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity SimulationCapacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is asfollows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map andallocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overallnetwork performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Netgenerates a statistical report.

3.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Capacity SimulationThis chapter describes the basic knowledge of capacity simulation, including the relationsbetween traffic parameters and the capacity simulation algorithm. You can develop a betterunderstanding of the capacity simulation function by learning the basic knowledge.

Process of Capacity SimulationThis section describes the process for performing capacity simulation through the U-Net.

Figure 3-37 shows the process of capacity simulation.



182

Figure 3-37 Process of capacity simulation

Table 3-55 describes the process of capacity simulation.

Table 3-55 Description of the capacity simulation process

Procedure Operation

1 3.6 Setting LTE-FDD Traffic Parameters

2 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps

3 3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation Group

4 Choose Calculate from the corresponding shortcut menu.

5 3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result

Basic Knowledge of Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the information about the average load status of the network by means ofsimulation based on specific UE distribution. Traffic parameters, which reflect the basicinformation about UE distribution, include the UE type, mobility type, terminal type, servicetype, environment type, MCS, and receiver. Traffic parameters can be used to generate specifictraffic map.

Figure 3-38 shows the relationship between traffic parameters.



183

Figure 3-38 Relationship between traffic parameters

Table 3-56 describes the meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters.

Table 3-56 Meanings of and relationship between traffic parameters

TrafficParameter

Meaning Relationship with OtherParameters

MIMO Describes the number of transmit and receiveantennas working in multiple input multipleoutput (MIMO) mode and the gains brought onthe capacity by spatial multiplexing.

Used to set properties of thereceiver.

MCS Bearing efficiency of the receiver. Used to set properties of thereceiver.

MobilityType

Describes the moving speed of a terminal. Used to set the receiver,environment type, andvector-based traffic map.

ServiceType

Describes information about the service model. Used to set the user servicetype and the traffic map thatis based on cell coverage.

Receiver Describes the demodulation capability of thereceiver.

l Depends on the mobility,MIMO, bit error rate(BER), transmissionmode, and channelinformation.

l Used to set the terminaltype.



184

TrafficParameter

Meaning Relationship with OtherParameters

TerminalType

Describes information about the terminal, suchas the maximum transmit power.

l Depends on theinformation about thereceiver.

l Used to set the UE type.

UE Type Describes information about the UE type(common UE or VIP UE).

l Depends on the terminaltype and the service type.

l Used to set theenvironment type andvector-based traffic map.

Environment Type

Describes the information about theenvironment.

l Depends on the mobilitytype and the UE type.

l Used to set theenvironment-based trafficmap.

Capacity Simulation AlgorithmThis section describes the capacity simulation algorithm. The U-Net uses the Monte Carloalgorithm for the capacity simulation of the LTE-FDD system. That is, the U-Net obtains theinformation about the network through a series of snapshots.

Overall Process of Capacity SimulationThe Monte Carlo algorithm is applicable to static simulation. By using the Monte Carloalgorithm, you can obtain statistics and evaluation results of a network through a great numberof random and instant samples. By processing the statistics obtained through multiple snapshots,you can learn about the overall performance of the network. Figure 3-39 shows the overallprocess of capacity simulation.



185

Figure 3-39 Overall process of capacity simulation

Table 3-57 describes the overall process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-39.

Table 3-57 Description of the overall process of capacity simulation

Procedure


1 Initializing cellinformation

Initialize cell information, which involves determining thecell calculation area, calculating the RS RE power, assigningRB data power, calculating noises, and determiningactivated cells.

2 Determiningwhether thenumber ofcurrentsnapshots is notgreater than thetotal number ofsnapshots

If the number of current snapshots is greater, the simulationresult can truly reflect the network performance but thesimulation takes a longer time.When the number of current snapshots is not greater than thetotal number of snapshots, the system starts to calculate thecurrent snapshots. Otherwise, the system collects thestatistics of the final simulation result.

3 Collecting thestatistics of asnapshot

A snapshot refers to a snapshot captured for a network. Youcan collect the statistics of a snapshot by referring to Processof the Simulation Within a Snapshot and save thestatistical result for the final simulation.



186

Procedure


4 Number ofcurrentsnapshots++

After the calculation within a snapshot is complete,calculation of the next snapshot starts.

5 Processingsimulationresults

After the simulation of all the snapshots is complete, the U-Net starts to process the simulation results and generates astatistical report.

Process of the Simulation Within a SnapshotTo work efficiently, the U-Net cannot dynamically simulate the instantaneous change of theradio network for a long time. Therefore, it can only statically simulate the network through aseries of snapshots. The network information at different time is different but relevant. The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtain the instantaneous network informationaccording to transmission time interval (TTI) within a snapshot. The unit of the TTI ismillisecond. When a snapshot is complete, the U-Net calculates the average value of all the TTIinstantaneous information within the snapshot and uses the average value as the statistical resultof the snapshot.

Figure 3-40 shows the simulation within a snapshot.



187

Figure 3-40 Process of the simulation within a snapshot

Table 3-58 describes the process of the simulation shown in Figure 3-40.

Table 3-58 Description of the simulation within a snapshot

Procedure


1 Generating UEs UEs are generated one time for each snapshot and distributea certain number of UEs to the specified areas.NOTE

The UE number and areas are determined by the traffic map.

2 Querying pathloss

Query the existing path loss matrix based on the UEgeographical location and obtain the path loss valuesbetween the UE and each cell.

3 Calculatingrelevantcounters

The U-Net determines the primary serving cell based on thehighest DL RSRP of each UE. The U-Net also initializes theSINR and noise information about the PDSCH and PUSCH.



188

Procedure


4 Determiningwhether thenumber ofcurrent TTIs isnot greater thanthe total numberof TTIs

A larger number of TTIs indicates a more stable network andmore accurate simulation result. The simulation, however,may take a longer time.If the number of TTIs exceeds the threshold, no operationwill be performed for the exceeded TTIs.When the number of current TTIs is not greater than the totalnumber of TTIs, the U-Net starts the calculation of thecurrent TTIs. Otherwise, the system collects the statistics ofthe final snapshot result.

5 Collecting thestatistics of aTTI

You can calculate the instantaneous statistical results of aTTI by referring to Process of the Simulation Within aTTI and save the statistical result for the final processing ofthe snapshot.

6 Number ofcurrent TTIs++

After the calculation within a TTI is complete, calculationof the next TTI starts.

7 Processingstatistical resultswithin asnapshot

After the calculation of all the TTIs is complete, the U-Netstarts to calculate the average value of all the TTIs within thesnapshot.

Process of the Simulation Within a TTIYou can collect the statistics of the instantaneous simulation result of each TTI by using theresource allocation algorithm. The U-Net performs admission control, scheduling, interferencecoordination, and power control for UEs within each TTI.

Figure 3-41 shows the simulation within a TTI.



189

Figure 3-41 Process of the simulation within a TTI (LTE-FDD)



190

Figure 3-42 Process of the simulation within a TTI (LTE-TDD)

Table 3-59 describes the process of the simulation within a TTI.



191

Table 3-59 Description of the simulation within a TTI


Admission loadcontrol on theuplink anddownlink

On an actual network, UEs may initiate service requests at any time.When resources are insufficient and the service satisfaction rate is low,UEs cannot connect to the network. When resources are sufficient andthe service satisfaction rate is high, UEs can connect to the networkafter the resources are successfully allocated.In admission control, the system determines whether a UE enters thescheduling queue or suspending queue based on the RB resource usageof the system, the packet loss rate of voice services, and the servicesatisfaction rate.

Uplink anddownlinkscheduling

In scheduling, the U-Net allocates time and frequencies resources foreach UE based on the SINR of the UE channel, requirement on theservice rate, and terminal power.

Uplink anddownlink inter-cellinterferencecoordination(ICIC).

The LTE system uses the 1 x 3 x 1 frequency reuse mode. All the cellscan use all the bandwidths supported by the system. Therefore, inter-cell interference is unavoidable, especially for UEs at the border of acell.In ICIC, the edge band of a cell is separated from that of the adjacentcell by means of frequency domain coordination. This reducesinterference between adjacent cells and improves performance of UEsat the border of a cell.

Power control onthe uplink anddownlink

l In power control on the uplink, the transmit power of UEs is adjustedto control the network interference at a certain level, ensuring thethroughput of UEs at the border of a cell.

l Downlink power control is to adjust the transmit power the eNodeBsends frequency resources to the UEs.

Uplink anddownlinkmeasurement

The U-Net obtains the predicted channel status value based on thescheduling, ICIC, and power control results. Then, the U-Net calculatesthe SINR and uses it as the input value for the next TTI.

Processing ofstatistical resultswithin a TTI

The U-Net starts to process the statistical result of the current TTIs onlywhen the number of current TTIs exceeds the threshold on the numberof TTIs.NOTE

When the network is started, it is not stable. At this time, the instantaneous resultobtained by the U-Net cannot be used to evaluate the network performance. Theperiod from the time when the network is started to the time when the networkworks stably is called the warm-up period of the network, which can beautomatically identified by the simulation function. To obtain accurate and stablestatistical data, collect statistics after the warm-up period ends.

Threshold on the number of TTIs = Warm-up period/Duration of the TTI =Warm-up period.

Capacity Simulation Feature DescriptionIf each antenna under a transceiver has a unique RRU ID, the cell for the transceiver is a singlefrequency network (SFN) cell.



192

The SFN is supported only when the antenna configuration is 2T2R or 4T4R.

NOTE

In LTE-TDD mode, the MU_BF feature is not selected.

l When the antenna configuration is 2T2R, VMIMO is not supported.l When the antenna configuration is 4T4R, VMIMO is supported.

– If the serving cell for a user is an SFN cell, the target RRUs of the paring users must bethe same. If the target RRU of any user is changed, the user exits the paring.

3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic MapsAfter setting traffic parameters, you need to create a traffic map for the capacity simulationcalculation. During the calculation of capacity simulation, the U-Net generates users based onthe traffic map, and the number of users is determined by the traffic parameters.

Creating a Traffic Map Based on EnvironmentYou can set the traffic of each area based on the type of the geographic environment, such as anurban area, a suburb area, or a densely populated area.

Prerequisitesl Traffic parameters are configured.l Polygons are created.

ProcedureStep 1 In the Explorer window, click the Data tab.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map > Traffic Map(User).

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed. See Figure3-43.

Figure 3-43 Select Map Type

Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Environment.

Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the environment-based traffic map, such as the environment types ofeach area.



193

For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based onEnvironments.

Step 7 Click OK.

The created traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureWhen setting a capacity simulation group, you can select the created traffic map for the capacitysimulation calculation.

Creating a Traffic Map Based on VectorsYou can set the traffic of special geographic conditions such as railways, highways, and denselypopulated areas.

Prerequisitesl Traffic parameters are configured.l Vector objects are created.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Map.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Select Map Type dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Vector.

Step 5 Click Create Map. The Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the vector-based traffic map, such as the number of subscribers foreach service, traffic characteristics, and weight of each clutter.

For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based onVectors.

Step 7 Click OK.


----End


Creating a Traffic Map Based on Cell CoverageYou can set the service usage and traffic volume or throughput of each cell based on the actualcoverage of the cells. Before creating a traffic map, you must obtain the coverage predictionresults of each cell.



194

Prerequisitesl Traffic parameters are configured.l The calculation of the Best Server counter is complete.

Context

CAUTIONUsers that are generated on the basis of the cell coverage are distributed in the areas specifiedby the calculated Best Server of each cell. Therefore, before creating a traffic map based on thecell coverage, create the prediction group and complete the calculation of the Best Servercounter.

Procedure




Step 4 Choose Create The Map Based on Transceiver Coverage.

Step 5 Click Create Map. The New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 6 Set relevant parameters of the cell coverage-based traffic map. For detailed description ofparameters, see Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell Coverage.

Step 7 Click OK.


----End


Creating a Traffic Map Based on User LocationYou can set the traffic based on user location.

PrerequisitesTraffic parameters are configured.

Procedure




195



Step 4 Select Create The Map Based on User Location.

Step 5 Click Create Map to open the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box.

Step 6 Set the traffic map parameters based on user location. For parameter description, see Parametersfor Creating Traffic Maps Based on User Locations.

Step 7 Click OK.

After the setting is complete, the traffic map is displayed under the Traffic Map node.

----End

3.9.3 Creating a Traffic Simulation GroupThis section describes how to create a traffic simulation group. The U-Net calculates capacitysimulation based on traffic simulation groups. Therefore, ensure that simulation groups arecreated and related parameters for the simulation calculation are set before performing thecapacity simulation.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data has been imported.l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.l A calculation area has been created.l Traffic parameters have been set.l A traffic map has been configured.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.

Step 3 Choose New from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Group Properties dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 4 Set properties for the simulation group. For details, see Parameters for Creating TrafficSimulation Groups.

Step 5 Determine whether to calculate the capacity simulation immediately.



196


Calculate thecapacitysimulationimmediatelyafter thesimulationgroup is created

1. Select Calculate Now on the General tab page.2. Click OK.

Calculate thecapacitysimulationmanually afterthe simulationgroup is created

Click OK.

After the simulation group is created, right-click it and choose Calculatefrom the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 Calculate

NOTE

l The simulation group is automatically locked after the calculation is complete, as shown in Figure3-45.

l If you right-click the simulation group and choose Stop from the shortcut menu during the calculation,the simulation group will not be automatically locked.

l The simulation group is automatically unlocked after its properties are modified.

l You can right-click a certain simulation group and choose Group Locked from the shortcut menu tomanually lock the simulation group. In this case, you need to manually unlock the simulation groupbefore performing capacity simulation again.



197

Figure 3-45 Group Locked

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the simulation group is created, you can set display properties of this group.

1. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.


3. Set the display color for each traffic status and determine whether to display the trafficstatus in the legend window.

3.9.4 Viewing the Capacity Simulation ResultYou can view the calculation result of capacity simulation in the map window or view thestatistics on various indicators by using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of an Entire Network

You can view the capacity simulation results of each radio access system of the entire networkafter completing the capacity simulation calculation.

Prerequisites

The capacity simulation calculation is complete.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group.

Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. The Group Results dialog box is displayed,as shown in Figure 3-46.



198

Figure 3-46 Group Results

Step 4 View the capacity simulation statistics results for each radio access system in the displayeddialog box. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Capacity SimulationResults of the Entire Network.

----End

Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode NetworkThis section describes how to view the capacity simulation result of an entire network, includingthe statistics in the entire network, sites, cells, and hot spots.

PrerequisitesThe capacity simulation calculation is complete.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.

Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical resultof the entire network is displayed.. See Figure 3-47.



199

Figure 3-47 Group Result

Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view statistics on the service requirements and the actual services inthe entire network.

For details, see Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page.

NOTE

l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulationresult of the specified hot spot.

l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again beforeviewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.

Step 5 On the Sites(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in the entire network.

For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page.

Step 6 On the Cells(Average) tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in the entire network.

For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page.

Step 7 Click Close.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites

(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively to filter the statistical results.



200

l To export the simulation statistics on the sites and cells to a .txt, .xls, or .csv file, chooseAction > Export on the Sites(Average) and Cells(Average) tab pages respectively.

l To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tabpage. Then, you can perform the coverage prediction based on the capacity simulationresult.For detailed operations, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on CapacitySimulation Results.

Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single Snapshot

You can view the capacity simulation result in a single snapshot, including the statistics on thesnapshot and corresponding sites, cells, users, and hot spots.

Prerequisites


Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a snapshot.

Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical result of asingle snapshot is displayed.

Step 4 On the Statistics tab page, view the statistics on the service requirements and actual services ina single snapshot.

For details, see Parameters on the Statistics tab page.

NOTE

l You can select a hot spot from the Statistics Zone drop-down list box to view the capacity simulationresult of the specified hot spot.

l If a new hot spot is added on the map, you need to collect statistics on the simulation group again beforeviewing the capacity simulation result of the new hot spot.

Step 5 On the Sites tab page, view the simulation statistics on the sites in a single snapshot.

For details, see Parameters on the Sites tab page.

Step 6 On the Cells tab page, view the simulation statistics on the cells in a single snapshot.

For details, see Parameters on the Cells tab page.

Step 7 On the Mobiles tab page, view the simulation statistics on subscribers in a single snapshot.

For details, see Parameters on the Mobiles tab page.

NOTE

l You can also double-click a user icon on the map window to open the User Properties dialog box and viewthe simulation statistics of a single subscriber. For details about the parameters, see Parameters for ViewingCapacity Simulation Results of a Single User.

l Red indicates subscribers who are not satisfied with the network (offline, not connected, or no uplinkcoverage). Green indicates subscribers who are satisfied with the network.



201

Step 8 Click Close.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel To easily view the target result, choose Action > Display Columns on the Sites, Cells, and

Mobiles tab pages to filter the statistical results.l To export the simulation statistics on the sites, cells, or subscribers to a .txt, .xls, or .csv

file, choose Action > Export on the Sites, Cells, and Mobiles tab pages.l To apply the simulation result to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells tab page. Then,

you can perform the prediction based on the capacity simulation result.For details, see Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity SimulationResults.

Querying Capacity Simulation Statistical Results on a MapAfter the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can query the capacity simulationresults in different legend colors on the map.

Prerequisitesl The capacity simulation calculation is complete.

Contextl U-Net classifies simulation users by user status, user type, and mobility type.l U-Net can display different types of simulation users in different shapes and colors on map.

Procedure

Step 1 Set legends and display properties of capacity simulation.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. The Simulation Symbol dialog box is

displayed.4. Select the dimension for classifying the simulation users from the Field Type drop-down

list box, as shown in Figure 3-48.



202

Figure 3-48 Simulation Symbol

5. Set the legend information for different types of simulation users, such as the shape andcolor.

l Table 3-60 classifies the simulation users by user status.

Table 3-60 Simulation users in different states

State Description

Satisfied Users that are satisfied with the network quality, that is, usersthat are not in any of the following states: ULNoCover,DLNoCover, NoAccess, and Offline.

ULNoCover Indicates the user that is not covered in the uplink direction.

DLNoCover Indicates the user that is not covered in the downlink direction.

NoAccess Indicates the user that is not accessed.

OffLine Offline users.

l Table 3-61 classifies the simulation users by service type.

Table 3-61 Simulation users of different service types

Service Description

LTEVideoConferencing

Indicates the users corresponding to the video conferencingservice.



203

Service Description

LTEVoIP Indicates the users corresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEWeb Browsing Indicates the users corresponding to the Web browsingservice.

LTEFTP Indicates the users corresponding to the FTP service.

l Classify simulation users based on user attributes.

l Classify simulation users based on user mobility rates.

l Classify simulation users based on terminal types.

NOTE

When simulation users are classified based on user attributes, mobility rates, service types, or terminaltypes, you can customize service types.

6. Select Add to Legend.

If the option is selected, the legend information is displayed in the Legend window.

7. Click OK.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, select the checkbox before Simulations > A simulation group > NetworkSystem > A snapshot > User type.

The map window displays the distribution of users in different states according to the presetlegend shapes and colors in a map.

NOTE

When you move the cursor pointer to a point representing a simulation user, a pop-up message is displayed,where you can query the detailed information about the simulation user.

Step 3 Query the legend information.

Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can select an area by drawing a polygon and print the capacity simulation result of this area.

Querying Coverage Prediction Results in a PDF or CDF Chart

After the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can query the CDF or PDF charts ofsimulation counters by each simulation group. By checking the charts, you can know and analyzethe capacity simulation results.

Prerequisites




204

Procedure



Step 3 Choose Graphics Result from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select a counter in the Item area and a display mode in the FigureStyle area.

The CDF or PDF chart corresponding to the selected counter is displayed in the right pane.

NOTE

You can query the PDF or CDF chart of the following 21 counters: IoT(UL), IoT(DL), Load(UL), Load(DL),Cell MAC Throughput(UL), Cell MAC Throughput(DL), Application Throughput(UL), ApplicationThroughput(DL), RS SINR(DL), Geometry, User MAC Throughput(UL), User MAC Throughput(DL), UserApplication Throughput(UL), User Application Throughput(DL), User Service Time(UL), User Service Time(DL), User Actual Power, Cell Actual Power, PUSCH SINR, PDSCH SINR, and Throughput.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel To save a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Save Image

As from the shortcut menu.l To print a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Print from

the shortcut menu.l To copy a PDF or CDF chart in the right pane, right-click the chart and choose Copy from

the shortcut menu.l To export the statistical results of a PDF or CDF chart as a .txt file, click Export Data.

Analyzing Capacity Simulation Results by Using the Point Analysis Function

The point analysis function is mainly used to analyze the signal status at a point. After selectinga terminal or service, you can learn about the signal quality, signal strength, and uplink ordownlink status of a certain point based on the capacity simulation results.

Prerequisites


Procedure


Step 2 On the Profile tab page, select a cell in the Transceiver field and a carrier in the Cell field.

Step 3 Click a point on the map.


the selected cell is displayed on the map. You can drag the mouse to move the cursor.



205

Step 4 On the Signal Analysis tab page, check the list of cells that can receive signals, strength ofreceived signals, and uplink or downlink status of the selected position based on the capacitysimulation results.l In Simulation Group, select a capacity simulation group to simulate the uplink load and

downlink power of the network.l In Terminal, select a terminal type.l In Service, select a service type.l In Mobility, select a mobility type.

The prediction results of the signal strength of different cells are displayed in descending orderfrom top to bottom in a bar chart on the Reference Signal Reception tab page. The cell that hasthe highest signal strength is the best serving cell at the selected point on the map.

The uplink and downlink status of the selected point is displayed on the right of the tab page.

l The icon indicates that the current channel meets the demodulation requirements.

l The icon indicates that the current channel does not meet the demodulation requirements.

Double-click the two icons, you can query the detailed link information. For detailed descriptionof parameters, see Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail Window.

----End

Performing Coverage Prediction Based on Capacity Simulation ResultsIf capacity simulation is not conducted, the U-Net performs prediction based on the presetparameters of the cells. If capacity simulation is conducted, you can apply the capacity simulationresults to NEs and the U-Net performs prediction based on the capacity simulation results In thiscase, the prediction considers the actual transmit power, load, and interference of the NEs.Therefore, the prediction results are more accurate.

PrerequisitesThe capacity simulation calculation is complete.

Procedure



Step 3 Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu. A dialog box for the average statistical resultof the entire network is displayed.

Step 4 To apply the simulation results to NEs, click Commit Result on the Cells(Average) tab page.

Step 5 Perform the prediction by referring to LTE-FDD Prediction.

----End

3.9.5 Exporting Capacity Simulation Results in BatchesAfter the capacity simulation calculation is complete, you can export the capacity simulationresults of the entire network, a snapshot, or all simulation groups.



206

Procedurel Export capacity simulation results of all simulation groups

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations.3. Choose Export Result from the shortcut menu.4. In the Path area of the displayed dialog box, click Browse, and select a path.5. Select Simulation in Select Export Content to export the capacity simulation results.6. Select the export objects in Simulation.7. Click Export.

l Export capacity simulation results of the entire network1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT.3. Choose Average Result from the shortcut menu.4. Select Cells(Average) tab page.5. Click Action.6. Select Export.7. After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.

l Export capacity simulation results of a snapshot1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Simulations > a simulation group > RAT > a

snapshot.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Select Cells tab page.5. Click Action.6. Select Export.7. After selecting export fields, export the statistics result.

----End

3.9.6 Interface Reference for LTE-FDD Capacity SimulationThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for LTE-FDD capacity simulation by usingthe U-Net.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on EnvironmentsThis section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on environments ormodifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating trafficmaps in the New Environment Traffic Map Properties dialog box.


Traffic Map Name Indicates the name of a traffic map createdaccording to the environment.



207


Polygon regions Indicates all created polygons.

Add Adds a selected polygon to the environmentlist.

Polygon regions in the list Indicates an added polygon.

Environments in the list Indicates the environment typecorresponding a polygon.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on VectorsThis section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on vectors or modifyingthe properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating traffic maps inthe Vector Traffic Map Properties dialog box.



Name Name of a traffic map created based onvectors.

Table 3-63 Parameters on the Vector tab page


Add Adds a vector object.You can click Add and select a vector objectto be added in the displayed Select Vectordialog box.

Delete Deletes a vector object.

Name Name of an added vector object.

Density User density on a vector object.

Table 3-64 Parameters on the Traffic tab page


User Profile User type.




208


Density User density.NOTE

The value of this parameter determines the userdensity on the Vector tab page.

ID Number of a clutter type.

Clutter Class Name of a clutter type.

Weight Weight of a clutter type.This parameter is displayed when clutterlayer data is provided.

% Indoor Percentage of indoor users for a clutter type.Number of indoor users for a clutter type =Percentage of indoor users x Total number ofusers for the clutter type.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on Cell CoverageThis section describes the parameters for creating traffic maps based on cell coverage ormodifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating trafficmaps in the New Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Properties dialog box.

Table 3-65 Parameters on the General tab page and Transceiver tab page


Transceiver Coverage Traffic Map Name Indicates the name of a traffic map createdaccording to cell coverage.

Prediction Group Selects a prediction group.

Generate user number based on Poisson Indicates whether to generate a user mapbased on Poisson distribution.

Users Per Service Sets the number of users corresponding toeach service type for each cell.

Tx_ID Indicates the name of a cell.

LTEFTP(UL) Indicates the number of uplink userscorresponding to the FTP service.

LTEFTP(DL) Indicates the number of downlink userscorresponding to the FTP service.

LTEVideo Conferencing(UL) Indicates the number of uplink userscorresponding to the video conferencingservice.



209


LTEVideo Conferencing(DL) Indicates the number of downlink userscorresponding to the video conferencingservice.

LTEVoIP(UL) Indicates the number of uplink userscorresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEVoIP(DL) Indicates the number of downlink userscorresponding to the VoIP service.

LTEWeb Browsing(UL) Indicates the number of uplink userscorresponding to the Web browsing service.

LTEWeb Browsing(DL) Indicates the number of downlink userscorresponding to the Web browsing service.

Table 3-66 Parameters on the Traffic tab page


Terminals area-Terminal Indicates a terminal type.

Terminals area-% Indicates the percentage of userscorresponding to each terminal type.Number of users corresponding to a terminaltype = Percentage of the users correspondingto the terminal type x Total number of users

Mobility area-Mobility Indicates a mobility type.

Mobility area-% Indicates the percentage of userscorresponding to each mobility type.Number of users corresponding to a mobilitytype = Percentage of the users correspondingto the mobility type x Total number of users

Clutters area-ID Indicates the number of a clutter class.

Clutters area-Clutter Class Indicates the name of a clutter class.

Clutters area-% Indoor Indicates the percentage of indoor userscorresponding to a clutter class.Number of indoor users corresponding to aclutter class = Percentage of indoor users xTotal number of users corresponding to theclutter class

Parameters for Creating Traffic Maps Based on User LocationsThis section describes the parameters for creating a traffic map based on user locations ormodifying the properties of such traffic maps. You can refer to this section when creating a



210

traffic map in the New User Location Traffic Map Properties dialog box or modifyingparameters for an existing traffic map based on user locations.


General tabpage

User Location Traffic MapName

Indicates the name of a traffic map based on userlocations.

UserLocation tabpage

Use as X and Y Indicates that the geodetic coordinates are used.

Use as Longitude and Latitude Indicates that the longitudinal and latitudinalcoordinates are used.

Import You can import files if user data files areavailable.To import a user data file successfully, ensure thatthe column headings of the user data file matchthe fields such as UserID and coordinates on theU-Net.

UserID Indicates the ID of a user.

X Indicates the X coordinate.

Y Indicates the Y coordinate.

Longitude Indicates the longitude.

Latitude Indicates the latitude.

Priority Indicates a priority.The value is an integer. The larger the value, thehigher the priority.

Service Indicates a service type.l The service type must be defined in the traffic

parameters.l For details about service types in an LTE-FDD

network, see 3.6.2 Setting LTE-FDD ServiceTypes.

l For details about service types in an LTE-TDDnetwork, see 4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD ServiceTypes.

Terminal Indicates a terminal type.l The terminal type must be defined in the traffic

parameters.l For details about terminal types in an LTE-

FDD network, see 3.6.4 Setting LTE-FDDTerminal Types.

l For details about terminal types in an LTE-TDD network, see 4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal Type.



211


Mobility Indicates a mobility type.l The mobility type must be defined in the traffic

parameters.l For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility

Types.

LinkType Indicates the uplink or downlink type.

IsIndoor Indicate whether the user is indoor user.The value can be True or False.

Parameters for Creating Traffic Simulation GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating a traffic simulation group. You can refer tothis section when creating a traffic simulation group in the Simulation Group Properties dialogbox or in the corresponding attribute dialog box.



Name Name of a traffic simulation group.

Site Corr Shadow fading factor on the base station side.

UL FSS Environment Gain table used for modifying the ULfrequency selection gain.

Number of Simulations Number of simulations.A larger number of simulations indicates amore precise simulation result, but a longertime is required for calculation.

Calculate Now Whether to perform simulation calculationimmediately.

Table 3-68 Parameters on the Source Traffic tab page


Select Traffic Maps to be Used Traffic map.

Select Polygon Calculation area.



212

Table 3-69 Parameters on the Advance tab page


Number of TTI Number of transmission time intervals(TTIs).The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamicsimulation to obtain instantaneous networkinformation by TTI. A larger number of TTIsindicates a more precise simulation result, buta longer time is required for calculation.

UL IoT Convergence Threshold Uplink IoT convergence threshold used forchecking whether a network is converged.

DL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%) Downlink throughput convergence thresholdused for checking whether a network isconverged.

UL Throughput Convergence Threshold(%) Uplink throughput convergence thresholdused for checking whether a network isconverged.

DL Load Convergence Threshold(%) Downlink load convergence threshold usedfor checking whether a network is converged.

UL Load Convergence Threshold(%) Uplink load convergence threshold used forchecking whether a network is converged.

Edge User Ratio (%) Ratio of cell edge users used for calculatingthe number of cell edge users.

Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of the Entire NetworkThis section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of the entirenetwork.

Parameters on the LTE Tab PageParameter Description

NetVersion Indicates the network technology.

FailedSingleModeUserCount Indicates the number of single-mode userswho fail to access the network.

SuccessSingleModeUserCount Indicates the number of single-mode userswho successfully access the network.

SingleModeUserCount Indicates the number of single-mode users.

SuccessMultiModeUserCount Indicates the number of multi-mode userswho successfully access the network.



213


Load(UL) Indicates the uplink load.

Load(DL) Indicates the downlink load.

Throughput(UL)(Kbps) Indicates the uplink throughput of the entirenetwork.

Throughput(DL)(Kbps) Indicates the downlink throughput of theentire network.

Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single-Mode Network

This section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of the entirenetwork.

Parameters on the Statistics Tab Page

CAUTIONl The Request pane lists the total number of users attempted to access and the relevant

throughput, and the number of users attempted to access for each service and the relevantthroughput.

l The Result pane lists the total number of actually accessed users and the actual throughput,and the number of actually accessed users for each service and the relevant throughput.

l If the throughput is less than 1 MB, the unit is kbit/s. If the throughput is greater than or equalto 1 MB, the unit is Mbit/s.


Requestarea

Number of TTI Number of transmissiontime intervals (TTIs).The U-Net adopts thesemi-dynamic simulationto obtain instantaneousnetwork information byTTI. A larger number ofTTIs indicates a moreprecise simulation result,but a longer time isrequired for calculation.

Total Users Trying toConnect

Average Users Indicates the average totalnumber of usersattempting to gain accessto the network.



214


Standard Deviation Indicates the standarddeviation.

Average ThroughputDemand(DL)

Indicates the averagerequired downlinkthroughput on the entirenetwork.

Average ThroughputDemand(UL)

Indicates the averagerequired uplinkthroughput on the entirenetwork.

LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/LTEWeb Browsing/LTEVideo ConferencingNOTE

The system collects thenumber of users attemptedto access and relevantthroughput for servicessuch as LTEFTP,LTEVOiP, and LTEWebBrowsing. This sectiongenerally describes thesesparameters because theyare the same for all services.

Users Indicates the number ofusers attempting to gainaccess to each service.

Uplink Indicates the number ofuplink users attempting togain access to eachservice.

Downlink Indicates the number ofdownlink usersattempting to gain accessto each service.

Max Throughput Demand(UL)

Indicates the maximumuplink throughput of eachservice required for userson the entire network.

Min Throughput Demand(UL)

Indicates the minimumuplink throughput of eachservice required for userson the entire network.


Indicates the averageuplink throughput of eachservice required for userson the entire network.

Max Throughput Demand(DL)

Indicates the maximumdownlink throughput ofeach service required forusers on the entirenetwork.

Min Throughput Demand(DL)

Indicates the minimumdownlink throughput ofeach service required forusers on the entirenetwork.



215



Indicates the averagedownlink throughput ofeach service required forusers on the entirenetwork.

Results area

Total Connected Users Average Users Indicates the average totalnumber and percentage ofusers that actually gainaccess to the entirenetwork.

Actual MAC Throughput(UL)

Indicates the actualaverage throughput at theMAC layer for uplinkusers on the entirenetwork.

Actual MAC ThroughputStandard Deviation(UL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualaverage throughput at theMAC layer for uplinkusers on the entirenetwork.

Actual ApplicationThroughput(UL)

Indicates the actualaverage throughput at theapplication layer foruplink users on the entirenetwork.

Actual ApplicationThroughput StandardDeviation(UL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualaverage throughput at theapplication layer foruplink users on the entirenetwork.

Actual MAC Throughput(DL)

Indicates the actualaverage throughput at theMAC layer for downlinkusers on the entirenetwork.

Actual MAC ThroughputStandard Deviation(DL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualaverage throughput at theMAC layer for downlinkusers on the entirenetwork.



216


Actual ApplicationThroughput(DL)

Indicates the actualaverage throughput at theapplication layer fordownlink users on theentire network.

Actual ApplicationThroughput StandardDeviation(DL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualaverage throughput at theapplication layer fordownlink users on theentire network.

Breakdown per service:LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/LTEWeb Browsing//LTEVideo ConferencingNOTE

The system collects thenumber of accessed usersand relevant throughput forservices such as LTEFTP,LTEVOiP, and LTEWebBrowsing. This sectiongenerally describes thesesparameters because theyare the same for all services.

Service User Indicates the number andpercentage of users thatsuccessfully gain access toeach service.

Downlink Indicates the number ofdownlink users that gainaccess to each service.

Downlink StandardDeviation

Indicates the standarddeviation of the downlinkusers that gain access toeach service.

Uplink Indicates the number ofuplink users that gainaccess to each service.

Uplink StandardDeviation

Indicates the standarddeviation of the uplinkusers that gain access toeach service.

Offline User Indicates the number andpercentage of offline userscorresponding to eachservice.

Failed User Indicates the number andpercentage of failed userscorresponding to eachservice.


Indicates the actualthroughput at the MAClayer for uplink users ofeach service on the entirenetwork.



217


Actual MAC ThroughputStandard Deviation(UL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualthroughput at the MAClayer for uplink users ofeach service on the entirenetwork.


Indicates the actualthroughput at theapplication layer foruplink users of eachservice on the entirenetwork.

Actual ApplicationThroughput StandardDeviation(UL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualthroughput at theapplication layer foruplink users of eachservice on the entirenetwork.


Indicates the actualthroughput at the MAClayer for downlink usersof each service on theentire network.

Actual MAC ThroughputStandard Deviation(DL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualthroughput at the MAClayer for downlink usersof each service on theentire network.


Indicates the actualthroughput at theapplication layer fordownlink users of eachservice on the entirenetwork.

Actual ApplicationThroughput StandardDeviation(DL)

Indicates the standarddeviation of the actualthroughput at theapplication layer fordownlink users of eachservice on the entirenetwork.



218


Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(UL) For the entire network,this parameter is thestatistical throughput atthe MAC layer for uplinkedge users. The value ofthis parameter for theentire network is theaverage statisticalthroughput at the MAClayer for uplink edge usersin multiple snapshots.

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(DL) For the entire network,this parameter is thestatistical throughput atthe MAC layer fordownlink edge users. Thevalue of this parameter forthe entire network is theaverage statisticalthroughput at the MAClayer for downlink edgeusers in multiplesnapshots.

Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab PageParameter Description

Site Indicates a site name.

Total MAC Throughput(UL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink ofa site.

Total ApplicationThroughput(UL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on theuplink of a site.

Total MAC Throughput(DL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the MAC layer on the downlinkof a site.

Total ApplicationThroughput(DL)(kbps)

Indicates the total throughput at the application layer on thedownlink of a site.

LTEFTP(UL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of theFTP service at a site.

LTEFTP(ULApplication)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink ofthe FTP service at a site.

LTEFTP(DL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of theFTP service at a site.



219


LTEFTP(DLApplication)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlinkof the FTP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(UL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of theVoIP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(ULApplication)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink ofthe VoIP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(DL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of theVoIP service at a site.

LTEVoIP(DLApplication)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlinkof the VoIP service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(ULMAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of theWeb Browsing service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(ULApplication)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink ofthe Web Browsing service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(DLMAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of theWeb Browsing service at a site.

LTEWebBrowsing(DLApplication)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlinkof the Web Browsing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing(UL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the uplink of theVideo Conferencing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing(UL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the uplink ofthe Video Conferencing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing(DL MAC)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the MAC layer on the downlink of theVideo Conferencing service at a site.

LTEVideoConferencing(DL Application)(kbps)

Indicates the throughput at the application layer on the downlinkof the Video Conferencing service at a site.

Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab PageParameter Description

Site Indicates a site name.

Transceiver Indicates a transceiver name.

Cell Indicates a cell name.

Tx Power(dBm) Indicates the TX power for a cell. The unit is dBm.

IoT(UL)(dB) Indicates the ratio of the sum of interference noise to the noise onthe uplink of a cell. The unit is dB.



220


Load(UL) Indicates the cell uplink load.Uplink load = Overhead of traffic channels/(System bandwidth -Overhead of the control channel)

Average Used RB(UL) Indicates the number of uplink RBs in use for a cell.Number of RBs used in the uplink direction = Overhead of trafficchannels + Overhead of the control channel

Load(DL) Indicates the cell downlink load.Downlink load = Overhead of traffic channels/System bandwidth

Average Used RB(DL) Indicates the number of downlink RBs in use for a cell.Number of downlink RBs in use = Total number of RBs withinthe bandwidth x Downlink load

MAC Throughput(UL)(kbps)

Indicates the uplink average throughput at the MAC layer for acell.

Application Throughput(UL)(kbps)

Indicates the uplink average throughput at the application layerfor a cell.

MAC Throughput(DL)(kbps)

Indicates the downlink average throughput at the MAC layer fora cell.

Application Throughput(DL)(kbps)

Indicates the downlink average throughput at the applicationlayer for a cell.

Service User Indicates the number of users that can gain access to cell services.

Offline User Indicates the number of users involved in call drops in a cell.

Parameters for Viewing the Capacity Simulation Result in a Single SnapshotThis section describes the parameters for viewing the capacity simulation result in a singlesnapshot. You can refer to this section when viewing the capacity simulation result in the XXXProperties dialog box.

Parameters on the Statistics tab pageParameter Description

Request area

Total Users Tryingto Connect

Users Total number of subscribersattempting to gain access in asingle snapshot.

Downlink Number of downlink subscribersattempting to gain access toservices in a single snapshot.



221


Uplink Number of uplink subscribersattempting to gain access toservices in a single snapshot.

Max ThroughputDemand(DL)

Maximum throughput requiredby downlink subscribers in asingle snapshot.


Minimum throughput requiredby downlink subscribers in asingle snapshot.


Average throughput required bydownlink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.

Max ThroughputDemand(UL)

Maximum throughput requiredby uplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.


Minimum throughput requiredby uplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.


Average throughput required byuplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.

Breakdown perserviceLTEFTP/LTEVoIP/LTEWebBrowsing/LTEVideoConferencing

Users Number of subscribersattempting to gain access to eachservice in a single snapshot.

Downlink Number of downlink subscribersattempting to gain access to eachservice in a single snapshot.

Uplink Number of uplink subscribersattempting to gain access to eachservice in a single snapshot.

Max ThroughputDemand(DL)

Maximum throughput of eachservice required by downlinksubscribers in a single snapshot.


Minimum throughput of eachservice required by downlinksubscribers in a single snapshot.


Average throughput of eachservice required by downlinksubscribers in a single snapshot.



222


NOTEThe system collectsthe number ofsubscribersattempting to gainaccess and relevantthroughput forservices such asLTEFTP,LTEVoIP,LTEWebBrowsing, andLTEVideoConferencingrespectively. Thissection generallydescribes thesesparameters becausethey are the samefor all services.

Max ThroughputDemand(UL)

Maximum throughput of eachservice required by uplinksubscribers in a single snapshot.


Minimum throughput of eachservice required by uplinksubscribers in a single snapshot.


Average throughput of eachservice required by uplinksubscribers in a single snapshot.

Resultarea

Number of TTI Number of TTIs when thecalculation within a snapshot iscomplete.The U-Net adopts the semi-dynamic simulation to obtaininstantaneous networkinformation by TTI. A largernumber of TTIs indicates a moreprecise simulation result, but alonger time is required forcalculation.

Stat Start Time TTI at which statistics starts.

IsConvergence Whether a snapshot isconverged.

Total ConnectedUsers

Users Average total number andpercentage of subscribers thatactually gain access to services ina single snapshot.


Actual average throughput on theMAC layer for downlinksubscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual average throughput on theapplication layer for downlinksubscribers in a single snapshot.


Actual average throughput on theMAC layer for uplinksubscribers in a single snapshot.



223



Actual average throughput on theapplication layer for uplinksubscribers in a single snapshot.

Breakdown perservice:LTEFTP/LTEVoIP/LTEWebBrowsing/LTEVideoConferencingNOTE

The system collectsthe number ofaccessedsubscribers andrelevant throughputfor services such asLTEFTP,LTEVoIP,LTEWebBrowsing, andLTEVideoConferencingrespectively. Thissection generallydescribes thesesparameters becausethey are the samefor all services.

Users Number and percentage ofsubscribers that successfullygain access to each service in asingle snapshot.

Downlink Number of downlink subscribersthat gain access to each service ina single snapshot.

Uplink Number of uplink subscribersthat gain access to each service ina single snapshot.


Actual throughput of eachservice on the MAC layer fordownlink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of eachservice on the MAC layer fordownlink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.


Actual throughput of eachservice on the application layerfor downlink subscribers in asingle snapshot.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of eachservice on the application layerfor downlink subscribers in asingle snapshot.


Actual throughput of eachservice on the MAC layer foruplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.

Standard Deviation Standard deviation of eachservice on the MAC layer foruplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.


Actual throughput of eachservice on the application layerfor uplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.



224


Standard Deviation Standard deviation of eachservice on the application layerfor uplink subscribers in a singlesnapshot.

Breakdown perunsuccessfulreason

DLNoCover User Number of subscribers that arenot covered in the downlinkdirection.

ULNoCover User Number of subscribers that arenot covered in the uplinkdirection.

NoAccess User Number of subscribers that fail togain access to services.

Offline User Number of subscribers involvedin call drops.

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(UL) Statistical throughput on theMAC layer for uplink cell edgesubscribers. The value of thisparameter for a single snapshot isthe first top 5% throughputamong all throughput ranked inascending order on the MAClayer for all uplink subscribers inthe snapshot.

Edge User MAC Statistic Throughput(DL) Statistical throughput on theMAC layer for downlink celledge subscribers. The value ofthis parameter for a singlesnapshot is the first top 5%throughput among all throughputranked in ascending order on theMAC layer for all downlinksubscribers in the snapshot.

User Throughput Distribution Distribution of user throughputin a single snapshot.

User DL RS SINR Distribution Distribution of downlink RSSINR.

User PDSCH SINR Distribution Distribution of downlinkPDSCH SINR.



225

Parameters on the Sites tab pageThe parameters on this tab page for a single snapshot are similar to those on the same tab pagefor the whole network. Therefore, you can see the parameter description for the wholenetwork.. For details, see Parameters on the Sites(Average) Tab Page.

Parameters on the Cells tab pageThe parameters on this tab page for a single snapshot are similar to those on the same tab pagefor the whole network. Therefore, you can see the parameter description for the wholenetwork.. For details, see Parameters on the Cells(Average) Tab Page.

Parameters on the Mobiles tab pageParameter Description

ID ID of a user.

X The x-coordinate of a user on the map.

Y The y-coordinate of a user on the map.

Group Name Name of a simulation group.

SnapShot Name Name of a snapshot.

User Profile User type.




Connection State Connection status.There are five user states: Satisfied,ULNoCover, DLNoCover, NoAccess, andOffLine.

Best Server The best serving cell.After load control is performed, the value ofBestServer changes.

Link Type Link type (uplink and downlink).

Indoor Whether the terminal is used indoors.

Link Loss(UL)(dB) Uplink link loss.

Link Loss(DL)(dB) Downlink link loss.

RSRP(UL)(dBm) Uplink reference signal received power.

RSRP(DL)(dBm) Downlink reference signal received power.



226


IoT(DL)(dB) Downlink interference over thermal. The unitis dB.Simulate the last measurement value.

PDSCH MCS Downlink modulation coding scheme(MCS).

PUSCH MCS Uplink MCS.

MIMO Mode Multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO)type.

Tx Power(dBm) Transmit power of a terminal.The downlink user is empty.

PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PUSCH channel on theMAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PDSCH channel on theMAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PUSCH channel on theapplication layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PDSCH channel on theapplication layer. The unit is kbit/s.

Average Used RB Number Average number of used RBs.

RS SINR(DL)(dB) Signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)of the downlink reference signal. The unit isdB.Simulate the last measurement value.

PUSCH SINR(dB) SINR of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.

PDSCH SINR(dB) SINR of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.

Parameters for Viewing Capacity Simulation Results of a Single UserThis section describes the parameters for viewing capacity simulation results of a single user.


Layer Snapshot location of a user.

ID ID of a user.

X The x-coordinate of a user on the map.

Y The y-coordinate of a user on the map.

Link Type Link type (uplink and downlink).



227


Indoor Whether the terminal is used indoors.




Best Server The best serving cell.After load control is performed, the value ofBestServer changes.

Link Loss(UL)(dB) Uplink link loss.

Link Loss(DL)(dB) Downlink link loss.

RSRP(UL)(dBm) Uplink reference signal received power.

RSRP(DL)(dBm) Downlink reference signal received power.

IoT(DL)(dB) Downlink interference over thermal. The unitis dB.Simulate the last measurement value.

PDSCH MCS Downlink modulation coding scheme(MCS).

PUSCH MCS Uplink MCS.

MIMO Mode Multiple-input and multiple-output (MIMO)type.

Tx Power(dBm) Transmit power of a terminal.The downlink user is empty.

PUSCH MAC Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PUSCH channel on theMAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH MAC Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PDSCH channel on theMAC layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PUSCH Application Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PUSCH channel on theapplication layer. The unit is kbit/s.

PDSCH Application Throughput(kbps) Throughput of the PDSCH channel on theapplication layer. The unit is kbit/s.

RS SINR(DL)(dB) Signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)of the downlink reference signal. The unit isdB.Simulate the last measurement value.

PUSCH SINR(dB) SINR of the PUSCH channel. The unit is dB.

PDSCH SINR(dB) SINR of the PDSCH channel. The unit is dB.



228

Parameters for Viewing Point Analysis Statistics

This section describes the parameters for viewing point analysis statistics. You can refer to thissection when viewing the detailed information about propagation models in the ModelDetails window, detailed information about the link budget in the Link Budget window, oranalysis results of uplink and downlink signals in the Analysis Detail window.

Parameter Description of the Model Details Window

The following parameters are valid only when the propagation model is SPM.


Number Pts Indicates the number of Bin points involved in the statistics.

Dist. Indicates the distance from a point to the transmitter.

Alt. Indicates the altitude of a point.

Tot.H. Indicates the total height of a point.

Clut. Indicates the clutter ID of a point.

Effective Tx Height Indicates the effective antenna height of the transmitter.

Receiver Height Indicates the receiver height of a point.

Antenna Gain Indicates the antenna gain.

Diffraction Loss Indicates the diffraction loss.

Effective Rx Height Indicates the effective antenna height of the receiver.

Clutter Loss Indicates the clutter loss.

NOTE

Some parameters in the Model Details window are not described in this table. They are calculated according tothe propagation model.

Parameter Description of the Link Budget Window


Transceiver Indicates the name of a cell.

Receiver Indicates the coordinates of a point.

Distance Indicates the distance from a point to the transmitter.

Max Power Indicates the maximum transmit power of the carrier.

Reference Signal Power Indicates the power of a single reference signal of the carrier.



229


Path Loss Indicates the path loss.

Shadow Fading Margin Indicates the margin of shadow fading.

Penetration Loss Indicates the penetration loss.

Equipment Loss Indicates the equipment loss on the base station side, includingthe feeder loss, jumper loss, and TMA loss.

Reference Signal Level Indicates the strength of the reference signal.

Parameter Description of the Analysis Detail WindowParameter Description

Downlink

Received ReferenceSignal Level

Indicates the strength of the reference signal received bythe terminal.

PDSCH Total Noise(I+N)

Indicates the sum of the interference power received by theterminal and the noise power of the terminal.

Reference Signal C/(I+N)

Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the reference signal.

PDSCH C/(I+N) Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the downlink trafficchannel.

Bearer Indicates the modulation and demodulation mode used bythe terminal.

PDSCH PeakThroughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the downlink trafficchannel.

Uplink

Received PUSCHPower

Indicates the strength of the signal received by the cell.

Transmission Power Indicates the transmit power of the terminal.

PUSCH Total Noise(I+N)

Indicates the sum of the interference power received by thecell and the noise power of the cell.

PUSCH C/(I+N) Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the uplink trafficchannel.

Bearer Indicates the demodulation and modulation mode used bythe cell.

PUSCH PeakThroughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink traffic channel.



230

3.10 Planning LTE-FDD Network ParametersYou can plan the neighboring cells, EARFCNs, PCIs, and PRACHs of an LTE-FDD networkthrough the U-Net.

3.10.1 LTE PCI PlanningThe physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs isunavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency andco-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the systemto automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planningis complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.

Basic Knowledge of PCI PlanningIn PCI planning, the U-Net assigns proper IDs to cells. This ensures that no interference isgenerated between the downlink signals of intra-frequency and co-PCI cells and terminals canproperly synchronize and decode the pilot channels of normal serving cells. The PCI planningfunction can be used to create and expand networks.

PrinciplesIn LTE-FDD mode, you can search for cells according to cell groups. That is, you can determinethe ID of the corresponding cell group based on the SSCH and determine the specific cell IDbased on the PSCH.

Considering the networking capability, a large number of cell IDs is preferred. In the case of alarge number of cell IDs, sufficient and high-performance SCHs are required to support quickand accurate query of cell IDs. Therefore, in LTE-FDD mode, each cell ID group consists ofthree cell IDs. Therefore, the number of cell IDs is a multiple of 3. The number of downlinkscrambling codes is a multiple of 6. In the case of the WCDMA network, the maximum numberof cell IDs is 512. Therefore, to ensure that the number of cell IDs is a multiple of both 3 and 6,the recommended number of cell IDs is 504.

The number of PCIs is limited. Therefore, in the actual network, PCI reuse is unavoidable. Thereuse of PCIs, however, may result in interference when the distance between the cells sharingthe same PCI is excessively small. By using the PCI planning function on the U-Net, you canplan PCIs properly for cells, reducing the interference between intra-frequency and co-PCI cells.

Layer-0 Base StationThis section introduces the definition of layer-0 base station based on the schematic diagram inFigure 3-49.



231

Figure 3-49 Schematic diagram of layer-0 base station

In the circle, the line between base station A and base station B, that is, line AB, is the diameter.Line DG and line EF run parallel with line AB. The length of either line OD or OE is one thirdof the length of line AB.

The number of base stations involved in the gray area represents the number of layers betweenbase station A and base station B. If no base station is involved in the gray area, base station Aand base station B are called layer-0 base stations.

Mode 3 and Mode 6l When the PCIs of cells are divided by 6 and the remainders are the same, these cells have

the same mode 6. For example, the PCI of cell A is 16 and the PCI of cell B is 10; theremainder of dividing 16 by 6 is 4 and the remainder of dividing 10 by 6 is also 4. Therefore,cell A and cell B have the same mode 6.

l When the PCIs of cells are divided by 3 and the remainders are the same, these cells havethe same mode 3. For example, the PCI of cell A is 8 and the PCI of cell B is 5; the remainderof dividing 8 by 3 is 2 and the remainder of dividing 5 by 3 is also 2. Therefore, cell A andcell B have the same mode 3.

Planning PCIsThe U-Net provides the function of planning PCIs. The planning results can be applied to thecells.

PrerequisitesA base station is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Optional: View the PCIs of existing cells.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.



232

2. In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.

3. Right-click and choose Open PCI Codes from the shortcut menu. The PCI PlanningDisplay window is displayed. View the PCIs of existing cells.


Step 3 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.

Step 4 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Automatic Allocation

Step 5 In the LTE PCI Planning dialog box, set the planning parameters. For parameter description,see Parameters for Planning PCIs.

Step 6 Select whether to expand the PCIs based on the existing PCIs.

If... Then...

Expand the PCIs based on the existingPCIs.

Click Load to import the existing PCI clusterconfiguration file of the network.

Replan all the PCIs. Perform Step 7.

Step 7 Click Run.

l During planning, you can right-click LTE PCI Planning on the Operation tab page of theexplorer window, and then choose Stop PCI Codes Planning from the shortcut menu tostop the PCI planning.

l The planning result is displayed at the lower-part of the U-Net main interface. For parameterdescription, see Parameters for Viewing PCI Planning Results.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the PCI planning is complete, you can filter, verify, apply, and export the PCI planningresult. For details, see Managing the PCI Planning Result.



233

Managing the PCI Planning Result

This section describes how to manage PCI planning result. After the PCI planning is complete,you can filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, apply, and export the PCI planning result.

Prerequisites

The PCI planning is complete.

Procedurel Perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

You want to filter PCIplanning result

1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window andchoose Filter from the shortcut menu. For details, seeParameters for Filtering and Auditing PCIPlanning Results.

2. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayed in green onthe map, as shown in Figure 3-51.

NOTEl You need to select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree

so that the filtered cells can be displayed in green in the mapwindow.

l If you click None in the Filter dialog box or close the PCIPlanning Display window, the color of filtered cells in themap window is cleared.

You want to remove thefilter effect on the PCIplanning result

Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window andchoose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu. The PCIPlanning Display window switches back to the state whenno filter criterion was used, and the color of cells is cleared.NOTE

Remove Filter is available only after filter criteria are used.

You want to Audit the PCIplanning result

Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window andchoose Audit from the shortcut menu. For details, seeParameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI PlanningResults.The audit result is saved as an .xls file.

You want to apply the PCIplanning result to each cell

Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window andchoose Commit from the shortcut menu.PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planningresult is applied.

You want to export the PCIplanning result

1. Right-click in the PCI Planning Display window andchoose Export Result from the shortcut menu.

2. Set parameters in the Data Export dialog box. Fordetails, see 10.18.5 Parameters for Importing andExporting Data.

3. Click Export to export the planning result.



234

If... Then...

You want to view the PCIvalues of cells in the mapwindow

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, add the PCI field to the

Selected Fields area.5. Click OK.The PCI values of cells will be displayed in the mapwindow.PCI values of cells are updated after the PCI planningresult is applied.

You want to enable the mapwindow to display the PCIplanning result togetherwith that in the planningresult table

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. Select LTE PCI Planning in the navigation tree.3. In the navigation tree, choose LTE PCI Planning.4. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.5. Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details,

see Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties.6. Click OK.7. Select a source cell in the map window or click a row

heading in the planning result table.The PCI planning result is displayed in the mapwindow and planning result table at the same time.

You want to manuallymodify PCI configurations

In the PCI Planning Display window, manually modifythe value of Confirm Code. Then, right-click in the PCIPlanning Display window and choose Commit from theshortcut menu.1. Select a transceiver in the map window.2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. In the displayed dialog box, manually modify the PCI

configurations on the LTE-FDDCell tab page.



235

Figure 3-51 Filter

----End

3.10.2 LTE PRACH PlanningTo ensure successful random access to an LTE-FDD network, you must plan the physical randomaccess channel (PRACH) of each cell on the LTE-FDD network. The planning of PRACHsinvolves the planning of the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC).

Basic Knowledge of PRACHsThe PRACH planning is also called the ZC sequence planning. During the planning of ZCsequences, proper preamble sequences are assigned to cells to ensure that the high-speed cellsor cells with larger radius can be configured with high-performance preamble sequences.Currently, the U-Net supports the PRACH planning of only co-channel cells.

Planning of ZC Sequence IndexesThe PRACH uses the ZC sequence as the root sequence. The number of preamble sequences ofeach cell is 64. The preamble sequences are generated through cyclic shifts (Ncs, CyclicShifts)of ZC sequences. Preamble sequences used by a UE are allocated by a base station or randomlyselected. To reduce the interference of preamble sequences between adjacent cells, you need toplan ZC sequence indexes properly.

In LTE FDD mode, the number of ZC sequence indexes is 838, and 16 types of Ncs values areavailable. The U-Net configures ZC sequence indexes and Ncs values for multiple cellsaccording to the cell properties (such as the cell radius and high speed cell) to ensure that thegenerated preamble sequences of adjacent cells are different. Thus, the interference caused bythe use of the same preamble sequence between adjacent cells is reduced.

Planning PRACHYou can manually plan the PRACH parameters of one or multiple cells.



236

PrerequisitesA base station is created.

Procedure

Step 1 Set Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) for each cell.

The default value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) is 2 for each cell.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Change the value of Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor).5. Click OK.

Step 2 Importing the existing neighboring relationships. For details, see Importing NeighborRelationships.


Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose LTE PRACH Planning.

Step 5 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.

Step 6 Set parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, seeParameters for Planning the PRACH.

Step 7 Click Run.

The planning results of the PRACH parameters are displayed in a pane under the U-Net maininterface. You can check the planning results. For details about the parameters, see Parametersfor Viewing PRACH Planning Results.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureIf you need to... Then...

Export the PRACH planningresults

Right-click in the PRACH Parameter Display dialog boxand choose Export from the shortcut menu to export thePRACH planning results.

Modify the PRACHconfigurations manually

In the PRACH Parameter Display dialog box, modify thevalue of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index in the tablemanually.The U-Net will automatically change the value ofConfirmed End Root Sequence Index.



237


The PRACH planning resultsare displayed in the mapwindow.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, add the Min Root Sequence

Index field to the Selected Fields area.

The cells using PRACH reuseare displayed in the mapwindow.

1. In the navigation tree, select the box in front of LTEPRACH Planning.

2. Select a cell in the map window or click the head of a rowin the planning result table.The selected cell and the cells using PRACH reuse withthe selected cell are displayed in the same color on themap.

Modify the value of Min RootSequence Index.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.3. Choose Cells > Open Table from the shortcut menu.4. Modify the value of Min Root Sequence Index.NOTEl If you have planned the PRACH parameters of the cell but the

planning results are not submitted, the modification of Min RootSequence Index will be synchronized to Existed Min RootSequence Index but not to Confirmed Start Root SequenceIndex.

l The value of Confirmed Start Root Sequence Index issubmitted when you submit the PRACH planning results.

3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell PlanningAfter creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network.You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells foreach cell one by one.

Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell PlanningThis section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighborrelationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and thatthe handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS ofthe network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planningis to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network.

Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whetherneighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance.Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency.Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustmentsto the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.



238

The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. It supportsneighboring cell planning for special scenarios that require repeaters or remote RF units. Thesefeatures of U-Net ensure reliable planning results.

The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:

l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as aneighboring cell of the serving cell.

l If a cell in the candidate neighboring cells has the highest score, it is considered as aneighboring cell of the serving cell.

l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.

l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectionalneighbor relationship.

The U-Net provides the following neighboring cell planning algorithms:

l Topology: algorithm based on topology

l Prediction: algorithm based on coverage prediction

l Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction

The U-Net determines neighboring cells using the algorithm based on coverage prediction.If the neighbor relationships between the serving cell and some cells cannot be determinedaccording to the algorithm based on coverage prediction, the U-Net determines neighboringcells using the algorithm based on topology.

Take UMTS as an example, neighboring cell planning and optimization of U-Net applies to thefollowing scenarios:

l 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Network

l 6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network

l 6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Network

l 6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration

NOTE

For CDMA networks, the U-Net supports only the algorithm based on topology for planning neighboringcells.

Importing Neighbor Relationships

This section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the functionof importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on thenetwork can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to theactual situation of the network.

Prerequisitesl Base station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and

cells.

l The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationshiptemplate. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighborrelationships.



239

Contextl Neighbor relationships of an LTE-FDD or LTE-TDD network are matched by the cell

name.l Neighbor relationships of a GSM network are matched by cell name, LAC, and CI.l Neighbor relationships of a UMTS network are matched by cell name, RNC ID, and CI.l Neighbor relationships of a CDMA network are matched by MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,

Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by network

technology.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose neighbor planning > RAT.

Step 3 Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import NeighborRelations dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Select Update Blind Handover Flag as required.

If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated when theneighbor relationships are imported.

NOTEUpdate Blind Handover Flag is unavailable in GSM/CDMA, and therefore you do not need to select it.

Step 5 Click Browse to choose a neighbor relationship file.

Step 6 Click OK.

----End

Planning LTE-FDD Neighboring Cells

The U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enablethe U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handoverproblems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.


cells.l In the case of capacity expansion, the existing neighboring relationships have been imported

into the U-Net.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.




240

Figure 3-52 Neighbor Automatic Allocation

Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, seeParameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD Cells.

Step 5 Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for ViewingNeighboring Cell Planning Results.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.3. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring

relationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see Parametersfor Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.

5. Click OK.l You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,

see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.

Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell PlanningThis section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planningis complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modifyneighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.

PrerequisitesThe neighboring cell planning is complete.



241

Procedure



NOTE

You need to select the check box of RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships canbe displayed in the map window.

Step 3 Choose Open Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu.



View neighboring cellrelationships

In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell area.Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, as shownin Figure 3-53.The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell aredisplayed in the table in the Cell area and in the map windowsimultaneously.

Filter neighboring cells 1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Filter from theshortcut menu..

2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, seeParameters for Setting Conditions for Checking NeighborRelationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.

3. Select the box in front of Highlighted on Geographic. Thefiltered cells are displayed in green in the map window, asshown in Figure 3-54.

NOTEIf you select the None option in the Filter dialog box, the color of filteredcells in the map window is cleared.

Remove the filter effecton neighboring cells

Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and chooseRemove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell areaswitches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and thecolor of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.NOTE


Audit neighboring cellrelationships

1. In the Cell area of the main window, right-click the table andchoose Statistic from the shortcut menu.

2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,see Parameters for Setting Conditions for CheckingNeighbor Relationships and Filtering Neighboring Cells.

3. Click OK. The check report is exported to an XLS file.The exported file contains multiple sheets, and each sheetshows the result that meets certain audit conditions.



242


Export the result ofneighboring cell planning

1. In the Cell area of the main window, Choose Export from theshortcut menu..

2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialog box, select an exportmode.l Incremental Export: Export only the changed

neighboring cell relationships.l Full Export: Export all neighboring cell relationships.

3. Click Export.NOTE

In the exported file of neighboring cell relationships, you can refer to thevalues in the CellPCI and NeighborCellPCI columns for the LTEnetwork when creating MML scripts.

Delete neighboring cellrelationships

1. In the Cell area of the main window, select a cell whoseneighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.

2. Clear the check box for the selected cell in the Confirmcolumn of the table in the right pane.

Modify neighboring cellrelationships

1. Select a source cell on the map.2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except the source cell to

add or delete unidirectional neighboring cell relationships.3. Hold down Shift and click the cells except the source cell to

add or delete bidirectional neighboring cell relationships.NOTEl If an added or deleted neighboring cell relationship is the same as

an existing one, the check box for the selected cell in theConfirm column of the table in the right pane is automaticallyselected or cleared.

l If an added neighboring cell relationship is different from theexisting ones, the neighboring cell relationship is added to theneighboring cell list and the value of Cause for the cell is forcein the Cause column.

l If the number of neighboring cells for a cell reaches the maximumnumber, a confirmation dialog box is displayed when moreneighboring cells are added. You can click Yes to add theseneighboring cells, or click No to cancel the operation.

Export the X2 interfacerelationship data

This function is available only for the LTE-FDD network.The X2 interface relationship data can be exported only after theplanning result is applied to each cell.1. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > LTE.2. Right-click and choose Export X2 Relations from the

shortcut menu. The Export X2 Relations dialog box isdisplayed.

3. In the Area area, set the area whose X2 interface relationshipdata needs to be exported.

4. Specify an export path.5. Click OK.



243


Clear the result ofneighboring cell planning

1. Right-click in the Cell area of the main window and chooseClear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, click Y. The existing resultof neighboring cell planning is cleared.

NOTEYou can clear the existing result of neighboring cell planning so that theplanning of neighboring cells next time will not be affected.

Figure 3-53 Clicking a cell in the map window



244

Figure 3-54 Filter

----End

3.10.4 LTE Frequency PlanningAfter base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Netprovides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge sixfrequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, youcan enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs foreach cell.

Frequency Planning BasicsAn LTE-FDD broadband network does not have sufficient EARFCNs. However, it supportsdense frequency reuse owning to its orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM)features. The U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICICdownlink six frequency band allocation, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes.

LTE-FDD Network Frequency PlanningThe U-Net provides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlinksix frequency band allocation, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes.

l 1x1+ICIC soft frequency reuseIn this mode, cells of all eNodeBs use the same EARFCN and a site is used as a reuse clusterto implement seamless coverage of the entire network. To reduce the interference betweenadjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the full-frequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.

l 1x1+ICIC downlink edge six frequency band allocation reuseIn this mode, cells of all eNodeBs use the same EARFCN and a site is used as a reuse clusterto implement seamless coverage of the entire network. To reduce the interference between



245

adjacent cells, the center areas of all the sites on the network use partial band of the full-frequency band, and the edge areas use the rest of the full-frequency band.

l 1x3 frequency reuseIn this mode, the network uses three EARFCNs. The three cells in an eNodeB use differentEARFCNs. An eNodeB and its three cells are used as a reuse cluster to implement seamlesscoverage of the entire network.

Planning EARFCNsThe U-Net provides the automatic frequency planning function. You can enable the U-Net toautomatically assign EARFCNs to each cell based on different frequency reuse modes to avoidimproper frequency configuration, which greatly reduces the interference problems caused byimproper frequency configuration.

PrerequisitesThe frequency band information is set.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.

Step 3 Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu.The Parameter Setting dialog box isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 3-55.



246

Figure 3-55 Parameter Setting

Step 4 On the General tab page, select the target area in Select Area.l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select only the cells to be planned in

the area.l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be found, set the search direction,

and set whether to match cases.

Step 5 Set the minimum interference distance in Min Interference Distance(km).

Step 6 Select a frequency reuse mode in Frequency Reuse Pattern. The default reuse mode is 1x1,Static ICIC.

Step 7 On the Frequency tab page, select a band in Frequency Band and available ARFCNs inChannel Index.

You can select only one ARFCN in 1x1 frequency reuse mode and three ARFCNs in 1x3frequency reuse mode.

Step 8 Click Run.

After the frequency planning is complete, open the window of frequency planning results. Fordetailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Viewing Frequency PlanningResults.

----End



247

Follow-up Procedurel To export the frequency planning results, click Export in the window of frequency planning

results.

l To apply the frequency planning results to the cells, click Commit in the window offrequency planning results.

Checking the Information About Intra-Frequency Cells and Inter-Frequency Cells

You can check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of a specified ARFCN or aspecified cell. The intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells can be displayed in differentcolors in the map window on the U-Net.

Prerequisites

A base station is deployed. ARFCNs are assigned to each cell under the base station.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose LTE Frequency Planning.

Step 3 Choose Frequency Statistics from the shortcut menu. The Frequency Statistics dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 4 Set a band in Frequency Band and ARFCNs in Channel Index.

Step 5 Click Find to check the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells of the specified ARFCN.

Step 6 Click Geometry to query the intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells on the map.

Click Color to set the display colors of intra-frequency cells and inter-frequency cells.

----End

3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTE CellsThe LTE cell automatic planning function is used to adjust the mechanical tilt angle, azimuth,and reference signal power of antennas on the network to meet user requirements. This avoidsmanual interventions and reduces repeated parameter adjustments.

The purpose of this function is to improve the network coverage range, control and reduce inter-cell interference, and expand the network capacity, while ensuring signal receive quality. If thelive network coverage does not meet requirements, you can enable this function to automaticallyadjust cell parameters to optimize the coverage.

Planning the Link Matrix

Before optimizing cells, you need to calculate the link data of each cell to improve cell planningefficiency.



248

Prerequisitesl Base station information (including site, transceiver, and cell information) has been

imported or created.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose Calculate LinkLoss Matrix from the shortcutmenu, as shown in Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56 Calculate LinkLoss Matrix

Step 4 Set related parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box. For details aboutparameters, see Setting Link Matrix Parameters.

Step 5 Click Run to start calculating pass loss, as shown in Figure 3-57.



249

Figure 3-57 Calculate

----End

Planning CellsThis section describes how to plan cells. Before planning cells, you need to set parameters suchas analysis and simulation areas, number of iteration times, weight of each coverage counter(such as RSRP and RS SINR), and maximum adjustment range of the antenna tilt angle,azimuth, and reference signal transmit power.

Prerequisitesl Base stations have been created.l Analysis and simulation areas have been created.l The link matrix planning is complete.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning from the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click LTE Cell Planning and choose New from the shortcut menu. The LTE CellPlanning dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-58.



250

Figure 3-58 LTE Cell Planning

Step 4 Set cell planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, seeParameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureAfter creating an LTE cell planning group, you can plan LTE cells.

1. In the browser window, click the Operation tab.2. Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.3. Right-click Groupx and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu. The system starts

planning LTE cells, as shown in Figure 3-59.



251

Figure 3-59 Calculate LTE Cell Planning

NOTE

You can right-click Groupx and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop calculating LTE cell groups.When LTE cells are being planned, the Event Viewer window in the lower part of the U-Net main windowdisplays the planning progress.

After LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result. For details, see Viewing the LTECell Planning Result.

Viewing the LTE Cell Planning ResultAfter LTE cells are planned, you can view the planning result of each iteration and the planningresult of the LTE cell parameters for each cell in each iteration. You can also compare theparameter values before and after the planning. In addition, you can view the planning result ofeach iteration in a line graph. The planning result can apply to actual cells.

Prerequisites

l Links have been calculated.l LTE cell planning groups have been created and calculated.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose LTE Cell Planning > Groupx from the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click Groupx and choose Result from the shortcut menu. The LTE Cell Planning:Groupx dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, view the LTE cell planning result, as shown in Figure 3-60. Fordetails about the parameters, see Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning Results.



252

Figure 3-60 LTE Cell Planning: Groupx

NOTE

On the Cells tab page in the LTE Cell Planning :Groupx dialog box, click Commit to apply the cellplanning result to each cell.

----End

3.10.6 Interface Reference to LTE-FDD Network ParameterPlanning

This section describes the interfaces and parameters for LTE-FDD network parameter planningby using the U-Net.

Parameters for Planning Neighboring LTE-FDD CellsThis section describes parameters for planning neighboring LTE-FDD cells.



253

Table 3-70 Parameters displayed on the General tab page


Methods Select Selects a network planning scenario.l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on the network

topology.l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on prediction

results. This method is applicable only to outdoor basestations.

l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based onboth the network topology and the prediction results.

Max Neighbor Distance(km) Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.If the distance between two cells exceeds the specifiedvalue, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.

Planning Neighbor based onexisted Neighbors

Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboringrelationships.If this option is not selected, the existing neighboringrelationships are deleted and neighboring cells arereplanned.

Force Co-Site As Neighbor Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectionalneighboring cells.

Co-Site Distance(m) Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells whenthe distance between the two cells is less than the value ofthis parameter.

Reference Existed Neighbors Whether to reference the neighbor relationships of existingcells.

Reference Rules Click Reference Rules and configure reference rules in thedisplayed window.l Source Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency

band to be planned.l Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency

band of the neighboring cell.l Referenced Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the

frequency band of the referenced cell.l Reference Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the

frequency band of the neighboring cell of the referencedcell.

Azimuth Difference (°) Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to beplanned and the referenced cells.

Reference Site Distance(m) Sets the distance difference between the cell to be plannedand the referenced cell.



254


Resolution(m) Indicates the precision for the calculation.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Handover Area Percent(%) Indicates the handover area proportion.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Compute Shadowing Indicates whether to impose shadow fading.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Cell Edge CoverageProbability(%)

Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. Thisparameter is valid only when shadow fading is imposed. Thevalue of the parameter is directly proportional to the valueof shadow fading.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.NOTE

This parameter is valid when you select Compute Shadowing.

Compute Indoor Loss Indicates whether to impose penetration loss.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Indicates the minimum signal receive level.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Handover Threshold(dB) Indicates the handover area threshold.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Automatic generate PlanningCells

Automatically generates cells to be planned.NOTE

You can select new cells and related cells as cells to be planned.



255


Area Indicates the planning area.l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to

select only the cells to be planned in the area.l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to

be found, set the search direction, and set whether tomatch cases.

Table 3-71 Parameters displayed on the Intra-Frequency tab page


Force Symmetry Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectionalneighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.If this option is selected during network capacity expansion,the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured asbidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the originalneighboring relationship table.

New Cell-Indoor Cell-MaxOutdoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for a newly established indoor cell.

New Cell-Indoor Cell-MaxIndoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cellsplanned for a newly established indoor cell.

New Cell-Outdoor Cell-MaxOutdoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for a newly established outdoor cell.

New Cell-Outdoor Cell-MaxIndoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cellsplanned for a newly established outdoor cell.

Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-MaxOutdoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for an existing indoor cell.

Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-MaxIndoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cellsplanned for an existing indoor cell.

Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Outdoor NeighborNumber

Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for an existing outdoor cell.

Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max Indoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoor neighboring cellsplanned for an existing outdoor cell.



256

Table 3-72 Parameters displayed on the Inter-Frequency tab page


Force Symmetry Indicates whether to configure cells as bidirectionalneighboring cells.If this option is selected during network capacity expansion,the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured asbidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the originalneighboring relationship table.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for a newly established indoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for a newly established outdoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for an existing indoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboring cellsplanned for an existing outdoor cell.





257

Table 3-73 Parameters displayed on the Inter-RAT tab page (available in multi-mode)


Co-Site Distance Indicates the co-site distance. The default value is30 km.If the distance between two base stations is less thanor equal to the value of this parameter, the cellsunder the two base stations are considered as co-sitecells.If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTSnetworks are equipped with multiple antennas (orrepeaters), the cells under the two base stations areconsidered as co-site cells only if the distancesbetween all antennas (or repeaters) of the LTE-FDDbase station and antennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS base station are less than or equal to thevalue of this parameter.

CAUTIONOn the Generaltab page, if youselect a networkplanning mode(MethodsSelect), therequiredconditions mustbe met so that youcan use the cell asa neighboringLTE-FDD cell forblind handover.For details, seeTable 3-74.

Co-TransceiverAzimuthDifference

Indicates the co-transceiver azimuth difference.The default value is 5o.If the difference between the antenna azimuths oftwo cells is less than or equal to the co-transceiverazimuth difference, the two cells are considered asco-transceiver cells.If two base stations in LTE-FDD and GSM/UMTSnetworks are equipped with multiple antennas (orrepeaters), the cells under the two base stations areconsidered as co-transceiver cells only if theazimuth difference between all antennas (orrepeaters) of the LTE-FDD base station andantennas (or repeaters) of the GSM/UMTS basestation is less than or equal to the value of thisparameter.

Min Signal Level(dBm)

Indicates the minimum signal receive level. Thedefault value is –110 dBm.The signal receive level of the LTE-FDD cell mustbe less than the preset Min Signal Level(dBm)value.

Best HandoverArea Percent

Indicates the best handover area proportion. Thedefault value is 90%.On multi-mode networks, the LTE-FDD BestServer area may overlap the GSM/UMTS BestServer area. The ratio of the overlapped area to theLTE-FDD Best Server area is the handover areaproportion.This value must be greater or equal to the presetBest Handover Area Percent.



258


Total MaxNumber

Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.

Frequency Band Indicates the frequency band to be handed over when the RAT isswitched to GSM.

ARFCN Indicates the UTRA absolute radio frequency channel number(UARFCN) to be handed over when the RAT is switched to UMTS.

Min Signal Level(dBm)

Indicates the minimum signal receive level of the inter-RAT neighboringcell.

HandoverThreshold(dB)

Indicates the handover area threshold.

Table 3-74 Conditions for blind neighboring LTE-FDD cell handover


The Topologymode is selected

A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTE-FDD cell must meet the following conditions:l Co-Site Distancel Co-Transceiver Azimuth Differencel Min Signal Level(dBm)

The Predictionmode is selected

A cell serving as the neighboring cell for blind handover from an LTE-FDD cell must meet the following conditions:l Co-Site Distancel Best Handover Area PercentNOTE

If there are repeaters, neighboring cell planning based on predictions is notsupported.

Topology +Prediction isselected

The U-Net determines neighboring cells based on prediction. If theneighboring relationships between the serving cell and some cellscannot be determined based on prediction, the U-Net determinesneighboring cells based on their topology relationships.

Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells

This section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of neighboring cells.



Display Links Identifies neighbor relationships by using lines.



259


Display Cell Color Identifies neighbor relationships in cell colors.

Fit Neighbor Cell Visible Displays the neighbor relationships of a cell on the mapafter you select the cell in the neighbor relationshiptable.

Display Deleted Existed Neighbor Displays the neighboring cells that are available on thelive network but are currently deleted from the U-Net.

Selected Cell Color Sets the color of the source cell.

Intra Frequency Neighbors Displays intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter Frequency Neighbors Displays inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Neighbors Displays inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Intra Technology Neighbors Displays intra-RAT neighboring cells.

Table 3-76 Parameters on the Neighbor Display Color tab page

Legend Description

Confirm Intra Frequency Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequencyneighboring cells on the map.

Confirm Inter Frequency Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequencyneighboring cells on the map.

Confirm Inter-RAT Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RATneighboring cells on the map.

Deleted Intra Frequency Sets the display color of unidirectional intra-frequencyneighboring cells that are deleted from the live networkon the map.

Deleted Inter Frequency Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-frequencyneighboring cells that are deleted from the live networkon the map.

Deleted Iner-RAT Sets the display color of unidirectional inter-RATneighboring cells that are deleted from the live networkon the map.

Add To Legend Displays the neighbor relationships on the map.

Transparency Sets the transparency of the color.

NOTEThe neighboring cell types displayed on the U-Net may be different in different network systems. You canview the meaning of the displayed neighboring cell type.



260

Parameters for Setting Conditions for Checking Neighbor Relationships andFiltering Neighboring Cells

This section describes the parameters for setting the conditions for checking neighborrelationships and filtering neighboring cells.

Table 3-77 Parameter for setting the conditions for checking neighbor relationships and filteringneighboring cells


Source Cell Selects the source cell.

Intra-Frequency Filters the intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-Frequency Filters the inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Intra-Technology Filters the intra-RAT neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Filters the inter-RAT neighboring cells.

Average No. of Neighbors Indicates the average number of neighboring cells.

Empty List Filters the unconfigured neighboring cells.

Missing Co-Site Filters the neighboring cells that belong to different sites.

Missing Symmetry Filters the unconfigured bidirectional neighboring cells.

List > No: Filters the neighboring cells whose number of neighboringcells is greater than the specified number.

Percentage of ReferenceNeighbors

Indicates the percentage of UMTS cells that share neighborrelationships with the GSM cells at the same site as theUMTS cells.

Same PCI Filters the neighboring cells that use the same PCI. Thisparameter is available only for the LTE network.

With Deleted ExistedNeighbor

Collects cells whose existing neighboring cells have beendeleted.

None Sets no filter criterion.

Highlighted on GeographicInterface

Determines whether to highlight filtered cells on the map.

This table provides all the parameters for checking neighbor relationships and filteringneighboring cells in each network system. Some parameters may be available only in a specificnetwork system. Check the parameter description based on site conditions.

Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning ResultsThis section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to thissection when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning iscomplete.



261

Table 3-78 Tab page description


Intra-Frequency Indicates intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-Frequency Indicates inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Indicates inter-RAT neighboring cells.

The tab page name varies according to the network technology. Read the description on theactual tab page.

Table 3-79 Parameter description


Neighbor Name Indicates the name of a neighboring cell.

Cause Indicates the reason for configuring a cell as the neighboring cellof the serving cell.l existed: Indicates the existing neighbor relationships on the

network.l planned: Indicates the planned neighbor relationships.l force: Indicates the neighbor relationships manually added

by users.l inherited: Indicates the inherited neighbor relationships.

Confirm Indicates whether a cell is configured as the neighboring cell ofthe serving cell.If the option is selected, the cell is configured as the neighboringcell of the serving cell. If the option is not selected, the cell isnot configured as the neighboring cell of the serving cell.

Blind Handover Indicates a neighboring cell for blind handover.

Parameters for Viewing Frequency Planning Results

This section describes the parameters for viewing LTE frequency planning results. You can referto this section when viewing frequency planning results in the 1×1 Result and 1×3 Result dialogboxes.


Site Indicates the name of a site.

Transceiver Indicates the name of a transmitter.

Frequency Indicates the frequency band.



262


Bandwidth Indicates the bandwidth.

1×1 Resultdialog box

Edge Frequency(UL)

Indicates the allocation mode of the uplink edgefrequency band. The value can be Style1, Style2, orStyle3.NOTE

When the downlink six edge frequency band allocationmodes are used, the uplink edge frequency band mode hasno output.

Edge Frequency(DL)

When Static ICIC is selected, the downlink threefrequency band allocation modes are used. The valuecan be Style1, Style2, or Style3.When Adaptive ICIC is selected, the downlink sixfrequency band allocation modes are used. The valuecan be Style1a, Style1b, Style2a, Style2b, Style3a, orStyle3b.

1×3 Resultdialog box

Channel Index Indicates the ARFCN, which represents an offset ofthe frequency based on the current frequency band.For example, if the frequency band is 1800 MHz, thebandwidth is 20 MHz, and there are 10 ARFCNs,ARFCN 8 represents 1800 + 20 x 8 (MHz).

Parameters for Planning PCIsThis section describes the parameters for automatically planning PCIs. You can refer to thissection when planning PCIs in the LTE PCI Planning dialog box.



Available PCI Available PCIs. The value ranges from 0 to503.

Planning With Exist PCI Whether to conduct planning based onexisting PCIs.

PCI Mod 3 Matching Azimuth order Allocate PCI Mod 3 based on azimuth order.

Iteratively General PCI Sets whether to generate PCIs by iterations.When this option is selected, the PCIs areallocated in the following manner when PCIallocation in a cell fails: The PCIs areallocated by reducing the reuse distance byiterations based on the steps as defined byDistance Descending Percentage(%).



263


Distance Descending Percentage(%) Indicates the percentage of the step forreducing the PCI reuse distance.

Area Indicates the PCI planning area.

Filter l You can select all the cells in an area orclick Filter to select only the cells to beplanned in the area.

l In the Filter dialog box, you can specifythe contents to be found, set the searchdirection, and set whether to match cases.

Table 3-81 Parameters on the Advanced Parameter tab page


Topology Select Topology to plan PCIs based on thenetwork topology such as the cell locationand antenna azimuth.

Prediction Select Prediction to plan PCIs based on theprediction results such as cell coverage area.If the NE parameters are correctly configured,you are advised to plan PCIs based on theprediction results.

Resolution(m) Indicates the coverage calculation precision.The default value is 50.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Indicates the threshold of minimum receivesignal level.

Handover area threshold(dB) Indicates the handover area threshold.

Shadowing taken into account Select Shadowing taken into account totake into account the shadow fading duringthe calculation of path loss.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability Set the cell edge coverage probability in CellEdge Coverage Probability(%).This parameter is valid only when shadowfading is taken into account. The value of theparameter is directly proportional to the valueof shadowing fading.

Indoor Coverage Select Indoor Coverage to take into accountindoor coverage during the calculation ofpath loss.



264

Parameters for Viewing PCI Planning ResultsThis section describes the parameters for viewing PCI planning results.


Cell Name Indicates the name of a cell.

Existing Code Indicates the existing PCI value.Before you submit PCI results, the PCI value remainsunchanged.

Suggest Code Indicates the suggested PCI value and also the planned PCIvalue.

Confirm Code Indicates the confirmed PCI value.The default value of this parameter is equal to the plannedPCI value. The value of this parameter can be changedmanually.When you submit PCI planning results, the value of thisparameter is submitted.

Min Reuse Distance(m) Indicates the minimum reuse distance of PCI in the currentline. No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.

Min Reuse Tier Indicates the minimum reuse tier of PCI in the current line.No Reuse indicates that the PCI is not reused.

Parameters for Filtering and Auditing PCI Planning ResultsThis section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing PCI planning results.


Filter Target Indicates the range of cells to be filtered.l All: all cells.l Planning: planned cells.

None No condition is specified.

Reuse Tier <= Indicates the maximum number of reuse layers.

Reuse Distance(km) <= Indicates the maximum reuse distance.


Indicates whether to highlight filtered cells on the mapor not.

Parameters for Planning the PRACHThis section describes the parameters for planning the LTE PRACH. You can refer to this sectionwhen setting PRACH parameters in the LTE PRACH Planning dialog box.



265


Available Root SequenceIndex

Available Zadoff-Chu (ZC) sequence indexes.l Preamble Format (0-3): ZC sequence indexes available

for the cells whose preamble format is set to 0-3. Themaximum value range is from 0 to 837.

l Preamble Format (4): ZC sequence indexes availablefor the cells whose preamble format is set to 4. Themaximum value range is from 0 to 137. This parameter isavailable only for the LTE-TDD network.

Calculate Cell Radius Whether to calculate the cell radius.If this option is selected, the cell radius needs to be calculated.If this option is not selected, the cell radius set for an NE isused.

Propagation Radius Cell radius is calculated based on the calculation radius ofthe propagation model.

Propagation Radius Factor Conversion factor for the Calculation radius of a propagationmodel.

Coverage Radius Cell radius is calculated based on the signal coverage of cells.

Resolution(m) Precision of the coverage calculation. The default value is50.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Minimum receive level of signals for cell coverage.

Shadowing taken into account Whether to consider shadow fading when calculating signalcoverage of cells.


Cell edge coverage probability used for calculating shadowfading.

Indoor Coverage Whether to take penetration loss into account.

Area Area for PRACH planning.

l You can select all the cells in an area or click CellFilter to select only the cells to be planned in the area.

l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents tobe found, set the search direction, and set whether tomatch cases.

Parameters for Viewing PRACH Planning ResultsThis section describes the parameters for viewing or modifying PRACH planning results. Youcan refer to this section when viewing PRACH planning results in the PRACH ParameterDisplay dialog box or in the carrier property window.



266



HighSpeed Indicates whether the cell is a high-speed cell.In PRACH planning, high-speed cells are preferentiallyplanned.

Preamble Format(4) Whether the preamble format of the cell is 4.

Ncs Indicates the cyclic shift, that is, the configuration of zero-correlated cells allocated for a cell.The value of this parameter is a result of the PRACHplanning. The possible values of this parameter are asfollows:l High-speed cell: 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 55, 68, 82,

100, 128, 158, 202, or 237.l Low-speed cell: 0, 13, 15, 18, 22, 26, 32, 38, 46, 59,

76, 93, 119, 167, 279, or 419.

Cell Radius Indicates the radius of a cell.

Existed Min Root SequenceIndex

Indicates the existing start ZC root sequence index of thecell.

Suggested Start Root SequenceIndex

Indicates the planned start ZC root sequence index of thecell.

Suggested End Root SequenceIndex

Indicates the planned end ZC root sequence index of thecell.

Confirmed Start Root SequenceIndex

Indicates the confirmed start ZC root sequence index.

Confirmed End Root SequenceIndex

Indicates the confirmed end ZC root sequence index.

Reuse Tier (Topology) Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based on thegeographical location.

Reuse Distance(m) Indicates the PARCH reuse distance, that is, the minimumreuse distance when the same root sequence is reused.

Reuse Tier (Neighbor) Indicates the minimum number of reuse tiers based onneighboring relationship.

Actual Required Reuse Tier(Neighbor)

Indicates the actually required number of reuse tiers whenresources are allocated to cells.

Lower Reuse Tier (Neighbor) Indicates whether the number of reuse tiers is reducedwhen resources are allocated to cells.



267

Parameters for Setting PCI Display Properties

This section describes the parameters for setting PCI display properties in the PCI DisplayOptions dialog box.



Same PCI: Indicates the cells with the same PCI.

PCI Mod3: Cells that have the same PCI mod 3 with the specified cell onthe corresponding layer-0 base stations



Display PCI Links PCI results are marked by different line colors when you selectthis option.

Display PCI Cells PCI results are marked by different cell colors when you selectthis option.

Basic Parameters of a Site

This section describes the parameters displayed or hidden in the Sites table. You can refer tothis section when viewing basic parameters of a site in the Columns to be displayed dialog box.


Site Name Name of a site. This parameter uniquelyidentifies a site.The U-Net provides a default name for eachnew site.

Site ID Site ID.

X Geodetic coordinate X (X coordinate).

Y Geodetic coordinate Y (Y coordinate).

Longitude Longitudinal coordinate.

Latitude Latitudinal coordinate.

Altitude(m) Altitude.

Use Altitude For Calculation Whether to manually type the altitude of a sitefor calculation. If this item is selected, youneed to type the altitude of a site manually.

Comments Comments on a site.



268


Support Type Base station type.Macro indicates a macro base station,Micro indicates a micro base station.

Setting Link Matrix Parameters

This section describes the parameters required for planning LTE cells. You can refer to thissection when setting parameters in the Calculate LinkLoss Matrix dialog box.


Resolution (m) Indicates the link matrix calculationresolution. The default value is 50.

With Shadow Indicates whether to impose shadow fading.By default, this option is selected.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the cell edge coverage. The defaultvalue is 75%.NOTE

This parameter can be set only when shadowfading is imposed.

Indoor Coverage Indicates whether to impose indoor coverage.By default, this option is not selected.

Terminal Select a preset terminal type from the drop-down list.

Service Select a preset service type from the drop-down list.

Polygon Region Select a polygon region.

Select DT Data Select a DT data source.

Parameters for Creating an LTE Cell Planning Group

This section describes the parameters for creating and setting an LTE cell planning group. Youcan refer to this section when creating or setting an LTE cell planning group in the LTE CellPlanning dialog box.

Parameters on the General Tab Page


Name Indicates the name of an LTE cell planninggroup.



269


DL RSRP Target Ratio Indicates the percentage of the downlinkRSRP that reaches the specified threshold inthe selected calculation area. The valueranges from 0% to 100%.

DL RSRP Threshold(dBm) Indicates the threshold that the downlinkRSRP reaches.

DL RS SINR Target Ratio Indicates the percentage of the downlink RSSINR that reaches the specified threshold inthe selected calculation area. The valueranges from 0% to 100%.

DL RS SINR Threshold(dBm) Indicates the threshold that the downlink RSSINR reaches.

UL RSRP Target Ratio Indicates the percentage of the uplink RSRPthat reaches the specified threshold in theselected calculation area. The value rangesfrom 0% to 100%.

UL RSRP Threshold(dBm) Indicates the threshold that the uplink RSRPreaches.

UL RS SINR Target Ratio Indicates the percentage of the uplink RSSINR that reaches the specified threshold inthe selected calculation area. The valueranges from 0% to 100%.

UL RS SINR Threshold(dBm) Indicates the threshold that the uplink RSSINR reaches.

DL RSRP Fitness Weight Indicates the weight of the downlink RSRPperformance counter of a cell. The valueranges from 0 to 100.

DL RS SINR Fitness Weight Indicates the weight of the downlink RSSINR performance counter of a cell. Thevalue ranges from 0 to 100.

UL RSRP Fitness Weight Indicates the weight of the uplink RSRPperformance counter of a cell. The valueranges from 0 to 100.

UL RS SINR Fitness Weight Indicates the weight of the uplink RS SINRperformance counter of a cell. The valueranges from 0 to 100.



270

Parameters on the Advanced Tab PageParameter Description

Angle Limit Between Co-Site Adjacent Cells(°)

Indicates the minimum angle between co-siteadjacent cells.

Azimuth Step Size(°) Indicates the step length at which the antennaazimuth is adjusted. The value ranges from-360 to 360.

Tilt Step Size(°) Indicates the step length at which the antennatile angle is adjusted. The value ranges from-90 to 90.

RS Power Step Size(dBm) Indicates the step length at which the celltransmit power is adjusted. The value rangesfrom 0 to 46.

Search Range Indicates the range to be calculated for eachoptimization during the planning. The valueranges from 1 to 4.A larger parameter value indicates a moreaccurate planning result but a longercalculation time.

Iteration Count Indicates the maximum number of iterationsduring the whole planning. The value rangesfrom 1 to 100.A larger parameter value indicates a moreaccurate planning result but a longercalculation time.

Fitness Statistics Based on DT Indicates whether to plan LTE cells based onDT data.l If this parameter is selected, LTE cells are

planned based on DT data.l If this parameter is not selected, LTE cells

are not planned based on DT data.

Parameters on the Area Tab PageParameter Description

Analysis Area Indicates the analysis area for LTE cellautomatic planning. Cells in this area areinvolved in LTE Cell parameter adjustment.



271


Simulation Area Simulation area for automatic LTE cellplanning. This area monitors the entire LTECell adjustment effect. During the planning,the system imposes the interference of sitesin the simulation area to the sites in theanalysis area.NOTEl If the project contains only one polygon, this

polygon is selected in both the analysis andsimulation areas.

l If the project contains polygons, the simulationarea must contain the analysis area.

Parameters for Viewing LTE Cell Planning ResultsThis section describes parameters for viewing LTE cell planning results.

Table 3-83 Parameters on the Cells Tab Page


Iteration Indicates the number of an iteration.

Site Name Indicates the name of a site.

Site ID Indicates the ID of a site.


Local Cell ID Indicates the internal code of a cell fordifferentiating the cell from other cells underthe same eNodeB.

Original Azimuth(°) Indicates the original antenna azimuth for acell.

Optimized Azimuth(°) Indicates the optimized antenna azimuth fora cell.

Original RS Power(dBm) Indicates the original RS power for a cell.

Optimized RS Power(dBm) Indicates the optimized RS power for a cell.

Original Tilt(°) Indicates the original antenna tilt angle for acell.

Optimized Tilt(°) Indicates the optimized antenna tilt angle fora cell.



272


Original Fitness Indicates the original fitness value of a cell.The fitness value represents cellperformance.

Optimized Fitness Indicates the optimized fitness value of a cell.

Table 3-84 Parameters on the Fitness Tab Page


Iteration Indicates the number of an iteration.

Fitness Indicates the fitness value of each iteration.NOTE

The system automatically calculates the value aftereach iteration.

Table 3-85 Parameters on the Coverage KPI Tab Page


DL RSRP After DL RSRP is selected, the DL RSRP coverage predictioncharts of any two iterations is displayed.

DL RS SINR After DL RS SINR is selected, the DLRS SINR coverageprediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.

UL RSRP After UL RSRP is selected, the UL RSRP coverage predictioncharts of any two iterations is displayed.

UL RS SINR After UL RS SINR is selected, the ULRS SINR coverageprediction charts of any two iterations is displayed.

Iteration Indicates the first iteration to be compared.

Compare Iteration Indicates the second iteration to be compared.



273

4 LTE-TDD Network Planning

About This Chapter

The U-Net supports data planning for networks in the LTE-TDD mode. You can model the actualnetwork environment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creatingbase stations based on the imported geographic data. Moreover, you can plan network parametersand predict the network coverage range. In this way, the system can meet the requirements onnetwork planning in different scenarios.

4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network PlanningThis section describes the process of LTE-TDD network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning an LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.





4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Trafficparameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 4 LTE-TDD Network Planning


274

Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the trafficparameters are defined before capacity prediction.

4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

4.8 LTE-TDD PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity SimulationCapacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is asfollows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map andallocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overallnetwork performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Netgenerates a statistical report.

4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network ParametersThis section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of theLTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.



275

4.1 Process of LTE-TDD Network PlanningThis section describes the process of LTE-TDD network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning an LTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.

Figure 4-1 shows the process of LTE-TDD network planning.

Figure 4-1 Process of LTE-TDD network planning

Table 4-1describes the detailed information about Figure 4-1.



276

Table 4-1 Description of the LTE-TDD network planning process




You can import geographic data in various vector andgrid formats and set coordinate systems. You can also addpoints, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.Themethod for importing geographic data for differentnetwork systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see3.3 Importing Geographic Data.



4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,or site equipment.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.


Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services,which are to be used during prediction.For details, see4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic Parameters.


You can import existing base station data to create basestations or use a base station template to automaticallycreate base stations. You can also create sites,transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 4.7Setting LTE-TDD NE Parameters.


The method for calculating the path loss for differentnetwork systems on the U-Net is the same. For details,see 3.8.2 Calculating Path Loss.


For details, see 4.8 LTE-TDD Prediction.

9 Planning PCI/frequency/PRACH/neighboring cells

For details, see 4.10 Planning LTE-TDD NetworkParameters.The planning results can be applied to NEs.

10 Creating a trafficmap

The method for creating a traffic map for LTE-FDD andLTE-TDD network on the U-Net is the same. For details,see 3.9.2 Creating LTE Traffic Maps.

11 Performingcapacity simulation

For details, see 4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity Simulation.The capacity simulation results can be applied toprediction.





277











Step 3 Click OK.

----End





278


NOTE



NOTE



ContextThe method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is thesame. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.


ContextThe method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systemson the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.

For details about the parameters for setting the frequency band information, see Parameters forSetting Bands.


ContextThe method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is thesame. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.



279

4.6 Setting LTE-TDD Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Trafficparameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map. You must ensure that the trafficparameters are defined before capacity prediction.

4.6.1 Setting MCS TypesThis section describes how to set an MCS. You can modify the parameters (mainly thedemodulation mode and coding rate) of an existing MCS type. When the existing MCS typesdo not meet your requirements, you can create a new MCS type.

Context

The U-Net provides multiple default MCS types, corresponding to three demodulation modes(QPSK, 16QAM, and 64QAM) and different coding rate.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > LTE-TDD.

Step 3 Choose PUSCH MCS or PDSCH MCS. The MCS table is displayed.

Step 4 Click the blank row (marked with *) in the dialog box, as shown in Figure 4-3. For informationon how to set a new MCS type, see Table 4-2.

Figure 4-3 MCS

Table 4-2 Parameters for Setting the MCS


Index Indicates the index of an MCS.



280


Highest modulation Indicates a modulation scheme, which can any of thefollowing:l QPSKl 16QAMl 64QAM

Modulation Order Indicates a modulation exponent.

Coding Rate Indicates the coding rate. The value range is from 0 to2.

Bearer Efficiency(bits/RE) Indicates the bearer efficiency.Bearer efficiency = Coding rate x Modulationexponent


----End

4.6.2 Setting LTE-TDD Service TypesSet the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parametersof existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate service types.

ContextFor an LTE-TDD network, the U-Net provides four default service types: LTEFTP, LTEVideoConferencing, LTEVoIP, and LTEWeb Browsing.

Procedure



If... Then...

Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >LTE-TDD.


4-3.

Modify an existingservice type

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services >LTE-TDD > the existing service type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify the parameters for the existing service type by referring

to Table 4-3.



281

Figure 4-4 New

Table 4-3 Description of service parameters


Name Name of a service type.

Type Service type.l Voice: CS services.l Data: PS services.

GBR GBR service.

Priority Service priority weighting factor, which is used to adjust the servicepriority for subscribers in capacity simulation.1 indicates the lowest priority.

Activity Factor Uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter is required onlyfor CS services.l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0

to 1.

AMR Rate(kbit/s) Rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s.Value range: 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.



282


MAC PDU(kbit) Size of a packet for transmitting CS service data at the MAC layer.


Maximum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to


from 0 to 107.NOTE



Minimum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to


from 0 to 107.NOTE



Average uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: average uplink throughput.l Downlink: average downlink throughput.


Uplink/downlink transmission rate.l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0

to 1.

Offset(kbit/s) Fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the length added to anencapsulated packet during the transmission at the MAC or RLClayer.

l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 107.l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to

107.

IBLER(%) Block error rate. The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Body Loss(dB) Body loss.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

4.6.3 Setting LTE-TDD Receiver TypesYou can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do notmeet the requirements, you can create receiver types.



283

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > LTE-TDD.



If... Then...

Create a receiver type. In a blank row marked with *, type the name of the newreceiver and select type of MCS Table.


Perform Step 5.

Step 5 Double-click the column heading corresponding to the receiver type, and then set parametersfor the receiver type by referring to Table 4-4.

If data in a row becomes unavailable in the dialog box, the data in this row cannot be changed.

Step 6 Click OK.

Table 4-4 Parameters for setting LTE-TDD receivers



MCS Table Indicates the modulation and coding scheme.

Mobility Indicates the mobility type of a receiver.For details, see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.


IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate. The value range is from 0to 100.

Channel Relativity Indicates the channel relativity.

Transmission Mode Indicates the transmission mode.This parameter is valid only when the MCS Table is setto PDSCH MCS.



284


MCS Threshold Indicates the MCS bearer table of a receiver.You can double-click a cell and then view the detailedMCS bearer information in the Demodulation area.l SINR: indicates the threshold of the SINR required

during demodulation.l Spectrum Efficiency: indicate the efficiency of the

spectrum.l The chart in the right pane shows the demodulation

thresholds.

----End

4.6.4 Setting the LTE-TDD Terminal TypeSet the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters ofexisting terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate terminal types.

Procedure



If... Then...


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >LTE-TDD.

2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.3. See Table 4-5 to set the parameters of a new terminal type.


1. On the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >LTE-TDD > Existing Terminals.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. See Table 4-5 to modify the parameters of an existing terminal type.

Table 4-5 Parameter description of a terminal type

Parameter Meaning


UE Category Indicates the category of a terminal.The terminals are classified into five categoriesranging from 1 to 5.



285

Parameter Meaning

UL Peak Throughput(Kbps) Indicates the peak throughput in the uplinkdirection.

DL Peak Throughput(Kbps) Indicates the peak throughput in the downlinkdirection.

Support UL 64 QAM Indicates that 64 QAM is supported in the uplinkdirection.

Maximum Layer Number Indicates the maximum number of layers.

Min Tx Power(dBm) Indicates the minimum transmit power of aterminal.

Max Tx Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power of aterminal.



Supported BF Indicates whether to support the beamforming(BF).The available options are Not supported, TM7,and TM8.

UL RS Offset(dB) Indicates the reference signal (RS) offset in theuplink direction.

RB Number Indicates the number of resource blocks (RBs)supported by the terminal. This parameter is onlyapplicable to prediction.

Reception Equipment Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.


Number of Transmission Antenna Ports Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitterfor a terminal.

Number of Reception Antenna Ports Indicates the number of antennas at the receiverfor a terminal.

----End




286

Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. Fordetails, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see3.6.6 Setting User Types.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

4.7 Setting LTE-TDD NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. Fordetails, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.




287

Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.

4.7.3 Setting an LTE-TDD Base Station TemplateThis section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations byusing the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet yourrequirements, you can customize a base station template.


1. Select Template Management from the drop-down list onthe toolbar. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed, as shown inFigure 4-5.


2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.




288

For example, .l Create a base station template.



2. Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameters for SettingLTE-TDD Base Station Templates.



Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station Templates.4. Click OK.

----End





ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the sameway. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.


ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.



289

4.7.6 Creating a TransceiverThis section describes how to create a transceiver. The U-Net combines the transceiver withcells. Before setting a cell, you must set the transceiver parameters. A transceiver supports amulti-mode network, that is, a transceiver can cover multiple cells. For networks using differentradio access technologies (RATs), you can use the U-Net to create a transceiver in the same way.

ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.

4.7.7 Setting LTE-TDD Cell ParametersThis section describes how to set LTE-TDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you canset cell parameters.

ProcedureStep 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.



Step 4 On the LTE-TDDCell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the LTE-TDDcell, as shown in Figure 4-6. For parameter description, see Parameters of LTE-TDD Cells.

Figure 4-6 LTE-TDDCell



290

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

4.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting LTE-TDD NE ParametersThis section describes the parameters for setting LTE-TDD NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameters for Setting LTE-TDD Base Station TemplatesThis section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying theproperties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base stationtemplates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.







Transceiver Area on the LTE-TDD Tab PageParameter Description




Mechanical Downtilt Indicates the mechanical tilt angle.

Electrical Downtilt Indicates the electrical tilt angle.


First Sector Azimuth Indicates the azimuth of the first sector.

Transmission in theNumber of Antennas area




291




Transmission in theNumber of Antenna Portsarea





General Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab PageParameter Description












Transmission Mode Indicates the transmission mode.For the details of the value, see Table 4-6.

DwPTS-GP-UpPTS Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, and UpPTS.



292


Frame Configuration Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes.l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes are

included.l For example, the value of this parameter can be

DSUUUDSUUU.D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, specialsubframe, and uplink subframe respectively.



COMP Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function is enabledon the base station.Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplink for thebase station to increase cell edge capacity and average cellthroughput. By default, this option is not selected.


Advance Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab PageParameter Description

Downlink Indicates the downlink parameters.You can set downlink parameters in the text boxes in this area.

Uplink Indicates the uplink parameters.You can set uplink parameters in the text boxes in this area.



ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interferencecoordination (ICIC) in the uplink.l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not





293





l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC canbe enabled automatically and edge band mode can beconfigured automatically. Users can plan the edge bandmodes and then deliver the band modes without having toconfigure the parameter for the cells one by one.

Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge usersin the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1, Style2,or Style3).




l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all usersand the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameteris set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users inthe cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter isset to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users in thecell is set to the value of CCU PA.

Power Control Indicates the power control in the downlink.

Target Load Indicates the target load.






294



Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio (SINR)access threshold of the downlink reference signal. The unit isdB.





TTI Bundling Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.


Power Offset Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab PageParameter Description

PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 andthe unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15 andthe unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PCFICH power relativeto the power of the reference signal. The value range is from-15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH power relativeto the power of the reference signal. The value range is from-15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PHICH power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value range is from -15 to 15. Theunit is dB.




295



CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power received byusers at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to the RS power.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is -1.77.


Propagation Models Tab Page in the Cell Area on the LTE-TDD Tab Page








Value Description









296

Value Description







Parameters of LTE-TDD CellsThis section describes the parameters for creating an LTE-TDD cell or modifying the propertiesof an LTE-TDD cell.

LTE-TDDCell Tab Page

Table 4-7 LTE-TDDCell tab page


GCI Indicates the global cell identity of a cell.

Name Indicates the name of a carrier.The U-Net enters the default name for each new carrier.

Active Indicates whether to activate the current carrier.





297


Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value rangesfrom 0 to 1.

Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The valueranges from 0 to 1.

Actual Load(UL) Indicates the actual load on the uplink. The value rangesfrom 0 to 1.

Actual Load(DL) Indicates the actual load on the downlink. The valueranges from 0 to 1.

RS Power(dBm) Indicates the power of the reference signal on asubcarrier. The unit is dBm.

PBCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the PBCH power relative to thepower of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

SCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the SCH power relative to thepower of the reference signal. The unit is dB.

PCFICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink physical controlformat indicator channel (PCFICH) power relative tothe power of the reference signal. The value ranges from-15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PDCCH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink PDCCH powerrelative to the power of the reference signal. The valueranges from -15 to 15. The unit is dB.

PHICH to RS(dB) Indicates the offset of the downlink physical HARQindicator channel (PHICH) power relative to the powerof the reference signal. The value ranges from -15 to 15.The unit is dB.

Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power. The unit isdBm.


High Speed Indicates the speed in a cell. This parameter can be setto one of the following values:l LowSpeedl HighSpeedl HighwaySpeed

Radius(m) Indicates the radius of a cell.

Min Root Sequence Index Indicates the minimum ZC sequence of a cell.



298


Prach Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the number of PRACH reuse tiers (depends onthe neighbor relationship).The value of this parameter must be an integer largerthan 0.

Preamble Format Preamble format.



Indicates the signal to interference plus noise ratio(SINR) access threshold of the downlink referencesignal. The unit is dB.

Priority Indicates the cell priority. The smaller the value of a cellis, the higher the priority of the cell is.

PB(dB) Indicates the index for the offset of A symbols and Bsymbols of the RE relative to the RSRE power. Thevalue can be 0, 1, 2, or 3.

Schedule Policy Indicates a scheduling policy.l RR: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the

polling algorithm.l PF: Indicates that the scheduling is based on the

polling algorithm and the maximum signal tointerference ratio.

l MAX_CI: Indicates that the scheduling is based onthe maximum signal to interference ratio.

PCI Indicates the physical ID of a cell.

PCI Reuse Distance(Km) Indicates the minimum PCI reuse distance.

PCI Reuse Tier(Neighbor) Indicates the minimum PCI reuse tiers (depends on theneighbor relationship).





DlEarfcn Indicates a downlink ARFCN.

UlEarfcn Indicates an uplink ARFCN.

TAC Indicates the tracking area code (TAC).

Local Cell ID Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiatingthe cell from other cells under the same eNodeB.

Reselect Priority Indicates the cell reselection priority.



299


PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the transmit power on the PDSCHRE relative to that on the RS RE.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is-3.

CCU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power receivedby users in the cell center on the PDSCH relative to theRS power.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is-6.

CEU PA(dB) Indicates the offset of the class A signal power receivedby users at the cell edge on the PDSCH relative to theRS power.The value ranges from -15 to 15. The default value is-1.77.



Alpha This is an open loop power control parameter andindicates the path loss compensation coefficient.

Po(dBm) This is an open loop power control parameter.

TTI Bundling Indicates whether TTI Bundling is considered.By default, this option is not selected.

Multi-user Beamforming Determines whether to enable the Multi-userBeamforming function during downlink scheduling.

VMIMO Indicates whether the virtual multiple-input multiple-output (VMIMO) is considered.By default, this option is not selected.

IRC Indicates whether the interference rejection combining(IRC) function is enabled.If colored interference is strong, enable the IRC tosuppress combining signal interference and increaseuplink gain. By default, this option is not selected.



300


COMP Indicates whether the macro diversity gain function isenabled on the base station.Enable the macro diversity gain function on the uplinkfor the base station to increase cell edge capacity andaverage cell throughput. By default, this option is notselected.


Transmission Mode Indicates the transmission mode.For details, see Table 4-8.

VIP For a VIP cell, the value of some LTE Cell parameterscannot be changed, including the azimuth, electrical tilt,and pilot power.

Throughput(UL) Uplink throughput of a single subscriber. The valueranges from 0 to int.Max.The default value is 0.

Throughput(DL) Downlink throughput of a single subscriber. The valueranges from 0 to int.Max.The default value is 0.

Cell Throughput(UL) Uplink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0 toint.Max.The default value is 0.

Cell Throughput(DL) Downlink throughput of a cell. The value ranges from 0to int.Max.The default value is 0.

Density Density of subscribers. The value ranges from 0 toint.Max.The default value is 800.

Azimuth Locked Whether the azimuth is locked.

Azimuth Min. Value Minimum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The valueranges from -360 to 360.The default value is -20.

Azimuth Max. Value Maximum adjustment angle of the azimuth. The valueranges from -360 to 360.The default value is 20.

Electronic Downtilt Locked Whether the electrical tilt is locked.



301


Electronic Downtilt Min. Value Minimum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. Thevalue ranges from -90 to 90.The default value is -10.

Electronic Downtilt Max. Value Maximum adjustment angle of the electrical tilt. Thevalue ranges from -90 to 90.The default value is 14.

RsPower Locked Indicates whether the pilot power is locked.

RsPower Min. Value(dB) Minimum adjustment range of the pilot power. Thevalue ranges from 0 to 46.The default value is 10.

RsPower Max. Value(dB) Maximum adjustment range of the pilot power. Thevalue ranges from 0 to 46.The default value is 20.

Fitness Threshold(%) Fitness threshold. The value ranges from 0 to 100.The default value is 90.


State Cell status, which is used to determine a cell in outage.The value can be Working or Outage.The default value is Working.

Status Indicates the swapping status.l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in swapping state.l NEW: Indicates a new cell.l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell.The default value is NONE.

Advance Parameters Sets advanced parameters by clicking this button.For details, see Table 4-9.

DwPTS-GP-UpPTS Ratio of special subframes such as DwPTS, GP, andUpPTS.

Frame Configuration Ratio of uplink and downlink subframes.l The ratio of uplink, downlink, and special subframes

are included.l For example, the value of this parameter can be

DSUUUDSUUU.D, S, and U indicate the downlink subframe, specialsubframe, and uplink subframe respectively.

Neighbours list Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking this button.For details, see Table 4-10.



302


Propagation Models Sets the propagation model by clicking this button.For details, see Table 4-11.


Value Description















303

Table 4-9 Advance Parameters tab page




ICIC(UL) Indicates whether to perform inter-cell interferencecoordination (ICIC) on the uplink.l If inter-cell interference coordination (ICIC) is not






l When this parameter is set to Adaptive ICIC, ICIC canbe enabled automatically and edge band mode can beconfigured automatically. Users can plan the edge bandmodes and then deliver the band modes without havingto configure the parameter for the cells one by one.

Edge Frequency Style(UL) Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge usersin the uplink. The Reuse3 state is supported (Style1,Style2, or Style3).



304





l When the parameter is set to the Reuse3 or Reuse6 state,the CCU PA value is used for the cell center for all usersand the CEU PA value for cell edge. When the parameteris set to AllPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users inthe cell is set to the value of PA. When the parameter isset to LowPowerReuse1, the PA value for all users inthe cell is set to the value of CCU PA.

Power Control Indicates the power control on the downlink.

Edge Frequency Style Indicates the method of allocating frequencies to edge userson the uplink and downlink.





Table 4-10 Cell Neighbors tab page


Intra-frequency Neighbors Indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-frequency Neighbors Indicates a list of inter-frequency neighboring cells.

Inter-RAT Neighbors Indicates a list of inter-RAT neighboring cells.



305

Table 4-11 Propagation tab page



Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of the main propagationmodel.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation precision of the main propagationmodel.

Propagation Model Indicates the extension propagation model.

Radius(m) Indicates the calculation radius of the extended propagationmodel.

Resolution(m) Indicates the calculation precision of the extendedpropagation model.

General Tab Page

















306

Antenna Config Tab Page





















307














4.8 LTE-TDD PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

4.8.1 Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD PredictionThis chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculatinglink loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, andprediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function bylearning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDD Prediction Counters

This section describes the meanings of LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.



308

NOTE


Table 4-15 lists the LTE-TDD prediction counters supported by the U-Net.

Table 4-15 Description of LTE-TDD prediction counters

Category Counter Meaning


Best Server Cell with the highest DL RSRP among the cells thatreceive downlink signals.

DL RSRP Strength of single downlink reference signal (RS)received from the primary serving cell.

DL BandWidth RSRP Indicates the strength of downlink reference signalson the entire bandwidth.

DL RSSI Total power received by a UE on the entirebandwidth. The power includes the receive power ofthe serving cell, interference power of other cells,and the noise power of the UE.

PDSCH Signal Level Indicates the received power of the traffic channelRE.

Handover Area Whether an area is a handover area.

DL ICIC Zone Downlink ICIC area, that is, the downlink centralarea and edge area that meet the downlink ICICthreshold.

Pilot Pollution Determines whether a point has pilot pollution andcheck the number of cells producing pilot pollution.To obtain a more accurate result, you are advised toselect With Shadow.NOTE

By analyzing the number of cells covering each spot thatreaches the pilot pollution threshold, you can learn aboutpilot pollution in areas such as the poor coverage areaintuitively.


DL RS SINR Signal-to-interference-and-noise ratio (SINR) of thedownlink reference signal that a UE receives. Thiscounter reflects the quality of the downlink referencesignal.

PDSCH SINR Indicates the Signal Interference and Noise Ratio(SINR) of the traffic channel. This counter reflectsthe quality of the traffic channel.

DL RSRQ Quality of the received downlink reference signals.

PDCCH SINR Indicates the PDCCH SINR.



309

Category Counter Meaning

Coverage bySignal Level(UL)

UL RSRP Strength of the uplink reference signal on an RE.

PUSCH Signal Level Indicates the power that a cell receives on thePUSCH RE.

UL User RB TxPower Uplink transmit power on a resource block (RB).

UL User BandWidthTxPower

Indicates the uplink transmit power on the userbandwidth.

UL ICIC Zone Indicates the uplink ICIC area, that is, the uplinkcentral area and edge area that meet the uplink ICICthreshold.


UL RS SINR SINR of the uplink reference signal.

PUSCH SINR Indicates the SINR of the traffic channel. Thiscounter reflects the quality of the traffic channel.

Coverage byMCS(UL)

PUSCH MCS The highest MCS supported by the uplink PUSCH.

Coverage byMCS(DL)

PDSCH MCS The highest MCS supported by the downlinkPDSCH.


UL MAC PeakThroughput

Uplink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

UL Application PeakThroughput

Uplink peak throughput on the application layer.


DL MAC PeakThroughput

Downlink peak throughput on the MAC layer.

DL Application PeakThroughput

Downlink peak throughput on the application layer.





310


LTE-TDD Prediction AlgorithmBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality. This section describes the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm through a schematicdiagram.

Figure 4-8 shows the schematic diagram of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm.



311

Figure 4-8 LTE-TDD prediction algorithm

Table 4-16 describes the process of LTE-TDD prediction algorithm.

Table 4-16 Description of the LTE-TDD prediction algorithm

Step Operation Description

1 Traversing all the cells Determine whether the cells in the calculation area areactivated. If a cell is not activated, the predictioncounters of this cell are not calculated.



l If the path loss matrix exists, it can be obtaineddirectly.





312

Step Operation Description

4 Predicting slow fadingby using theshadowing margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges witha certain probability. Certain power of the base stationis reserved to prevent shadow fading. The reservedpower is called shadowing margin.You can enable the U-Net to take the shadowingmargin into account during the calculation of link loss.

5 Calculating the DLRSRP to determine theprimary serving cell

The DL RSRP indicates the receive level at thedownlink and it is a key counter in prediction. You candetermine the primary serving cell based on thiscounter.



7 Determining the targetRRU in the uplink

If a cell in the calculation area is an SFN cell, you mustdetermine the target RRU of the cell in the uplink.

8 Calculating countersof the traffic channeland common channelbased on the BIN

Calculating counters of the traffic channel andcommon channel such as DL RS SINR, PDSCHSINR, UL RS SINR, and PUSCH SINR based on theBIN





l Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gainof the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the basestation + Total loss of the base station

l Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antennagain of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading + Penetration loss - Antenna gain of thebase station + Total loss of the base station





313


Factor Meaning















Prerequisitesl Base stations (sites and cells) are available.l Propagation models are assigned to cells.

ContextYou can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.l Calculation



314




Procedure
















315


----End











316

Procedure





If ... Then ...





NOTE


Step 5 Click OK.

----End

4.8.4 Creating an LTE-TDD Prediction GroupThe U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists ofone or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.



Procedure






317



5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.

6. Click OK.



Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, andselect prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDDPrediction Counters.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.

Step 7 Click OK.


----End

Follow-up Procedure


4.8.5 Predicting Performance of a Single CellThe U-Net can perform a single cell prediction in a specified area. In this case, other cells aredeactivated by default. The single cell prediction enables you to effectively observe theprediction results of each cell in batches in the case that no interference to cells is caused.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data is imported.

l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.

l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the methodfor creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.

Procedure



Step 3 Choose New Single Cell Prediction from the shortcut menu. The New Prediction Group dialogbox is displayed.



318

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, andselect prediction counters. For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of LTE-TDDPrediction Counters.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For parameter description, see4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction Groups.

Step 7 Click OK.


----End

Follow-up Procedure

The number of prediction groups generated after a single-cell prediction is equal to the numberof cells in the map window. You can expand the Predictions node in the navigation tree to viewdetails.

4.8.6 Viewing Coverage Prediction ResultsYou can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicatorsby using the PDF or CDF diagram.

Procedurel View a prediction result in the map window. For details, see Querying Prediction

Statistical Results (on a Map).l View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see Viewing

Coverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).

----End

4.8.7 Analyzing the Prediction ResultAfter calculation on prediction, you can further analyze the prediction result. For example, afterimproving network parameters, you can re-analyze the prediction result and compare theprediction results before and after parameter adjustment. Based on the overall result of predictionanalysis, you can use the point-based analysis function to further analyze a focus object.

Context

The method of analyzing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same asthat for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.8.8 Analyzing the PredictionResult.

4.8.8 Exporting and Printing Prediction ResultsYou can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result byBin point.



319

ContextThe methods of exporting and printing a prediction result for networks in the LTE-TDD modeare the same as those for networks in the LTE-FDD mode.

Procedurel Export prediction results in batches. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in

Batches.l Export the detailed prediction result by Bin point. For details, see Exporting the Detailed

LTE-FDD Prediction Result by Bin Point.l Print prediction results in batches. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in

Batches.

----End

4.8.9 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT DataThe DT data can be used to rectify the coverage prediction group after its calculation is completein order to improve the origin authentication and simulation degree of feature database. Thishelps to improve the locating precision. The rectification is not required if DT data is unavailable,and this procedure can be ignored.

ContextThe method of verifying the feature database based on DT data in LTE-TDD is similar to thatin LTE-FDD. For detailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based onDT Data.

4.8.10 Exporting the Feature Database DataYou can export the feature database data after the prediction calculation is complete forgeographical locating.

ContextThe method of exporting the feature database in LTE-TDD is similar to that in LTE-FDD. Fordetailed operations, see 3.8.11 Exporting DT Feature Data.

4.8.11 Parameters for Creating LTE-TDD Prediction GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the propertiesof a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the NewPrediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the GroupProperties dialog box.



320






Parameter in the Group Properties dialog box



Name Name of a prediction group.

Resolution(m) Precision of the prediction.

Intra-Frequency Handover(dB) Handover threshold of intra-frequency cells.This parameter is valid only after HandoverArea is set.

Inter-Frequency Handover(dB) Handover threshold of inter-frequency cells.This parameter is valid only after HandoverArea is set.

Polygon Calculation area for the prediction.

Neighbour PDSCH Load Whether the load on the neighboring cell istaken into account in the calculation.The value ranges from 0 to 100.

Neighbour PDCCH Load Whether the PDCCH load on the neighboringcell is taken into account in the calculation.The value ranges from 0 to 100.

With Shadow Whether the shadow fading is taken intoaccount in the calculation.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability Probability of cell edge coverage, that is, theprobability that the receive signal strength isstronger than the specified threshold at theedge of a cell.



321


Indoor Coverage Whether the penetration loss is taken intoaccount.

Table 4-19 Parameters on the Condition tab page


Signal Level(DL)(dBm) Receive threshold of the downlink referencesignal.

Signal Level(UL)(dBm) Receive threshold of the uplink referencesignal.

Interferer Reception Threshold(dBm) Interference threshold.

Terminal Mobility type.



Table 4-20 Parameters on the Advanced tab page


Frequency Name Name of a frequency band.

Channel Index Frequency corresponding to a frequencyband.

4.9 LTE-TDD Capacity SimulationCapacity is important for radio network planning. The process of capacity simulation is asfollows: The U-Net generates a certain number of subscribers based on the traffic map andallocate network resources to the generated subscribers. Then, the U-Net analyzes the overallnetwork performance and collects the final capacity simulation results. Finally, the U-Netgenerates a statistical report.

ContextThe method of capacity simulation for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the same as that fornetworks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.9 LTE-FDD Capacity Simulation.

4.10 Planning LTE-TDD Network ParametersThis section describes how to properly plan the frequencies, PCIs, and PRACH channels of theLTE-TDD network by using the U-Net.



322

4.10.1 LTE PCI PlanningThe physical cell IDs (PCIs) of an LTE network is limited. Therefore, reuse of PCIs isunavoidable in LTE networking. To reduce the downlink interference of intra-frequency andco-PCI cells, you must assign a proper PCI to each cell. On the U-Net, you can enable the systemto automatically plan PCIs or you can manually plan a PCI for each cell. After the PCI planningis complete, you can check whether the PCI planning results are proper.

ContextFor PCI planning, see 3.10.1 LTE PCI Planning.

4.10.2 LTE PRACH PlanningTo ensure successful random access of the LTE-TDD network, you must plan the physicalrandom access channel (PRACH) parameters for each cell in the LTE-TDD network. PRACHplanning refers to the Zadoff-Chu Sequence (ZC) planning.

ContextThe method of planning PRACH parameters for networks in the LTE-TDD mode is the sameas that for networks in the LTE-FDD mode. For details, see 3.10.2 LTE PRACH Planning.

4.10.3 LTE-TDD Neighboring Cell PlanningAfter creating base stations, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the LTE network.You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells foreach cell one by one.

ContextThe method for planning neighboring cells in LTE-TDD network is the same as that in LTE-FDD network. For details, see 3.10.3 LTE-FDD Neighboring Cell Planning.

4.10.4 LTE Frequency PlanningAfter base stations are created, you must assign EARFCNs to cells on the network. The U-Netprovides three frequency reuse modes: 1x1+ICIC soft frequency, 1x1+ICIC downlink edge sixfrequency band, and 1x3 frequency reuse modes. When the frequency band is determined, youcan enable the U-Net to plan EARFCNs automatically or you can manually plan EARFCNs foreach cell.

ContextFor frequency planning, see 3.10.4 LTE Frequency Planning.

4.10.5 LTE Cell Automatic PlanningThis section describes how to perform LTE cell automatic planning. You can use this functionto adjust the electrical downtilt and azimuth of an antenna and transmission power of a cell sothat each prediction counter in the calculation area meets your configuration requirements. Thisreduces the dependence on network planning engineers' experience and the times of adjustingparameter settings.



323

ContextFor details about the LTE cell automatic planning, see 3.10.5 Automatically Planning LTECells.



324

5 GSM Network Planning

About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of the GSM network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cellparameters, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity to meet yournetwork planning requirements.

5.1 Process of GSM Network PlanningThis section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section whenplanning a GSM network by using the U-Net.





5.6 Setting GSM Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Trafficparameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 5 GSM Network Planning


325

environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Youmust ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.

5.7 Setting GSM NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

5.8 GSM PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell PlanningAfter creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. Youcan automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for eachcell one by one.

5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network PlanningThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the U-Net.

5.11 TSC PlanningThis section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created,you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based,and VAMOS-based TSC planning.

5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning



326

5.1 Process of GSM Network PlanningThis section describes the process of GSM network planning. You can refer to this section whenplanning a GSM network by using the U-Net.

Figure 5-1 shows the process of GSM network planning.

Figure 5-1 Process of GSM network planning

Table 5-1 describes the detailed information about Figure 5-1.



327

Table 5-1 Process of GSM network planning




You can import geographic data in various vector andgrid formats and set coordinate systems. You can alsoadd points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.Themethod for importing geographic data for differentnetwork systems to the U-Net is the same.For details, see3.3 Importing Geographic Data.



4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,or site equipment.The method for creating site equipmentfor different network systems on the U-Net is thesame.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.


Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services,which are to be used during prediction.For details, see5.6 Setting GSM Traffic Parameters.


You can import existing base station data to create basestations or use a base station template to automaticallycreate base stations. You can also create sites,transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 5.7Setting GSM NE Parameters.



8 Planningneighboring cells

For details, see 5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell Planning .The planning results can be applied to NEs.


For details, see 5.8 GSM Prediction.

10 Planning TSC For details, see 5.11 TSC Planning.



5.2 Creating a ProjectThis section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates fordifferent network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template.



328

Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.


to the network planning for an area or a city.

l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybridnetwork.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > New. The Project Templates dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.


Step 2 Select a project template.

l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select anappropriate project template based on the actual network system.

l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. Forexample, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to selectproject templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks.


Step 3 Click OK.

----End



You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.



329

The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder forsaving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacitysimulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.

NOTE


l Open an existing project file.

Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.

NOTE



Context

The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is thesame. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.


Context

The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systemson the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.



Context

The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is thesame. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.



330

5.6 Setting GSM Traffic ParametersThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and therefore calculates various counters of the radio network. Trafficparameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution. Youmust ensure that the traffic parameters are defined before prediction.

5.6.1 Setting MOSThis section describes how to set the Mean Opinion Score (MOS). The MOS indicates the qualityof calls in the current network status. You can refer to this section to modify the attributes ofMOS as required. You can also create new MOS types if the existing MOS types do not meetyour requirements.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > GSM.

Step 3 Right-click and then choose MOS from the shortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-3. The MOSTable dialog box is displayed

Figure 5-3 MOS

Step 4 Set related parameters to create or modify MOS types by referring to Table 5-2.You can set the new MOS type in the blank line (marked with *) of the dialog box.

Table 5-2 Description of parameters in the MOS Table dialog box

Parameter Meaning

Index Indicates the MOS index.



331

Parameter Meaning

Name Indicates the name of the speech coding scheme.

Mobility Indicates the mobility type of a receiving device.

C/(I+N)-MOS Indicates the signal-to-noise ratio of the MOS.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.6.2 Setting GSM Service TypesSet the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parametersof existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate service types.

ContextThe U-Net provides three default GSM service types: GSMVoice, GSMMobile InternetAccess, and GSMMultimedia Messaging Service.

Procedure



Option Description

If... Then...

Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >Services > GSM.

2. Choose New from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-4.3. Set parameters for the new service type by referring to

Table 5-3.

Modify an existing service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >Services > GSM > An existing service type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by

referring to Table 5-3.



332

Figure 5-4 New

Table 5-3 Parameters for setting GSM services

Parameter Meaning

Name Indicates the name of a service type.

Type Indicates a service type.l CSServie: CS services.l PSServie: PS services.

Priority Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services. Theweighting factor is assigned depending on the service priority.The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Body Loss(dB) Indicates the loss due to the human body.

Activity Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameter isrequired for only CS services.l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from 0

to 1.

AMR Rate(kbit/s) Indicates the rate of CS services. The unit is kbit/s.The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

FER(%) Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.



333

Parameter Meaning


Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to


from 0 to 104.NOTE

Minimum throughput ≤ Average throughput ≤ Maximum throughput


Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from 0 to


from 0 to 104.NOTE



Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: average uplink throughput.l Downlink: average downlink throughput.NOTE



Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate.l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0

to 1.

IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0 to100.

Offset(kbit/s) Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is the lengthadded to an encapsulated packet during the transmission at the MACor RLC layer.l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to 100.l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to

100.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

5.6.3 Setting GSM ReceiversYou can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do notmeet the requirements, you can create receiver types.



334

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > GSM.




Create a receiver type. Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (markedwith *) in the dialog box. Set Link Type.


Go to Step 5 directly.

Step 5 Double-click the first column of the receiver and set property parameters in the displayed dialogbox. For detailed description of parameters, see Table 5-4.

Step 6 Click OK.

Table 5-4 Parameters for setting GSM receivers

Parameter Meaning


LinkType Indicates whether a receiver is on the uplink or downlink.

Mobility Indicates the mobility type of a receiver.For details about how to create or modify a mobility type,see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER).

Demodulation l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services ifthis parameter is located in the PSService area. Youcan double-click the related cell to set this parameter.

l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services ifthis parameter is located in the CSService area. Youcan double-click the related cell to set this parameter.

FER(%) Indicates the frame error rate.

Voice Code Model Indicates a voice coding scheme.

C/(I+N) Threshold Indicates the threshold of the SINR for CS or PS services.

C/(I+N)-Throughput Indicates the SINR throughput of CS or PS services.

----End



335

5.6.4 Setting GSM Terminal TypesSet the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters ofexisting terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate terminal types.

Procedure





1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >GSM.



1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >GSM > An existing terminal type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table

5-5.

Table 5-5 Parameters for setting GSM terminal types

Parameter Meaning


Support Frequency Band Indicates the main frequency used by a terminal.





Attenuation(dB) Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.


Reception Equipment Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.For details, see 5.6.3 Setting GSM Receivers.

Number of Transmission Antennas Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter fora terminal.



336

Parameter Meaning

Number of Reception Antennas Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for aterminal.

Code Configuration Indicates a voice coding scheme.

Technology Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.

Number of TimeSlots(DL) Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supportedon the downlink.This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSMbecause a GSM user occupies only one channel.

Number of Timeslots(UL) Indicates the maximum number of timeslots supportedon the uplink.This parameter is invalid if Technology is set to GSMbecause a GSM user occupies only one channel.

Support Half-Rate Indicates whether the half rate is supported.

Support DTX Indicates whether DTX is supported.

----End


ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net sets mobility types in the same way. For details,see 3.6.7 Setting Mobility Types.

5.7 Setting GSM NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.




337

ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. Fordetails, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.


ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.

5.7.3 Setting a GSM BTS TemplateThis section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations byusing the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet yourrequirements, you can customize a base station template.






338

2. The Available Templates area displays the currently available base station templates.

Select the default template from the drop-down list next to Default.


Such as .l Create a base station template.



2. Set properties of the BTS template. For detailed description of parameters, seeParameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.


1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.3. Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of

parameters, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.4. Click OK.

----End




5.7.4 Creating a Base Station AutomaticallyThe system supports creating a single site automatically or creating a series of base stations withthe same property in batches. For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base stationautomatically in the same way.


5.7.5 Creating a RepeaterThis section describes how to create repeaters. A repeater receives, amplifies, and forwards theRF carriers launched or transmitted in the uplink and downlink. A repeater includes two sides,that is, the donor side and the serving cell side. The donor side of a repeater receives signals



339

from the donor transmitter. The signals may be carried by links of different types, such as radiolinks or microwave links. The serving cell side forwards the received signals. For networks ofdifferent types, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way.

Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.

5.7.7 Setting GSM Cell ParametersThis section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you canset cell parameters.

Procedure



Step 3 Choose Properties from the shortcut menu. See Figure 5-6.


Step 4 Set the properties of GSM cells on the GSMTRX tab page. For detailed description ofparameters, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM Cells.



340

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting GSM NE ParametersThis section describes the parameters for setting GSM NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates

This section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying theproperties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base stationtemplates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.

Site Tab Page







Transceiver Area on the GSM Tab Page




Model Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.


First Sector Azimuth Indicates the azimuth of the first antenna.

Mechanical Downtilt Indicates the mechanical downtilt.

Electrical Downtilt Indicates the electrical downtilt.





341



General Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab PageParameter Description

Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power.

IoT Target(UL) Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) on theuplink.

DTX Indicates whether the discontinuous transmission (DTX) isused.

TRX Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.

Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range isfrom 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range isfrom 0 to 1.



Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the GSM Tab PageParameter Description






Parameters for Setting the Parameters of GSM CellsThis section describes the parameters for creating a GSM cell or modifying the properties of aGSM cell.



342

Table 5-6 GSMCell tab page


Name Indicates the name of a cell.

Active Indicates whether to activate the current cell.


Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load in the downlink. The valueranges from 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load in the uplink. The valueranges from 0 to 1.

DTX Indicates whether discontinuous transmission (DTX)is used.

IoT Target(UL) Indicates the target Interfere Over Thermal (IoT) inthe uplink.

Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power of atransceiver.When the value of Max Power(dBm), FrequencyBand, or PB(dB) is changed, the systemautomatically calculates the value of RS Power(dBm).

MS Max Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum transmit power of an MS. Theunit is dBm.


SynchroRank Indicates the synchronization parameter.

TRX Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power of a TRX.

Coverage Type Indicates the cell coverage type used during capacityplanning.

Co-BCCH Signal Difference Indicates the signal strength difference betweenGSM900 and GSM1800.

Mapping Cell Indicates the indoor mapping cell.

Use In Capability Indicates whether the cell is used for capacityabsorption.




LAC Indicates a location area code.




343


CGI Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).

RAC Indicates the routing area code (RAC).

BSC ID Indicates the ID of the BSC that a cell belongs to.

BTS ID Indicates the ID of the BTS that a cell belongs to.

Local Cell ID Indicates the internal code of a cell for differentiatingthe cell from other cells under the same BSC.

BSC Name Indicates the name of a base station controller (BSC).

Module Type Indicates the type of a module.

Module Info Indicates the module information.

TRX Number Indicates the number of TRXs.

Max TRX Number Indicates the number of TRXs that can be configuredin a cell.

Status Indicates the swapping status.l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in swapping

state.l NEW: Indicates a new cell.l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell.The default value is NONE.

Hopping Mode Indicates the hopping mode of a cell. This parametercan be set to one of the following values:l NO_FHl BaseBand_FHl Hybrid_FHl RF_FH

Frame Offset Indicates the frame offset.

BSIC Indicates the base transceiver station identity code(BSIC).

BCCH Indicates the absolute radio frequency channelnumber (ARFCN) of the BCCH TRX in a cell.

TCH Indicates the collection of ARFCNs of the TCHTRXs in a cell.

MAIO Indicates the collection of mobile allocation indexoffsets (MAIOs) of TRXs in a cell.

AFPFreqNum Indicates the number of GSM TRXs generated by onerow of data when users import the engineeringparameters.



344


HSN Indicates the hopping sequence number (HSN) of acell. The value range is from 0 to 63.

MA Indicates the collection of frequency hoppingARFCNs.

MAIO Plan Indicates the MAIO planning information.

TSC Indicates the training sequence code (TSC).

VAMOS Main TSC Indicates the primary training sequence code forVAMOS.

VAMOS Sub TSC Indicates the secondary training sequence code forVAMOS.

Vendor Indicates the device manufacturer.


Propagation Models Indicates a propagation model.

















345





















346














5.8 GSM PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

5.8.1 Basic Knowledge of GSM PredictionThis chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculatinglink loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, andprediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function bylearning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of GSM Prediction CountersThis section describes the meanings of the GSM prediction counters. The U-Net can be used topredict multiple GSM counters.



347

NOTE


Table 5-10 lists the GSM prediction counters supported by the U-Net.

Table 5-10 Description of GSM prediction counters



DL BCCH SignalLevel

Indicates the strength of the downlink BCCH signalsreceived by a terminal.

Best Server Indicates the cell that has the strongest DL BCCHsignal strength among the cells that receive downlinksignals.

DL TCH Signal Level Indicates the strength of the downlink traffic signalsreceived by a terminal.


DL BCCH CIR Indicates the quality of received downlink BCCHsignals.

DL Service CIR Indicates the receive quality of the downlink TCH/PDCH.

Geometry Indicates a geographical factor, which represents thedifference between the highest receive power and theinterference power.


UL Service CIR Indicates the receive quality of the uplink TCH/PDCH.

CoverageAreaAnalysis

Coding Scheme Indicates the best coding scheme that you can selectaccording to channels.

MOS Indicates the mean opinion score (MOS), which isused for assessing voice quality.

Handover Area Indicates whether an area is a handover area.

Coverage Area Indicates the coverage area of the current network.


DL PDCH MAC PeakThroughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the downlinkPDCH at the MAClayer.

DL PDCHApplication PeakThroughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the downlinkPDCH at the application layer.


UL PDCH MAC PeakThroughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCHat the MAC layer.



348


UL PDCHApplication PeakThroughput

Indicates the peak throughput of the uplink PDCHat the application layer.

Procedure for Performing Coverage Prediction

This section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.



GSM Prediction Algorithm

By calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality. This section describes the GSM prediction algorithm through a schematic chart.

Figure 5-8 shows the schematic chart of the GSM prediction algorithm.



349

Figure 5-8 GSM prediction algorithm

Table 5-11 describes the process of GSM prediction algorithm.

Table 5-11 Description of the GSM prediction algorithm

Procedure


1 Traversing all the cells Determines whether the cells in the calculation areaare activated. If a cell is not activated, the predictioncounters of this cell are not calculated.



350

Procedure



l If the path loss matrix does not exist, it needs to becalculated.

l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can bedirectly obtained.



4 Predicting slow fadingby using the shadowfading margin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges witha certain probability, certain power of the base stationis reserved against the shadow fading. The reservedpower is called shadowing margin.You can enable the U-Net to consider the shadowingmargin during the calculation of link loss.

5 Calculating the DLBCCH to determinethe primary servingcell

DL BCCH indicates the receive level of the downlinkbroadcast frequency and it is a key counter inprediction. You can determine the primary serving cellbased on this counter.



7 Calculating countersof traffic channels andcommon channelsbased on the Binpoints

You can calculate the required counters and customcounters such as DL BCCH Rx Power, Best Server,power of interference noises, and handover area of Binpoints.


The U-Net displays the prediction results in differentcolors in a window and provides a prediction report.

Basic Knowledge of Link Loss

Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculatinglink loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadowfading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink.


l Uplink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antenna gainof the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station

l Downlink loss = Loss caused by the human body + Feeder loss of the terminal - Antennagain of the terminal + Antenna attenuation of the terminal + Path loss + Shadow fading +Penetration loss - Antenna gain of the base station + Total loss of the base station



351




Factor Meaning







Antenna fading of aterminal

Fading of the antenna on a terminal.









Prerequisitesl Base stations (sites and cells) are available.



352

l Propagation models are assigned to cells.

ContextYou can manually calculate the path loss in calculation or force calculation mode.

l Calculation



l Force calculation

If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of thevalidity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checksthe validity of calculation results and updates the results.

Procedure
















353


----End











354

Procedure





If ... Then ...





NOTE


Step 5 Click OK.

----End

5.8.4 Creating a GSM Prediction GroupThe U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists ofone or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.



Procedure






355






Figure 5-10 New

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, andselect prediction counters.For indicator description, see Basic Knowledge of GSM PredictionCounters.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties.For parameter description, see5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction Groups.

Step 7 Click OK.


----End

Follow-up ProcedureAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can recalculate KPIs, add or delete KPIs, andview detailed KPI result reports. For details, see 3.8.6 Managing the Prediction Result.

5.8.5 Viewing the Prediction ResultYou can view the prediction result in the map window or view the statistics on various indicatorsby using the PDF or CDF diagram.


Statistical Results (on a Map).



356

l View a prediction result by using the PDF or CDF diagram. For details, see ViewingCoverage Prediction Statistical Results (in a PDF/CDF Chart).

----End

5.8.6 Analyzing Prediction ResultsThe U-Net supports the function of comparing similar predictions to identify the differences.This helps you to quickly know the impact of changes on the network.

Procedure





Step 5 Calculate the duplicate prediction group.1. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > copied prediction group.2. Choose Calculate from the shortcut menu.


NOTE




----End



1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.



357

5. Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.






menu.

5.8.7 Exporting GSM Planning ResultsYou can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result byBin point.

Exporting Prediction Results in BatchesAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then exporta statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.

ContextThe method for exporting statistics for prediction results in batches for different network systemsfrom the U-Net is the same. For details, see Exporting Prediction Results in Batches.

Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Result by Bin PointAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Binpoints in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinaland latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.




If... Then...





358

If... Then...



3. Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.

4. In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.

5. Click Export.l Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to

single-mode networks.

You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of aBin point within the range.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.

2. Select the objects to be exported.

If... Then...




In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx> DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH SignalLevel.

NOTE

You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.

3. Choose Export BIN By > DL BCCH Signal Level or DL TCH Signal Level fromthe shortcut menu.

– When you perform prediction calculation, select at least one of the preceding twoindicators. Otherwise, you cannot export the result of a Bin point by pilot power.


4. In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.

The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specifiedrange.

5. Click Export.l Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicable

only to single-mode networks.




359

2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > DL BCCH Signal Level.3. Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu.The dialog box

as shown in Figure 5-11 is displayed.

4. Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top Nrecords to be exported.

5. Click Export.6. After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.

NOTE

l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include DL BCCH SignalLevel when you create a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-12.

l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value ofTopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 5-13. This valuespecifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.

Figure 5-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box

Figure 5-12 Indicator selection



360

Figure 5-13 Property setting

----End

Follow-up Procedure

You can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.

The exported contents mainly include:

l X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinatesare exported.

l Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.

Printing Prediction Results in Batches

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters inbatches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.



361

ContextThe method for printing prediction results in batches for different network systems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see Printing Prediction Results in Batches.


Prerequisitesl The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or

created.l The coverage prediction for DL BCCH Signal Level is complete.l The DT data file has been imported.

ContextThe method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. Fordetailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.


ContextFor detailed operations of exporting the feature database in GSM, see Export the top N recordsof the reception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed GSM Prediction Resultby Bin Point.

5.9 GSM Neighboring Cell PlanningAfter creating BTSs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the GSM network. Youcan automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells for eachcell one by one.

5.9.1 Basic Knowledge of Neighboring Cell PlanningThis section describes basic knowledge of neighboring cell planning. Proper neighborrelationships ensure that a UE at the edge of a serving cell can be handed over in time and thatthe handover gain is obtained. This helps to reduce intra-RAT interference, improve the QoS ofthe network, and ensure stable network performance. The purpose of neighboring cell planningis to properly configure neighbor relationships during the construction or expansion of a network.

Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whetherneighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance.Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency.



362

Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustmentsto the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.

















NOTE


5.9.2 Importing Neighboring RelationsThis section describes how to import neighbor relationships. The U-Net provides the functionof importing neighbor relationships, through which the existing neighbor relationships on thenetwork can be imported into the U-Net. This helps to plan neighboring cells according to theactual situation of the network.


cells.



363





technology.

Procedure








Step 6 Click OK.

----End

5.9.3 Planning GSM Neighboring CellsThe U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enablethe U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handoverproblems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.



into the U-Net.

Procedure




364

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.



Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.2Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring Cells.

Step 5 Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.5 Parameters for ViewingNeighboring Cell Planning Results.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

l Set the mode and colors for displaying neighboring relationships in the map window.


2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.

3. Choose Display Option from the shortcut menu.

4. In the displayed dialog box, set the mode and colors for displaying neighboringrelationships in the map window. For details about the parameters, see 5.10.3Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of Neighboring Cells.

5. Click OK.

l Export the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results.



3. Right-click and choose Export Other Vendor's Neighbor Relations > file exportformat from the shortcut menu.



365

NOTE

The file can be saved in .xls or .xlsx format.

For the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results, U-Net exports one file for each vendorto the specified directory.

5.9.4 Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell PlanningThis section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planningis complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modifyneighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.


Procedure



NOTE






In the main window of the U-Net, click a cell in the Cell Namearea. Alternatively, click a certain cell in the map window, asshown in Figure 5-15.The neighboring cell relationships of the selected cell aredisplayed in the table in the Cell Name area and in the mapwindow simultaneously.

Filter neighboring cells 1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Filterfrom the shortcut menu..

2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialog box. For details, see5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and FilterConditions Based on Neighboring Relations.





366



Right-click in the Cell Name area of the main window and chooseRemove Filter from the shortcut menu. The table in the Cell areaswitches back to the state when no filter criterion is used, and thecolor of filtered cells in the map window is cleared.NOTE



1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, right-click thetable and choose Statistic from the shortcut menu.

2. Set audit conditions in the displayed dialog box. For details,see 5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and FilterConditions Based on Neighboring Relations.



1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, Choose Exportfrom the shortcut menu..






1. In the Cell Name area of the main window, select a cell whoseneighboring cell relationships need to be adjusted.




367















1. Right-click in the Cell Name area of the main window andchoose Clear Existed Neighbors from the shortcut menu.





368




369

Figure 5-16 Filter

----End

5.10 Interface Reference to GSM Network PlanningThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for GSM network planning by using the U-Net.

5.10.1 Parameters for Creating GSM Prediction GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the propertiesof a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the NewPrediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the GroupProperties dialog box.

Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog Box







370



Parameters in the GSM Group Properties Dialog Box



Name Indicates the name of a prediction group.

Resolution(m) Indicates the prediction precision.

Handover Threshold(dB) Indicates the handover area threshold.

Polygon Indicates the area calculated in prediction.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, thatis, the probability that the receive signal strength isstronger than the specified threshold at the edge of acell.

With Shadow Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in thecalculation.

Indoor Coverage Indicates whether penetration loss is considered inthe calculation.



Signal Level(dBm) Indicates the receive threshold of the downlinkreference signal.






TopNSignalLevel Indicates the number of top receive levels to beranked.



371


TrxDTXFactor Indicates the DTX factor.

5.10.2 Parameters for Planning GSM Neighboring CellsThis section describes the parameters for planning GSM neighboring cells.



Methods Select Indicates a network planning scenario to be selected.l Topology: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of network

topology.l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis of prediction

results. This method applies only to outdoor base stations.l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cells on the basis

of both the network topology and the prediction results.

Max Neighbor Distance(km)

Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.If the distance between two cells exceeds the specified value, thetwo cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.

Planning Neighbor basedon existed Neighbors

Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboringrelationships.If this option is not selected, the existing neighboringrelationships are deleted and neighboring cells are replanned.

Force Co-Site AsNeighbor

Indicates that internal cells are forcibly configured asbidirectional neighboring cells.

Co-Site Distance(m) Configures the two cells as bidirectional neighboring cells whenthe distance between the two cells is smaller than the value of thisparameter.

Swapped out cells takeninto planning

Indicates whether swapped-out cells need to be planned.

Reference ExistedNeighbors

Indicates whether existing neighboring cells need to be referred.



372


Reference Rules Click Reference Rules and configure reference rules in thedisplayed window.l Source Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band to

be planned.l Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency band

of the neighboring cell.l Referenced Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the frequency

band of the referenced cell.l Reference Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the

frequency band of the neighboring cell of the referenced cell.

Azimuth Difference(°) Indicates the azimuth difference between the cells to be plannedand the cells used for reference.

Reference Site Distance(m)

Indicates the distance difference between the site of the cells tobe planned and the site of the cells used for reference.

Consider HandoverStatistics

Indicates whether to consider the handover data and the path forsaving the handover data.

Planning Weight Indicates the weight of the planning result upon neighboring cellranking.

Handover StatisticsWeight

Indicates the weight of the handover data upon neighboring cellranking.

Resolution(m) Indicates the precision for the calculation.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Handover Area Percent(%)

Indicates the handover area proportion.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Compute Shadowing Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in the calculation.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.



373



Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage. This parameteris valid only when shadow fading is considered. The value of thisparameter is directly proportional to the value of shadowingfading.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.NOTE

This parameter is valid when you select Compute Shadowing.

Compute Indoor Loss Indicates whether the penetration loss is considered in thecalculation.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Indicates the minimum signal receive level.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Handover Threshold(dB) Indicates the handover area threshold.You can set this parameter in the Prediction ParameterSetting window after you click Setting when the networkplanning scenario is set to Prediction or Topology +Prediction.

Automatic generatePlanning Cells

Automatically generates cells to be planned.NOTE

You can select new cells and related cells as cells to be planned.

Area Indicates the planning area.l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to select

only the cells to be planned in the area.l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to be

found, set the search direction, and set whether to match cases.



374

Table 5-17 Parameters on the Intra-Technology tab page


Force Symmetry Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectionalneighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.If this option is selected during network capacity expansion,the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured asbidirectional neighboring cells, adjusting the originalneighbor relationship table.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for a newly established indoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for an existing indoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for an existing outdoor cell.



Table 5-18 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboringcell planning)


Total Max Number Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.

ARFCN Indicates the UTRA absolute radio frequency channelnumber (UARFCN) to be handed over when the RAT isswitched to UMTS.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Indicates the minimum signal receive level.

Handover Threshold(dB) Indicates the handover area threshold.



375

5.10.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of NeighboringCells














Legend Description









376

Legend Description




5.10.4 Parameters for Setting the Audit and Filter Conditions Basedon Neighboring Relations






















377





5.10.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell Planning ResultsThis section describes the parameters for viewing neighbor relationships. You can refer to thissection when viewing neighboring cell planning results after the neighboring cell planning iscomplete.



Intra-Technology Indicates intra-technology neighboring cells.













378

5.11 TSC PlanningThis section describes the training sequence code (TSC) planning. After a base station is created,you can plan the TSCs at a GSM site. You can use the U-Net to perform common, IBCA-based,and VAMOS-based TSC planning.

The VAMOS feature increases the GSM network capacity when the network cannot be expandeddue to restricted frequency. The IBCA feature improves voice quality and network performancewithout new hardware.

In the VAMOS-based TSC planning, orthogonal TSCs are used to multiplex two subscribers tothe same timeslot to increase voice capacity, but the voice quality decreases accordingly. Theorthogonal TSCs need to be configured in pair to avoid intra-frequency interference when twoVAMOS subscribers are using the same timeslot of the same frequency.

In the IBCA-based TSC planning, the IBCA algorithm is used to search interference calls andallocate the channels with the minimum interference to subscribers. In this way, networkperformance can be improved. The IBCA feature improves channel quality by reducing theinterference traffic. Therefore, TSCs need to be configured to ensure the minimum ofinterference traffic of the same TSC station. Manual configuration of TSCs is complicated. Inthis case, the U-Net is required.

5.11.1 Planning TSCThis section describes how to perform TSC planning for the allocation of TSCs in cells and atsites in GSM networks. The planning result can be used for the VAMOS and IBCA features.

PrerequisitesBase station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.

Procedure


Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, click GSM TSC Planning in the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click GSM TSC Planning and choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu,as shown in Figure 5-17.



379


Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.1 Parameters forTSC Planning.

Step 5 Click Run.l You can right-click GSM TSC Planning on the Operation tab page and choose Stop from

the shortcut menu to stop the planning of TSCs.l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. For

details, see 5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning Result.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

l Set the color of cells displayed in the map window for different TSC planning modes.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. On the displayed Operation tab page, click GSM TSC Planning in the navigation

tree.3. Right-click TSC Planning and choose GSM Display Option from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed TSC Display Options dialog box, set the color of cells displayed in

the map window for different TSC planning modes. For details, see 5.12.5 Parametersfor Setting the TSC Display Effect.

5. Click OK.

5.11.2 Managing the TSC Planning ResultThis section describes how to manage the TSC planning result. After the TSC planning iscomplete, you can apply and export the planning result.

Prerequisites

The TSC planning is complete.

Procedure

Step 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.



380

Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select GSM TSC Planning in the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click GSM TSC Planning and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu, as shown inFigure 5-18.

Figure 5-18 Open TSC Table



Export the TSC planning result 1. Right-click in the TSC PlanningDisplay window and choose Export fromthe shortcut menu.

2. Set parameters in the displayed DataExport dialog box. For details, seeParameters in the Data Export DialogBox.

3. Click Export.4. Set the file format and file name and

specify the saving path. Then, clickSave.

After the data is exported successfully, youcan open it to view and modify the data.

Enable the map window and the planningresult table to display the TSC planning resultsimultaneously

1. In the TSC Planning Display window,click a row heading. Alternatively, click acertain cell in the map window.

2. Information about the selected cell isdisplayed in the map window and theplanning result table in the right pane ofthe TSC Planning Display windowsimultaneously, as shown in Figure5-19.

NOTEYou need to select GSM TSC Planning in thenavigation tree so that the selected cell can bedisplayed in the map window.



381


Enable the U-Net to display or hide certaincolumns

1. In the right pane of the TSC PlanningDisplay window, right-click a certaintable heading and choose DisplayColumns from the shortcut menu.

2. In the displayed Columns to bedisplayed dialog box, select or clear thecheck boxes of columns to be displayed orhidden.

NOTEYou can right-click a certain table heading in theTSC Planning Display window and choose HideColumns from the shortcut menu to hide theselected column.

Figure 5-19 Display



382

----End

5.11.3 IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell PlanningThis section describes how to perform IBCA interference neighboring cell planning. The IBCAfeature improves voice quality and network performance in GSM networks. The configurationdata of interference neighboring cells is required for the IBCA feature, which can be obtainedafter the interference neighboring cell planning is complete.

Prerequisitesl Base station information has been created and imported, including sites, transceivers, and

cells.l The parameters MA and MAIO Plan have been configured for the cells.

Procedure


Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor in thenavigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Automatic Allocation from theshortcut menu, as shown in Figure 5-20.


Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 5.12.3 Parameters forIBCA Interference Neighboring Cell Planning.

Step 5 Click Run.l You can right-click GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor on the Operation tab page and

choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop the planning of IBCA interference neighboringcells.

l The planning result is displayed in the lower area in the main window of the U-Net. Fordetails, see 5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA Interference NeighboringCell Planning.

----End



383

5.11.4 Managing the Result of IBCA Interference Neighboring CellPlanning

This section describes how to manage the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning.After the planning is complete, you can export the planning result.

PrerequisitesThe planning of IBCA interference neighboring cells is complete.

Procedure


Step 2 On the displayed Operation tab page, select GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor in thenavigation tree.

NOTEYou need to select GSM IBCA Interference Neighbor so that the IBCA interference neighboring cellrelationships can be displayed in the map window.

Step 3 Right-click IBCA Interference Neighbor and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. TheIBCA Interference Neighbor window is displayed.


If... Then...

You want to export the result of IBCAinterference neighboring cell planning

1. In the IBCA Interference Neighborwindow, right-click in the left pane andchoose Export from the shortcut menu, asshown in Figure 5-21.

2. Set parameters in the displayed DataExport dialog box. For details, seeParameters in the Data Export DialogBox.

3. Click Export.4. Set the file format and file name and

specify the saving path. Then, clickSave.

After the data is exported to a file, you canopen it to view and modify the data.

You want to enable the map window todisplay the result of IBCA interferenceneighboring cell planning together with thatin the planning result table

1. In the IBCA Interference Neighborwindow, click a cell in the left pane.Alternatively, click a certain cell in themap window.

2. In the right pane of the IBCAInterference Neighbor window, theinterference neighboring cells of theselected cell is displayed in the mapwindow and the planning result table atthe same time, as shown in Figure 5-22.



384

Figure 5-21 Export

Figure 5-22 IBCA Interference Neighbor

----End

5.12 Interface Reference to TSC Parameter Planning5.12.1 Parameters for TSC Planning

This section describes the parameters used for TSC planning in GSM networks. You can referto this section when setting planning parameters in the TSC Parameter Setting dialog box.



385


Planning on Network planning scenariol Common asynchronous network: TSC

planning is performed on a commonasynchronous network.

l IBCA network: TSC planning isperformed on an IBCA network.

l VAMOS asynchronous network: TSCplanning is performed on a VAMOSasynchronous network.

l VAMOS synchronization network:TSC planning is performed on a VAMOSsynchronization network.

Planning based on l Site: TSC planning is performed based onsites.

l Cell: TSC planning is performed based oncells.

Planning TSC based on existed TSC If this item is selected, TSC planning isperformed based on existing TSCs.

Data l Interference Matrix Path: directory ofthe interference matrix file to be imported.NOTE

Set parameters in the Data Import dialog box.For details, see Parameters in the DataImport Dialog Box.

l The count of interference: maximumnumber of interference neighboring cells.The value ranges from 1 to 10.

Area Planning areaYou can select all the cells in an area or clickFilter and select only the cells to be plannedin the area.If you select Full Map, all the cells on themap are to be planned.You can set filter criteria such as Directionand Match case in the Filter dialog box.

5.12.2 Parameters for Viewing the TSC Planning ResultThis section describes the parameters for viewing the TSC planning result. You can refer to thissection when viewing the TSC planning result in the TSC Planning Display area after the TSCplanning is complete.



386


Site Name Name of a site.

Site ID ID of a site.

Cell Name Name of a cell.

CI ID of a cell.

Existed TSC Existing TSC.

Existed VamosMainTSC Existing VAMOS main TSC.

Existed VamosSubTSC Existing VAMOS sub-TSC.

Existed TSC Group Existing VAMOS TSC group.

Suggest TSC Suggested TSC, that is, the TSC planningresult.Suggest indicates that the obtained data afterthe TSC planning has not been applied toNEs.

Suggest VamosMainTSC Obtained VAMOS main TSC after theplanning.

Suggest VamosSubTSC Obtained VAMOS sub-TSC after theplanning.

Suggest TSC Group Obtained VAMOS TSC group after theplanning.

Confirm TSC Confirmed TSC.By default, the value of Confirm TSC is thesame as that of Suggest TSC. You can changethe value manually.You submit the value of Confirm TSC as theTSC planning result.

Confirm VamosMainTSC Confirmed VAMOS main TSC.

Confirm VamosSubTSC Confirmed VAMOS sub-TSC.

Confirm TSC Group Confirmed VAMOS TSC group.

5.12.3 Parameters for IBCA Interference Neighboring Cell PlanningThe section describes the parameters used for IBCA interference neighboring cell planning inGSM networks. You can refer to this section when setting planning parameters in the IBCAInterference Neighbor dialog box.



387


Data l Interference Matrix Path: directory ofthe interference matrix file to be imported.NOTE

Set planning parameters in the Data Importdialog box. For details, see Parameters in theData Import Dialog Box.

l The count of interference: maximumnumber of interference neighboring cells.The value ranges from 1 to 64.

Interference sort strategy Mode for ranking interference neighboringcells.l Interferenced traffic to others: ranking

interference neighboring cells byinterference traffic of other cells causedby an interference neighboring cell.

l Interferenced traffic by others: rankinginterference neighboring cells byinterference traffic of an interferenceneighboring cell caused by other cells.

l Total Interference: Interferenceneighboring cells are ranked based on thesum of the interference traffic of othercells caused by an interferenceneighboring cell and the interferencetraffic of an interference neighboring cellcaused by other cells.

Area Planning area.You can select all the cells in an area or clickFilter and select only the cells to be plannedin the area.If you select Full Map, all the cells on themap are to be planned.You can set filter criteria such as Directionand Match case in the Filter dialog box.

5.12.4 Parameters for Viewing the Result of IBCA InterferenceNeighboring Cell Planning

This section describes the parameters in the IBCA Interference Neighbor window. You canrefer to this section when viewing the result of IBCA interference neighboring cell planning.


Cell Name Name of an interference neighboring cell.



388


CI ID of a cell.

Co Traffic Co-frequency interference traffic.

Adj Traffic Adjacent frequency interference traffic.

Interference Relation Interference relationship.This parameter is used to determine co-frequency and adjacent frequencyinterference, co-frequency interference, andadjacent frequency interference based oninterference probability.

5.12.5 Parameters for Setting the TSC Display EffectThis section describes the parameters used for setting the TSC display effect in the TSC DisplayOptions dialog box.


TSC Indicates the rendering effect for commonTSCs.

Vamos TSC Indicates the rendering effect for the VAMOSTSCs.

Selected Cell Color Indicates the color of the source cell.

Co-TSCCell Color Indicates the color of cells with the same TSCvalue as that of the source cell in the TSCplanning.

Co-TSCPair Cell Indicates the color of cells with the value ofVamosMainTSC being the same as that ofVamosMainTSC in the source cell in theVAMOS-based TSC planning.

Related-TSC Cell Indicates the color of cells with the value ofVamosMainTSC being the same as that ofVamosSubTSC in the source cell in theVAMOS-based TSC planning.



389

6 UMTS Network Planning

About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of the UMTS network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then, you can plan the neighboring cells andscrambling codes, predict the network coverage range, and evaluate the network capacity tomeet you network planning requirements.

6.1 Process of UMTS Network PlanningThis section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net.





6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic ParametersTraffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.

6.7 Setting UMTS NE Parameters

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 6 UMTS Network Planning


390

You can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

6.8 UMTS PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring CellsAfter creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network.You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells foreach cell one by one.

6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code PlanningThis section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used fordifferentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling codeplanning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping andvertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenariossuch as scrambling code check and network deployment.

6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports AnalysisThis chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurementreport analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyzethe live network.

6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion AnalysisUsing the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand theUMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.

6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network PlanningThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using theU-Net.



391

6.1 Process of UMTS Network PlanningThis section describes the process of UMTS network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning a UMTS network by using the U-Net.

Figure 6-1 shows the process of UMTS network planning.

Figure 6-1 Process of UMTS network planning


Table 6-1 Description of the UMTS network planning process





392








Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services,which are to be used during prediction.For details, see6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic Parameters.


You can import existing base station data to create basestations or use a base station template to automaticallycreate base stations. You can also create sites,transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 6.7Setting UMTS NE Parameters.



8 Planningscrambling codes/Planningneighboring cells

For details, see 6.10 UMTS Scrambling CodePlanning and 6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.The planning results can be applied to NEs.

9 Analyzing NetworkCapacityExpansion/AnalyzingMeasurementReports

For details, see 6.12 UMTS Network CapacityExpansion Analysis and 6.11 UMTS MeasurementReports Analysis.


For details, see 6.8 UMTS Prediction.





393











Step 3 Click OK.

----End





394


NOTE



NOTE











395

6.6 Setting UMTS Traffic ParametersTraffic parameters refer to the parameters related to the user type, mobility, terminal, service,environment, MCS, and receiving devices. They are the basic data related to user distribution.Traffic parameters can be used to generate a specific traffic map.

6.6.1 Setting MIMO TypesYou can modify the parameters of existing MIMO types. If the existing MIMO types do notmeet the requirements, you can create MIMO types.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS.

Step 3 Right-click Traffic Parameters > Services > UMTS and choose MIMO from the shortcutmenu, as shown in Figure 6-3. The MIMO Configuration dialog box is displayed.

Figure 6-3 MIMO

Step 4 Modify the parameters of an existing MIMO type. Alternatively, click a blank line marked withan asterisk (*) in the dialog box to set parameters for the new MIMO type.

For detailed description of parameters of MIMO types, see Table 6-2.



396

Table 6-2 Parameters for setting MIMO types

Parameter Meaning

Name Indicates the name of the MIMO.

TX_ANTENNAS Indicates the number of transmit antennas.

RX_ANTENNAS Indicates the number of receive antennas.

SM_SUPPORTED Indicates whether space division multiplexing issupported.

SM_GAIN(dB) Indicates the MIMO gain.The SM_GAIN(dB) takes effect only after theSM_SUPPORTED is selected.

Step 5 Click to close MIMO Configuration.

----End

6.6.2 Setting UMTS Service TypesSet the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parametersof existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate service types.

ContextThe U-Net provides six default UMTS service types: UMTSVideo Conferencing,UMTSVoice, UMTSHSDPA, UMTSHSUPA, UMTSMobile Internet Access, andUMTSMultimedia Messaging Service.

Procedure




Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >Services > UMTS.


6-3.

Modify an existing servicetype

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >Services > UMTS > An existing service type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify parameters for the existing service type by referring

to Table 6-3.



397

Figure 6-4 New

Table 6-3 Parameters for setting UMTS services

Parameter Meaning


Body Loss Indicates the loss due to the human body.

Priority Indicates the weighting factor based on the scheduled services.The weighting factor is assigned depending on the servicepriority.The value 1 indicates the lowest priority.

Type Indicates a service type.l CSServie: CS services.l PSServie: PS services.

Is VOIP Indicates whether the voice over IP (VoIP) is used.This parameter is available only for the PS services.

R99 Bearer Indicates the R99 bearer table assigned to a service type.

Soft Handoff Allowed Indicates whether a soft handoff is supported.

HSDPA Indicates whether the HSDPA service is supported.

HSUPA Indicates whether the HSUPA service is supported.



398

Parameter Meaning

Activity Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. This parameteris required for only voice services.l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0 to

1.l Downlink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.

FER(%) Indicates the frame error rate on the uplink and downlink.This parameter is available only for the CS services.

Max Throughput(kbit/s) Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges

from 0 to 107.l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value

ranges from 0 to 107.NOTE


Min Throughput(kbit/s) Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges from

0 to 107.l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value




Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: average uplink throughput.l Downlink: average downlink throughput.NOTE


Transmission Efficiency Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate.l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from 0

to 1.l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.

IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value ranges from 0to 100.

Offset(kbit/s) Indicates the fixed uplink/downlink overhead, which is thelength added to an encapsulated packet during the transmissionat the MAC or RLC layer.l Uplink: fixed uplink overhead. The value ranges from 0 to

107.l Downlink: fixed downlink overhead. The value ranges from

0 to 107.



399

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

6.6.3 Setting UMTS ReceiversYou can modify the parameters of existing receiver types. If the existing receiver types do notmeet the requirements, you can create receiver types.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS.




Create a receiver type. Enter the name of a new receiver in a blank line (markedwith *) in the dialog box. Select Bearer Selection Table.


Go to Step 5.

Step 5 Double-click the heading of the receiver and set properties in the displayed dialog box. Fordetailed description of parameters, see Table 6-4.

Step 6 Click OK.

Table 6-4 Parameters for setting UMTS receivers

Parameter Meaning


Bearer Selection Table Indicates the bearer table.

Mobility Indicates the mobility type of a receiver.For detailed description of parameters, see 3.6.7 SettingMobility Types.


IBLER(%) Indicates the block error rate (BLER). The value rangesfrom 0 to 100.

Retransmission Gain(dB) Indicates the retransmission gain.



400

Parameter Meaning

Demodulation l Indicates the demodulation threshold of PS services ifthis parameter is located in the PSService area. You candouble-click the related cell to set this parameter.

l Indicates the demodulation threshold of CS services ifthis parameter is located in the CSService area. Youcan double-click the related cell to set this parameter.

Bearer Index Indicates the index of the HSDPA or HSUPA bearer table.

Ec/Nt(dB) Indicates the demodulation threshold.

----End

6.6.4 Setting UMTS Terminal TypesSet the terminal types used when a service is performed. You can modify the parameters ofexisting terminal types. If the existing terminal types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate terminal types.

Procedure





1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >UMTS.



1. Choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals > UMTS > ExistingTerminal from the navigation tree.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify parameters for the existing terminal type by referring to Table

6-5.

Table 6-5 Parameters for setting UMTS terminal types

Parameter Meaning






401

Parameter Meaning



Compressed Mode Indicates whether to use the compressed mode.


Attenuation(dB) Indicates the signal attenuation of a terminal.

Active Set Size Indicates the threshold for the number of cells in an activeset. The value ranges from 1 to 6.

Rake Factor(DL) Indicates the efficiency factor of the Rake receiver on thedownlink. The value ranges from -32768 to 32768.

Reception Equipment Indicates the type of the receiver for a terminal.For details, see 3.6.3 Setting LTE-FDD Receivers.

Frequency Band Indicates the frequency band.

Technology Indicates the technologies supported by a terminal.

HSDPA UE Category Indicates the UE category supported by the HSDPA. Thevalue range is relevant to the value range of HSDPA UECategory.

HSUPA UE Category Indicates the UE category supported by the HSUPA. Thevalue range is relevant to the value range of HSUPA UECategory.

Space Multiplexing Supported(DL)

Indicates whether the space division multiplexing issupported on the downlink.

Space Multiplexing Supported(UL)

Indicates whether the space division multiplexing issupported on the uplink.

Number of Reception Antennas Indicates the number of antennas at the receiver for aterminal.

Number of TransmissionAntennas

Indicates the number of antennas at the transmitter for aterminal.

----End




402

Context


6.6.6 Setting the HSUPA Bearer TableThe U-Net needs to access the HSUPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before theprediction, you must set the HSUPA bearer table.

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA Bearer Tablewindow is displayed.

Step 4 Set parameters by referring to Table 6-6.

Table 6-6 Description of the parameters in the HSUPA bearer table


Radio Bearer Index Indicates the index of the HSUPA bearer table. Its value is greaterthan 0.

TTI Duration (ms) Indicates the duration of TTI scheduling. Its value is either 10 ms or2 ms.

Number of E-DPDCH codes

Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The value ranges from1 to 32767.

Min SpreadingFactor

Indicates the minimum spreading factor. The value ranges from 2 to32767.

Number of CEs Used Indicates the total CEs of the bearer service.

Transport Block Size(bits)

Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer.

RLC Peak Rate (bps) Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer.

Highest modulation Indicates a modulation mode.


----End

6.6.7 Setting the HSDPA Bearer TableThe U-Net needs to access the HSDPA bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before theprediction, you must set the HSDPA bearer table.



403

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA Bearer from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA Bearer Tablewindow is displayed.


Table 6-7 Description of the parameters in the HSDPA bearer table


Index Indicates the index.

CQI Indicates the channel quality indicator.

Transport Block Size(bits)

Indicates the size of a transported block at the physical layer. The unitis bit. The default value is 0.

Number of Used HS-PDSCH Channels

Indicates the number of traffic channel codes. The default value is 1.

RLC Peak Rate (bps) Indicates the peak rate at the RLC layer. The unit is bit/s. The defaultvalue is 0.

Highest Modulation Indicates a modulation mode. Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, and64QAM. The default value is QPSK.


----End

6.6.8 Setting the R99 Bearer TableThe U-Net needs to access the R99 bearer table in UMTS prediction. Therefore, before theprediction, you must set the R99 bearer table.

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose R99 Bearer from the shortcut menu. The UMTS R99 Bearer Tablewindow is displayed.


Table 6-8 Description of the parameters in the R99 bearer table


Name Indicates the name of the R99 bearer service.



404


Nominal Rate(UL) Indicates the nominal rate of the uplink bearer service.

Nominal Rate(DL) Indicates the nominal rate of the downlink bearer service.

Min TCH Power(dBm)

Indicates the allowed lowest power of the downlink traffic channel.The unit is dBm.

Max TCH Power(dBm)

Indicates the allowed highest power of the downlink traffic channel.The unit is dBm.

CE Used Num(UL) Specifies the total CEs of the uplink bearer service.

CE Used Num(DL) Specifies the total CEs of the downlink bearer service.

Spreading Factor(UL)

Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the uplink nominalrate.

Spreading Factor(DL)

Indicates the spreading factor corresponding to the downlink nominalrate.

Step 5 Double-click the column heading of the bearer table to open the UMTS Service Quality dialogbox. Then, set relevant parameters, and click OK.

NOTE

l Each bearer service in the R99 bearer table must be set. That is, each row in the table must be set.

l Mobility: set mobility.

l UL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the uplink traffic channel for the related mobility.

l DL Target Eb/No: set the value of Eb/No of the downlink traffic channel for the related mobility.


----End

6.6.9 Setting the HSUPA UE Category TableThe U-Net needs to access the HSUPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore,before the prediction, you must set the HSUPA UE Category table.

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose HSUPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSUPA UECategory Table window is displayed.




405

Table 6-9 Description of parameters in the HSUPA UE Category table


Category Indicates the power level of the UPA terminal.The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must begreater than or equal to 1.

Max Number of E-DPDCHCodes

Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

TTI 2ms Indicates whether to support TTI scheduling of 2 ms.

Min Spreading Factor Indicates the minimum spreading factor.Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

Max Block Size for a 2ms TTI(bits)

Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred duringTTI scheduling of 2 ms.Its value is greater than or equal to 0.

Max Block Size for a 10ms TTI(bits)

Indicates the maximum size of blocks transferred duringTTI scheduling of 10 ms.Its value is greater than or equal to 0.

Highest Modulation Indicates the highest modulation mode.Its value is either QPSK or 16QAM.


----End

6.6.10 Setting the HSDPA UE Category TableThe U-Net needs to access the HSDPA UE Category table in UMTS prediction. Therefore,before the prediction, you must set the HSDPA UE Category table.

Procedure



Step 3 Right-click and choose HSDPA UE Category from the shortcut menu. The HSDPA UECategory Table window is displayed.




406

Table 6-10 Description of parameters in the HSDPA UE Category table


Category Indicates the power level of the DPA terminal.The value must be unique and cannot be empty. It must begreater than or equal to 1.

Max Number of HS-PDSCHCodes

Indicates the maximum number of traffic channel codes.Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

Min Inter-TTI interval Indicates the minimum interval between the TTIscheduling.Its value is greater than or equal to 1.

Max Transport Block Size(bits) Indicates the maximum size of a transported block.Its value is greater than or equal to 0.

Highest Modulation Indicates the highest modulation mode.Its value is QPSK, 16QAM, or 64QAM.

MIMO Support Indicates whether MIMO is supported.


----End

6.7 Setting UMTS NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.


Context





407

Context


6.7.3 Setting UMTS Base Station TemplatesThis section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations byusing the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet yourrequirements, you can customize a base station template.








408

Such as .l Create a base station template.



2. Set properties of the base station template. For detailed description of parameters, seeParameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.


1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.3. Query and modify properties of the base station template. For detailed description of

parameters, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.4. Click OK.

----End










409



6.7.7 Setting UMTS Cell ParametersThis section describes how to set UMTS cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Netautomatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you can setcell parameters.

Procedure




Step 4 Set the properties of UMTS cells on the UMTSCell tab page in the displayed dialog box, asshown in Figure 6-6. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for Setting theParameters of UMTS Cells.



410

Figure 6-6 UMTSCell

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

6.7.8 Interface Reference for Setting UMTS NE ParametersThis section describes the parameters for setting UMTS NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station TemplatesThis section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying theproperties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base stationtemplates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.






411





Transceiver area on the UMTS tab pageParameter Description









Transmission in Number ofAntennas area


Reception in Number ofAntennas area


Transmission in Number ofAntenna Ports area




General tab in the Cell area on the UMTS tab pageParameter Description


Pilot Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power of pilot channels.

CCH Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.



412


Available HSDPA Power(dBm)

Indicates the maximum available power of HSDPA.

Actual Power(dBm) Indicates the actual transmit power.

HS-SCCH Power(dBm) Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.

Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. The value range isfrom 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. The value range is from0 to 1.

Max Load(DL) Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA on the downlink. Thevalue range is from 0 to 1.

Max Load(UL) Indicates the maximum load of HSUPA on the uplink. Thevalue range is from 0 to 1.

SHO Threshold(dB) Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.

SHO Reserve Ratio Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. The value range isfrom 0 to 1.Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to the totaluplink load.Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for soft handoff to thetotal downlink load.

Max Noise Rise Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.

UL Rake Factor Indicates the combination efficiency of a Rake transceiver.The value range is from 0 to 1.


ARFCN Indicates the downlink ARFCN.


Cell Type Indicates the type of a cell.The parameter value can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA,R99AndHSUPA, or R99AndHSDPA.



413

Propagation Models Tab in the Cell Area on the UMTS Tab Page







Parameters for Setting the Parameters of UMTS Cells

This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS cell or modifying the properties ofa UMTS cell.

Table 6-11 Parameters on the UMTSCell tab page





ARFCN Indicates the downlink ARFCN.

Target Load(DL) Indicates the target load on the downlink. Thevalue range is from 0 to 1.

Target Load(UL) Indicates the target load on the uplink. Thevalue range is from 0 to 1.

Cell Type Indicates the type of a cell.The cell type can be R99, HSUPA, HSDPA,R99 And HSUPA, or R99 And HSDPA.

Available HSDPA Power(dBm) Indicates the maximum available power ofHSDPA.

CCH Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power of the CCH.

Code Allocation Ratio Indicates the static allocation ratio of codes ofa cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Dynamic HSDPA Power Indicates whether dynamically allocatedpower is used for the HSDPA.

HSDPA Code Allocation Indicates the allocation mode of codes of acell.



414


HS-SCCH Power(dBm) Indicates the power of the HS-SCCH.

Max Load(DL) Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA onthe downlink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Max Noise Rise Indicates the upper limit of the noise rise.


Max Load(UL) Indicates the maximum load of HSDPA onthe uplink. The value range is from 0 to 1.

Pilot Power(dBm) Indicates the transmit power of pilotchannels.

Power Allocation Ratio Indicates the static power allocation ratio ofa cell. The value range is from 0 to 1.


SHO Reserve Ratio Indicates the soft handoff reserve ratio. Thevalue range is from 0 to 1.Uplink: the ratio of load reserved for softhandoff to the total uplink load.Downlink: the ratio of load reserved for softhandoff to the total downlink load.

SHO Threshold(dB) Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.

Actual Power(dBm) Indicates the actual transmit power.

UL Rake Factor Indicates the combination efficiency of aRake transceiver. The value range is from 0to 1.

Load Factor(UL) Indicates the total uplink load. The valuerange is from 0 to 1.

HSUPA Load(UL) Indicates the HSUPA uplink load. The valuerange is from 0 to 1.

Scrambling Code Indicates the scrambling code assigned to acell.

Scrambling Code Reuse Distance(km) Indicates the reuse distance of a scramblingcode.

Scrambling Code Reuse Tier Indicates the number of reuse layers of ascrambling code.

Forbidden Scrambling Code Indicates a forbidden scrambling code.





415




CGI Indicates the cell global identification (CGI).

RNC ID Indicates the ID of an RNC.

LAC Indicates a location area code.

RNC Name Indicates the name of a radio networkcontroller.

Status Indicates the swapping status.l NONE: Indicates there is no cell in

swapping state.l NEW: Indicates a new cell.l EXISTED: Indicates a live network cell.The default value is NONE.

Vendor Indicates the device manufacturer.

Comments Remarks

Neighbors list Indicates a list of neighboring cells.

Propagation Models Indicates a propagation model.












416


























417
















6.8 UMTS PredictionBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

6.8.1 Basic Knowledge of UMTS PredictionThis chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculatinglink loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and



418

prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function bylearning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction CountersThe U-Net can be used to predict multiple UMTS counters. This section describes the meaningsof the UMTS prediction counters.

NOTE


Table 6-15 lists the UMTS prediction counters supported by the U-Net.

Table 6-15 Description of UMTS prediction counters



CPICH RSCP Indicates Received Signal Code Power (RSCP) ofthe Common Pilot Channel (CPICH).

Best Server Indicates the best serving cell that has the highestCPICH RSCP on a specified frequency.

UE RSSI Indicates the total receive power of a UE on the entirebandwidth.

CoverageAreaAnalysis

Handover Area Indicates whether an area is a handover area.

Pilot Pollution Indicates the pilot pollution

Number Of Service Indicates the number of cells that can be added to theactive set.

DL Noise Rise Indicates the downlink noise rise.

Ec/Io CPICH Ec/Io Indicates the Ec/Io of the pilot signal received by aUE.

Eb/Nt(UL) UL DPCH Eb/Nt Indicates the Eb/Nt of the uplink DPCH.

Eb/Nt(DL) DL DPCH Eb/Nt Indicates the Eb/Nt of the downlink DPCH.

HSDPACoverage

HS PDSCH Ec/Nt Indicates the Ec/Nt of the signals received on the HS-PDSCH.

HSDPA CQI Indicates the HSDPA channel quality indicator.

HSDPA PeakThroughput

Indicates the HSDPA peak throughput.

HSUPACoverage

E DPDCH Ec/Nt Indicates the Eb/Nt of the E-DPDCH.

HSUPA PeakThroughput

Indicates the HSUPA peak throughput.



419




UMTS Prediction AlgorithmBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality. This section describes the UMTS prediction algorithm through a schematicchart.

Figure 6-8 shows the schematic chart of the UMTS prediction algorithm.



420

Figure 6-8 UMTS prediction algorithm

Table 6-16 describes the processes shown in Figure 6-8.

Table 6-16 Description of the UMTS prediction algorithm

Procedure


1 Traversing all thecells

Determine whether the cells in the calculation area areactivated. If a cell is not activated, the counters of thiscell are not calculated.



l If the path loss matrix already exists, it can beobtained directly.





421

Procedure


4 Predicting slowfading by using theshadow fadingmargin

To ensure that a base station can cover cell edges witha certain probability. A certain amount of power of thebase station is reserved to prevent shadow fading. Thereserved power is called shadow fading margin.During the calculation of link loss, you can enable theU-Net to take the shadow fading margin into account.

5 Calculating theCPICH RSCP todetermine theprimary serving cell

CPICH RSCP indicates the Received Signal CodePower (RSCP) of the Common Pilot Channel (CPICH).It is an important counter used for prediction. You candetermine the primary serving cell based on thiscounter.

6 Calculating thepower of interferencenoise to determinethe handover area.

You can calculate the power of interference and noiseand determine the handover area.

7 Calculating countersof traffic channelsand commonchannels based on theBin points

You must calculate the mandatory counters and customcounters based on the BIN.

8 Displayingprediction results










422


Factor Meaning






















423

l Calculation– If you calculate the path loss for the first time, that is, if no path loss matrix file is

available, the U-Net calculates the path loss matrix of each cell. Afterwards, the U-Netchecks the validity of calculation results and updates the results.



Procedure
















424


----End











425

Procedure





If ... Then ...





NOTE


Step 5 Click OK.

----End

6.8.4 Creating a UMTS Prediction GroupThe U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists ofone or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.



Procedure






426



5. Set the height of receiver on the Receiver tab page.

6. Click OK.



Figure 6-10 New

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, andselect prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of UMTS PredictionCounters.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description ofparameters, see 6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction Groups.

Step 7 Click OK.


----End

Follow-up Procedure





427




----End


Procedure







NOTE




----End






428



4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.

5. Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.




the shortcut menu. The chart can be saved in .emf, .png, .gif, .jpg, .tif, or .bmp format.

l To print the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Print from the shortcutmenu.

l To copy the CDF comparison chart, right-click the chart and choose Copy from the shortcutmenu.

6.8.7 Exporting UMTS Planning ResultsYou can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result byBin point.

Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in Batches

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then exporta statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.


Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result by Bin Point

After the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Binpoints in a specified area. The prediction results include the information about the longitudinaland latitudinal coordinates and counter values of the Bin points.







429

If... Then...





3. Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.

4. In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.

5. Click Export.l Export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power. This function is applicable only to

single-mode networks.

You can specify the value range of the pilot power to export only the detailed result of aBin point within the range.



If... Then...




In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx> CPICH RSCP.

NOTE

You can also set interval values in the properties of each preceding indicator.

3. Choose Export BIN By > CPICH RSCP from the shortcut menu.

– When you do not select the CPICH RSRP indicator when performing predictioncalculation, you cannot export the detailed result of a Bin point by pilot power.


4. In the displayed dialog box, set the value range of the indicator.

The U-Net exports only the detailed prediction result of a Bin point within the specifiedrange.

5. Click Export.



430

l Export the top N records of the reception levels in each Bin point. This function is applicableonly to single-mode networks.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > CPICH RSCP.3. Choose Export BIN By > Top Signal Level from the shortcut menu. The dialog box

as shown in Figure 6-11 is displayed.4. Set the minimum exported value and the maximum reception level for the top N

records to be exported.5. Click Export.6. After setting the export path, file name, and file format, export the data.

NOTE

l To implement this function successfully, the selected indicators must include CPICH RSCPwhen you creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-12.

l To export multiple maximum reception levels in a Bin point, you need to set the value ofTopNSignalLevel when creating a prediction project, as shown in Figure 6-13. This valuespecifies the number of top records for which the maximum reception level is calculated.

Figure 6-11 Export By Top Signal Level dialog box



431

Figure 6-12 Indicator selection



432

Figure 6-13 Property setting

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can navigate to the export path to view the exported contents.

The exported contents mainly include:l X-coordinate and Y-coordinate: If no geographic data is imported, the geodetic coordinates

are exported.l Indicator values: It refers to the values of the selected indicators.

Printing Coverage Prediction Results in BatchesAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters inbatches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.




433


Prerequisitesl The base station information involving the site, transceiver, and cell has been imported or

created.

l The coverage prediction for CPICH RSCP is complete.

l The DT data file has been imported.

Context

The method of rectifying the DT feature database in UMTS is similar to that in LTE-FDD. Fordetailed operations, see 3.8.10 Verifying the Feature Database Based on DT Data.


Context

For detailed operations of exporting the feature database, see Export the top N records of thereception levels in each Bin point in Exporting the Detailed UMTS Prediction Result byBin Point.

6.9 Planning UMTS Neighboring CellsAfter creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the UMTS network.You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells foreach cell one by one.





434

















NOTE




cells.




435




technology.

Procedure








Step 6 Click OK.

----End

6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New NetworkThis section describes how to perform neighboring cell planning for a new network. The U-Netprovides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. This function helps to planthe neighboring cells for each cell automatically, which reduces the number of handoverproblems due to improper neighboring cell configuration.

PrerequisitesBase station information has been created or imported, including sites, transceivers, and cells.

ContextOn a new network, neighboring cell relationships do not exist. All neighboring cells are plannedinitially. The initial planning of neighboring cells includes intra-frequency neighboring cellplanning, inter-frequency neighboring cell planning, and inter-RAT neighboring cell planning.

Procedure




436

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.



Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters forPlanning Neighboring UMTS Cells.

Step 5 Click Run.

NOTEYou can right-click UMTS and choose Stop Neighbor Allocation from the shortcut menu to stop thecurrent neighboring cell planning.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window. For details, see 6.13.5 Parameters for Viewing Neighboring Cell PlanningResults.

----End



2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.



5. Click OK.

l Export the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results.



3. Right-click and choose Export Other Vendor's Neighbor Relations > file exportformat from the shortcut menu.



437

NOTE

The file can be saved in .xls or .xlsx format.

For the other vendors' neighboring cell planning results, U-Net exports one file for each vendorto the specified directory.

After the neighboring cell planning is complete, You can check and optimize neighboring cellconfiguration. For details, see6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring CellConfiguration.

6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially ExpandedNetwork

This section describes how to replan neighboring cells for an expanded network. The capacityof a network may reach a limit after the network works for a long period of time. Therefore, thenetwork needs to be expanded. The neighboring cells in the expanded areas and adjacent areasneed to be replanned.

Prerequisites

Base station information has been created or imported, including network information beforethe expansion and added site information after the expansion.

Procedure

Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the network before the expansion.



3. Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import NeighborRelations dialog box is displayed.

4. Select the Update Blind Handover Flag check box as required.

If Update Blind Handover Flag is selected, blind handover flags of cells are updated whenneighboring cell relationships are being imported.

5. Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.

NOTE

l Select and import neighboring cell relationship files containing neighboring cell relationshipsthat are in the Added and No Change status.

l The values of CellName and NeighborCellName need to be the same as the names of cells andneighboring cells on NEs respectively. The names of intra-RAT cells on NEs must be unique.

6. Click OK.

Step 2 Set neighboring cell replanning parameters.



3. Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-15.



438


4. Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters

for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.5. Click Run.After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.

----End

6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3GNetwork

This section describes how to plan neighboring cells on a 3G network based on neighboring cellinformation on the 2G network after creating a 3G network.

Prerequisitesl A GSM/UMTS network has been created.l Base station information has been imported or created and the Cell Table files of 2G

network and 3G network have been imported respectively.

ContextThe coverage area of 3G network is the same as that of the 2G network and the addresses ofsites on the 3G network are the same as those on the 2G network. Therefore, neighboring cellson the 2G network are inherited on the 3G network. For the expansion of a 3G network, see6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Network.

Procedure

Step 1 Import neighboring cell relationships on the 2G network.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > GSM.



439

3. Choose Import Neighbor Relations from the shortcut menu. The Import NeighborRelations dialog box is displayed.

4. Click Browse to select a neighboring cell relationship file.5. Click OK.

Step 2 Set planning parameters.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > UMTS.3. Choose Automatic Allocation from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-16.


4. Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.2 Parameters

for Planning Neighboring UMTS Cells.5. Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window.You can check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. For details, see6.9.6Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration.

----End

6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell ConfigurationThis section describes how to check and optimize neighboring cell configuration. When theneighboring cell planning in a scenario is complete, you can view, modify, export, filter, andcollect the neighboring cell planning data. Based on the result of neighboring cell planning, youcan create neighboring cell planning scripts and check missing neighboring cell relationships.


Procedure




440


NOTEYou need to select RAT in the navigation tree so that neighboring cell relationships can be displayed in themap window, as shown in Figure 6-17.

Figure 6-17 Selecting the RAT




View neighboring cell relationships In the main window of the U-Net, click a cellin the Cell Name area. Alternatively, click acertain cell in the map window, as shown inFigure 6-18.The neighboring cell relationships of theselected cell are displayed in the table in theCell Name area and in the map windowsimultaneously.



441


Manually adjust neighboring cellrelationships

1. Select a source cell on the map.2. Hold down Ctrl and click the cells except

the source cell to add or deleteunidirectional neighboring cellrelationships.

3. Hold down Shift and click the cells exceptthe source cell to add or deletebidirectional neighboring cellrelationships.NOTEl If an added or deleted neighboring cell

relationship is the same as an existing one,the check box in the Confirm column ofthe neighboring cell list is automaticallyselected or cleared.

l If an added neighboring cell relationship isdifferent from the existing ones, theneighboring cell relationship is added tothe neighboring cell list and force isdisplayed in the Cause column.

l If the number of neighboring cells for a cellreaches the maximum number, aconfirmation dialog box is displayed whenmore neighboring cells are added. You canclick Yes to add these neighboring cells,or click No to cancel the operation.

Export the result of neighboring cell planning 1. In the Cell Name area of the mainwindow, Choose Export from theshortcut menu..

2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialogbox, select an export mode.l Incremental Export: Export only the

changed neighboring cellrelationships.

l Full Export: Export all neighboringcell relationships.

3. Click Export.

Delete neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell Name area of the mainwindow, select a cell whose neighboringcell relationships need to be adjusted.

2. Clear the check boxes in the Confirmcolumn for the selected cells in the tablein the right pane.



442


Filter neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell Name area of the mainwindow, Choose Filter from the shortcutmenu..

2. Set filter criteria in the displayed dialogbox. For details, see 6.13.4 Parametersfor Setting the Audit and FilterConditions Based on NeighboringRelations.

3. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayedin green in the map window, as shown inFigure 6-19.

NOTEIf you select the None option in the Filter dialogbox, the color of filtered cells in the map windowis cleared.

Remove the filter effect on neighboring cells Right-click in the Cell Name area of the mainwindow and choose Remove Filter from theshortcut menu. The table in the right paneswitches back to the state when no filtercriterion is used, and the color of filtered cellsin the map window is cleared.NOTE

Remove Filter is available only after filter criteriaare used.

Audit neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell Name area of the mainwindow, right-click the table and chooseStatistic from the shortcut menu.

2. Set audit conditions in the displayeddialog box. For details, see Parametersfor Setting Conditions for CheckingNeighbor Relationships and FilteringNeighboring Cells.

3. Click OK. The neighboring cellrelationship check report is exported to anXLS file.The exported file contains multiple sheets,and each sheet shows the result that meetscertain audit conditions.



443


Check missing neighboring cell relationships 1. In the Cell Name area of the mainwindow, Choose Export from theshortcut menu..

2. In the displayed Export Neighbor dialogbox, select Incremental Export.l Incremental Export: Export only the

changed neighboring cellrelationships.

3. Click Export.Check the status of exported neighboring cellrelationships. The neighboring cellrelationships in the Added state are missingneighboring cell relationships.

Clear the neighboring cell planning result 1. Right-click in the Cell Name area of themain window and choose Clear ExistedNeighbors from the shortcut menu, asshown in Figure 6-20.

2. In the displayed U-Net dialog box, clickY. The existing neighboring cellrelationships are cleared.

NOTEYou can clear the existing result of neighboringcell planning so that the planning of neighboringcells next time will not be affected.



444




445

Figure 6-19 Filter

Figure 6-20 clear existed neighbors

NOTEYou can create neighboring cell planning scripts based on the result of neighboring cell planning. The U-Net is applicable to the planning of intra-frequency and inter-frequency neighboring cells under differentRNCs. If inter-RNC neighboring cells are involved in the planning, type the RNC ID of each cell in theRNCID column in the table in the Cell area.

----End

6.10 UMTS Scrambling Code PlanningThis section describes UMTS scrambling code planning. Scrambling codes used fordifferentiating cells and users are important resources in the UMTS system. Scrambling code



446

planning of the U-Net supports multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping andvertical grouping. In addition, the scrambling code planning is applicable to multiple scenariossuch as scrambling code check and network deployment.

6.10.1 Basic Knowledge of Scrambling Code PlanningThis section describes basic knowledge of scrambling code planning. The scrambling codeplanning is performed to allocate a primary scrambling code for each cell and differentscrambling codes for the cells adjacent to this cell. The scrambling code planning ensures thatno interference is generated between downlink signals of cells that are allocated the samefrequency and scrambling code.

Scrambling codes in the UMTS system are classified into uplink scrambling codes and downlinkscrambling codes. Uplink scrambling codes are classified into long scrambling codes and shortscrambling codes. The uplink scrambling codes are allocated randomly by the RNC fordifferentiating users. Therefore, the planning of uplink scrambling codes is not required.Downlink scrambling codes are used on UEs. Only long scrambling codes are used fordifferentiating cells. Downlink scrambling codes are divided into 512 groups. Each groupconsists of 16 scrambling codes. The first scrambling code in each group is the primaryscrambling code. The other 15 scrambling codes in the same group are secondary scramblingcodes. Secondary scrambling codes must be used together with the primary scrambling code.

Figure 6-21 shows the procedure for scrambling code planning.



447

Figure 6-21 Procedure for scrambling code planning

The planning and optimization of UMTS scrambling codes are applicable to the followingscenarios. Figure 6-22 shows the operation procedure.

l 6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded Networkl 6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code Configuration



448

Figure 6-22 Operation procedure for scenario-based scrambling code planning and optimization

6.10.2 Scrambling Code Planning for a New or Expanded NetworkThis section describes how to use the U-Net to plan scrambling codes for a simple new networkby setting the rules of reusing scrambling codes.

ContextOn the UMTS network, the U-Net supports the allocation of scrambling codes based on tierreuse, distance reuse, and maximum-usage or average allocation principles. The U-Net alsoprovides multiple grouping functions such as horizontal grouping, vertical grouping, andcustomized grouping. Users can use the U-Net to allocate scrambling code groups based on celltypes.



449

NOTE

l Scrambling code planning based on tier reuse is available after neighboring cell planning is complete.

l Maximum-usage allocation maximizes the reuse of scrambling code resources to increase the usage ofscrambling codes.

l Average allocation ensures that all scrambling codes are equally used.

Procedure

Step 1 Optional: Check the allocation of scrambling codes in the existing cells.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.3. Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is

displayed.View the scrambling codes of existing cells.

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Scrambling Code Planning.

Step 3 Choose Set Scrambling Code Resource from the shortcut menu. See Figure 6-23.

Figure 6-23 Set Scrambling Code Resource

Step 4 Set scrambling code resource in the displayed dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6 Parametersfor Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.

Step 5 Click OK.


Step 7 Choose Automatic Identify High-Site from the shortcut menu.

Step 8 After the Height of High-Site is set, click Identify.

The U-Net automatically selects the cells that meet the height requirement from the Normalcells and High_Site cells. The Scene of selected cells is set to High_Site, and the Scene of theother cells is set to Normal. Cells in the two scenarios are displayed in the Cell area.



450

The Scene parameter in cell properties indicates the scenario of a cell.

Step 9 Click OK.

Step 10 Repeat Step 2.

Step 11 Choose Scanning from the shortcut menu to check the usage of any scrambling code in cells ofthe entire network.

Step 12 In the displayed dialog box, set the value of Scrambing Code from the drop-down list box. Thevalue range is from 0 to 511.

Step 13 Repeat Step 2.


Step 15 Set parameters in the displayed Scrambling Code Plan dialog box. For details, see 6.13.6Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling Codes.

Step 16 Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window.. For details, see 6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTSScrambling Codes .

NOTE

You can right-click UMTS Scrambling Code Planning and choose Stop Scrambling Codes Planningfrom the shortcut menu to stop the current scrambling code planning.

----End

6.10.3 Checking and Optimizing Scrambling Code ConfigurationAfter UMTS scrambling codes are planned, you can view, manually adjust, export, filter, andcollect statistics about the planning results.

PrerequisitesUMTS scrambling codes have been planned.

ContextThe scrambling code plan changes frequently on the live network due to causes such as networkexpansion. Therefore, the distribution of the current scrambling codes needs to be checkedperiodically to ensure that scrambling codes are properly distributed. The scrambling codeplanning is a process of checking whether scrambling codes are reused based on preset reusetier and distance. The requirements of reuse tier and distance vary based on scenarios. Suburbsand rural areas require more reuse tiers and longer reuse distance.

Procedure

Step 1 If the Scrambling Code Display window has been opened, go to Step 5. Otherwise, proceedto Step 2.





451

Step 4 Choose Open Scrambling Codes. The Scrambling Code Display dialog box is displayed.



Enable geographic display of scramblingcodes

1. In the Explorer window, click theNetwork tab.

2. In the navigation tree, chooseTransceiver.

3. Choose Display Setting from the shortcutmenu. The Display Field dialog box isdisplayed.

4. On the Label Display tab page, addScrambling Code to the Selected Fieldsarea.

Enable the cells using the same scramblingcode as that of the selected cell in the planningresult table to be displayed on the map

1. In the navigation tree, select UMTSScrambling Code Planning.

2. Choose Display Option from the shortcutmenu.

3. In the displayed Scrambling CodeDisplay Option dialog box, set the modeand color for geographic display ofscrambling codes.l Co Scrambling Code Cell: sets the

color for the cells that use the samescrambling code with that of theselected cell.

l Selected Cell Color: sets a color forthe selected cell.

l Link: identifies the scrambling codeplanning results by lines.

l Cell: sets the color of the linecorresponding to the scrambling codeplanning results.

4. Click OK.5. Select a cell on the map or click a row

heading in the planning result table.The cells that use the same scramblingcode as that of the selected cell aredisplayed on the map at the same time.

Manually adjust scrambling codes In the result window, change the values ofConfirm Code.

Export the planning file of scrambling codes Right-click in the result window and chooseExport from the shortcut menu to export thescrambling code planning results as a file. Fordetails about the parameters, see Parametersin the Data Export Dialog Box.



452


Export MML script planning file for thescrambling codes

Export the scrambling code planning resultdata for generating the MML script file.

Collect statistics about the usage ofscrambling codes

1. Right-click in the result window andchoose Graphic Result from the shortcutmenu.

2. In the Graphic Result window, setparameters. For details about theparameters, see Table 6-18.

graphic and data areas display the statisticalresults.You can double-click a column heading in thetable in the data area to sort the results.

Filter scrambling code planning results 1. Right-click in the result window andchoose Filter from the shortcut menu.

2. Specify a cell range from the FilterTarget drop-down list in the displayeddialog box. All indicates all the cells onthe entire network, and Planningindicates the cells in the planning area.

3. Select filter parameters. For details aboutthe parameters, see 6.13.8 Parametersfor Filtering and Auditing ScramblingCode Planning Results.

4. Set ARFCN, which indicates thedownlink ARFCN.NOTE

If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need toset it.

5. Click OK. The filtered cells are displayedgreen on the map.

NOTEIf you set the filtering criterion to None in theFilter dialog box, the color of the filtered cells onthe map is cleared.

Remove the filter effect Right-click in the result window and chooseRemove Filter from the shortcut menu. TheScrambling Code Display window switchesback to the status when no filter criterion wasused in Filter, and the color of cells is cleared.NOTE

Remove Filter is available only after filter criteriaare set in Filter.



453


Check the scrambling code planning results 1. Right-click in the result window andchoose Audit from the shortcut menu.

2. Specify a cell range from the AuditTarget drop-down list in the displayeddialog box. All indicates all the cells onthe entire network, and Planningindicates the cells in the planning area.

3. Select one or more statistical parameters.For details about the parameters, see6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering andAuditing Scrambling Code PlanningResults.

4. Set ARFCN, which indicates thedownlink ARFCN.NOTE

If ARFCN is unavailable, you do not need toset it.

Clear the scrambling code planning results 1. Right-click in the result window andchoose Clear Existed Scrambling Codefrom the shortcut menu, as shown inFigure 6-24.

2. In the displayed confirmation dialog box,click Yes (Y). The existing scramblingcode planning results on NEs are cleared.

NOTEAfter the planned scrambling codes are cleared, thenew scrambling code planning will not be affected.

Table 6-18 Parameters in the Graphic Result window


Main ARFCN Sets the downlink ARFCN.

Use Times Collects statistics based on the number oftimes scrambling codes are reused.

Min Reuse Distance(km) Collects statistics based on the reusedistances of scrambling codes.

Min Reuse Tier Collects statistics based on the reuse tiers ofscrambling codes.



454


Cell Type Sets the cell type.l Indicates the type of a cell (All, Indoor,

High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Normal,Special, Outdoor, and Boundary).

l This parameter is available only when Usetimes is selected.

Figure 6-24 Clear Existed Scrambling Code

----End

6.11 UMTS Measurement Reports AnalysisThis chapter describes how to analyze UMTS measurement reports by creating measurementreport analysis groups. The U-Net geographically displays each counter, helping users analyzethe live network.

6.11.1 Creating a Measurement Report Analysis GroupThis section describes how to create a measurement report analysis group and modify the groupattributes. The U-Net can analyze measurement report analysis groups. Each measurement reportanalysis group contains one or multiple analysis items.

Prerequisitesl You have imported geographic data.

l NodeBs are available.

l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the methodfor creating a calculation area, see 3.3.9 Creating Vector Objects.



455

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report.

Step 3 Right-click UMTS Measure Report and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown inFigure 6-25.

Figure 6-25 New

Step 4 In the displayed UMTS Measure Report dialog box, select a computation area and set the datasource for measurement report analysis. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.10Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report Analysis Group.

Step 5 Click OK to create a new measurement report analysis group.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate

the measurement report analysis group.

l Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stopcalculating the measurement report analysis group.

6.11.2 Geographically Displaying Measurement Report AnalysisResults

After calculating a measurement report analysis group, you can create network counters in themeasurement report analysis group to view the live network analysis results displayed in colorrendering mode in the map window.

Prerequisitesl You have created a measurement report analysis group.

l You have calculated the measurement report analysis group.

Procedure




456

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Measure Report > existing measurement report analysisgroup.

Step 3 Right-click existing measurement report analysis group and choose New from the shortcutmenu, as shown in Figure 6-26.

Figure 6-26 New

Step 4 In the displayed Measure Report Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, asshown in Figure 6-27. For details about these counters, see 6.13.11 Parameters forGeographically Displaying Measurement Report Analysis Results.



457

Figure 6-27 Measure Report Study Types

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create measurement report analysis counters.

NOTE

After measurement report analysis counters are created, the live network data analysis results of the countersare geographically displayed in the map window.

----End

6.12 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion AnalysisUsing the policy of network capacity expansion by splitting sectors, the U-Net can expand theUMTS network capacity to meet increasing capacity requirements.

6.12.1 UMTS Network Capacity Expansion BasicsThis section describes how to use the U-Net to perform network capacity expansion analysis.Before expanding the network capacity, you can use the U-Net to analyze the impacts of networkcapacity expansion on coverage and capacity and then adopt a proper expansion policy anddetermine the number of required resources.

NOTE

The U-Net supports only UMTS network capacity expansion by splitting sectors.

Figure 6-28 shows the flow chart for analyzing network capacity expansion through the U-Net.



458

Figure 6-28 Flow chart

6.12.2 Creating a Capacity Expansion Analysis GroupThis section describes how to create a capacity expansion analysis group and modify the groupattributes. The U-Net performs network capacity expansion analysis based on analysis groups.Each analysis group contains one or more analysis items.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data has been imported.l NodeBs are available.l The calculation area is created. For details about calculation area knowledge and the method


ProcedureStep 1 Click the Operation tab in the Explorer window.

Step 2 Choose UMTS Network Expansion from the navigation tree.

Step 3 Right-click UMTS Network Expansion and choose New from the shortcut menu, as shown inFigure 6-29.



459

Figure 6-29 New

Step 4 In the displayed Network Expansion Analysis dialog box, select a computation area, set a datasource and policy for expansion analysis, and set algorithm parameters for soft handovers andMR-based traffic evaluation. For details about these parameters, see 6.13.12 Parameters forCreating a Capacity Expansion Analysis Group.

Step 5 Click OK or Apply to create a network capacity expansion analysis group.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Right-click the created task node and choose Calculate from the shortcut menu to calculate

the capacity expansion analysis group.l Right-click the created task node and choose Stop from the shortcut menu to stop

calculating the capacity expansion analysis group.

NOTE

l The time required for the calculation depends on the selected MR data size, computation area, and theselected expansion policy. The required calculation time is directly proportional to the MR data size,computation area, and expansion policy complexity.

6.12.3 Geographically Displaying Capacity Expansion AnalysisResults

After calculating a capacity expansion analysis group, you can create network counters in thecapacity expansion analysis group to view the analysis results displayed in color rendering modein the map window.

Prerequisitesl You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.l You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysisgroup.



460

Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose New from the shortcut menu, asshown in Figure 6-30.

Figure 6-30 New

Step 4 In the displayed Expansion Study Types dialog box, select counters to be analyzed, as shownin Figure 6-31. For details about these counters, see 6.13.13 Parameters for GeographicallyDisplaying Capacity Expansion Analysis Results.



461

Figure 6-31 Expansion Study Types

NOTE

You can check Initial, Final, and Variation analysis results for each counter.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, click OK or Apply to create capacity expansion counter analysisitems.

NOTE

After the analysis items are created, the expansion analysis results of the counters are geographicallydisplayed in the map window.

----End

6.12.4 Checking Network Capacity Expansion ResultsThis section describes how to check network capacity expansion results after calculating acapacity expansion analysis group.



462

Prerequisitesl You have created a capacity expansion analysis group.

l You have calculated the capacity expansion analysis group.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose UMTS Network Expansion > existing expansion analysisgroup.

Step 3 Right-click existing expansion analysis group and choose Result from the shortcut menu, asshown in Figure 6-32.

Figure 6-32 Result

Step 4 In the displayed Result dialog box, check the network capacity expansion results. For detailsabout these parameters, see 6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity ExpansionResults.

----End

6.13 Interface Reference to UMTS Network PlanningThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for UMTS network planning by using theU-Net.



463

6.13.1 Parameters for Creating UMTS Prediction GroupsThis section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting the propertiesof a prediction group. You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the NewPrediction Group dialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the GroupProperties dialog box.






Parameters in the UMTS Group Properties Dialog Box





Polygon Indicates the area calculated in prediction.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the probability of cell edge coverage, that is,the probability that the receive signal strength isstronger than the specified threshold at the edge of acell.

With Shadow Indicates whether shadow fading is considered in thecalculation.

Indoor Coverage Indicates whether penetration loss is considered in thecalculation.

DLFrequencyBand Indicates the downlink frequency band.

ARFCN Indicates the absolute radio frequency channelnumber (ARFCN).



464



Signal Level(dBm) Indicates the receive threshold of the downlinkreference signal.






DLDivGain Indicates the downlink diversity gain.

MacroDivGain Indicates the macro diversity gain.

MaxSpatialMultiplexingFactor Indicates the maximum spatial diversity gain.

MinCPICHEcIo Indicates the threshold of the minimum signal tointerference plus noise ratio (SINR).

OrthoFactor Indicates the orthogonal factor.

PilotEcIoMargin Indicates the minimum SINR of the pilot signal.

PilotPollutionMargin Indicates the threshold of pilot pollution.

SHOThreshold Indicates the threshold of the soft handover.

SpatialMultiplexingFactor Indicates the spatial diversity gain.

TopNSignalLevel Indicates the number of top receive levels to beranked.

ULDivGain Indicates the uplink diversity gain.

6.13.2 Parameters for Planning Neighboring UMTS CellsThis section describes the parameters for planning neighboring UMTS cells.



465



Methods Select Selects a network planning scenario.l Topology: Plans neighboring cells based on

network topology.l Prediction: Plans neighboring cells based on

prediction results. This method applies only tooutdoor base stations.

l Topology + Prediction: Plans neighboring cellsbased on both the network topology and theprediction results.

Max Neighbor Distance(km) Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.If the distance between two cells exceeds the specifiedvalue, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboringcells.

Planning Neighbor based on existedNeighbors

Plan neighboring cells based on the existingneighboring relationships.If this option is not selected, the existing neighboringrelationships are deleted and neighboring cells arereplanned.

Force Co-Site As Neighbor Forcibly configures internal cells as bidirectionalneighboring cells.

Co-Site Distance(m) Configures two cells as bidirectional neighboringcells when the distance between the two cells is lessthan the value of this parameter.

Reference Existed Neighbors Whether to reference the neighbor relationships ofexisting cells.

Reference Rules Click Reference Rules and configure reference rulesin the displayed window.l Source Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the

frequency band to be planned.l Neighbor Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the

frequency band of the neighboring cell.l Referenced Cell Frequency Band: Indicates the

frequency band of the referenced cell.l Reference Neighbor Cell Frequency Band:

Indicates the frequency band of the neighboringcell of the referenced cell.

Azimuth Difference (°) Sets the azimuth difference between the cell to beplanned and the cell used for reference.

Reference Site Distance(m) Indicates the distance difference between the site ofthe cells to be planned and the site of the cells used forreference.



466


Consider Handover Statistics Indicates whether to consider the handover data andthe path for saving the handover data.

Planning Weight Indicates the weight of the planning result uponneighboring cell ranking.

Handover Statistics Weight Indicates the weight of the handover data uponneighboring cell ranking.

Resolution(m) Indicates the precision for the calculation.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.

Handover Area Percent(%) Indicates the proportion of the handover area.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.

Compute Shadowing Indicates whether to calculate shadow fading.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.

Cell Edge Coverage Probability(%) Indicates the probability of the cell edge coverage.This parameter is valid only when shadow fading iscalculated. The value of this parameter is directlyproportional to the value of shadowing fading.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.NOTE

This parameter is valid when you select ComputeShadowing.

Compute Indoor Loss Indicates whether to calculate penetration loss.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Sets the minimum signal receive level.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.



467


Handover Threshold(dB) Sets the handover area threshold.You can set this parameter in the PredictionParameter Setting window after you click Settingwhen the network planning scenario is set toPrediction or Topology + Prediction.

Automatic generate Planning Cells Automatically generates cells to be planned.NOTE

You can select new cells and related cells as cells to beplanned.

Area Sets the planning area.l You can select all the cells in an area or click

Filter to select only the cells to be planned in thearea.By default, the full map is planned.

l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify thecontents to be found, set the search direction, andset whether to match cases.

l Comments: You can filter cells based on theinformation defined in Comments.

Table 6-23 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page


Force Symmetry Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectionalneighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.If this option is selected during network capacityexpansion, the unidirectional neighboring cells areconfigured as bidirectional neighboring cells to adjustthe original neighboring relationship table.

New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max OutdoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedindoor cell.

New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max IndoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedindoor cell.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedoutdoor cell.

New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max IndoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedoutdoor cell.



468



Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.

Existed Cell-Indoor Cell-Max IndoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.

Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-MaxOutdoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.

Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-MaxIndoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.

Table 6-24 Parameters on the Inter-Frequency tab page


Inter-Frequency Config Sets frequency band parameters and handover modes.

From Sets the frequency of the source cell.

To Sets the handover frequency.

Handover Type Indicates the handover type.l Co_Sector: indicates the co-sector handover.l Inter_Sector: indicates the inter-sector handover.

The priority of coverage based inter-frequency handover

Indicates the priority of the coverage-based inter-frequency handover.

Blind Handover Indicates the blind handover.

Blind Handover Condition Indicates the quality condition that triggers a blindhandover.This parameter is valid when Blind Handover is setto True.

DRD ECNO Threshold(dB) Indicates the Ec/No threshold of the directed retry.This parameter is valid when Blind Handover is setto True.

SIB11 Indicates whether to send commands in systeminformation block 11 (SIB11).

IdleQoffset1sn(dB) Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH RSCPmeasurement value in cell selection or reselectionwhen the UE is in idle mode.This parameter is valid when SIB11 is set to True.



469


IdleQoffset2sn(dB) Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH Ec/Nomeasurement value in cell selection or reselectionwhen the UE is in idle mode.This parameter is valid when SIB11 is set to True.

SIB12 Indicates whether to send commands in SIB12.

ConnQoffset1sn(dB) Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH RSCPmeasurement value in cell selection or reselectionwhen the UE is connected.This parameter is valid when SIB12 is set to True.

ConnQoffset2sn(dB) Indicates the cell offset used for the CPICH Ec/Nomeasurement value in cell selection or reselectionwhen the UE is connected.This parameter is valid when SIB12 is set to True.

New Cell-Indoor Cell-Max OutdoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedindoor cell.

New Cell-Indoor Cel-Max IndoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedindoor cell.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedoutdoor cell.

New Cell-Outdoor Cell-Max IndoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for a newly establishedoutdoor cell.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.

Existed Cell-Indoor Cel-Max IndoorNeighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for an existing indoor cell.

Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-MaxOutdoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of outdoorneighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.

Existed Cell-Outdoor Cell-MaxIndoor Neighbor Number

Indicates the maximum number of indoorneighboring cells planned for an existing outdoor cell.

Table 6-25 Parameters on the Inter-RAT tab page (available only in multi-mode neighboringcell planning)


Total Max Number Indicates the maximum number of neighboring cells.



470


Frequency Band Indicates the frequency band to be handed over whenthe RAT is switched to GSM.

Min Signal Level(dBm) Sets the minimum signal receive level.

Handover Threshold(dB) Sets the handover area threshold.















Legend Description






471

Legend Description























472























473







6.13.6 Parameters for Planning UMTS Scrambling CodesThis section describes the parameters for planning UMTS scrambling codes.

Table 6-31 Parameters on the Group Strategy tab page


Vertical(64 codes per group) Indicates that vertical grouping is used. Eachgroup consists of 64 scrambling codes and thereare a total of 8 groups.

Horizontal(8 codes per group) Indicates that horizontal grouping is used. Eachgroup consists of 8 scrambling codes and there area total of 64 groups.

512 Codes(512 codes per group) Indicates that all the 512 scrambling codes are inone group.

Customize Indicates that the grouping mode can becustomized.You can customize the grouping mode on theGroup Strategy tab page.

Reserved The Last [] Groups Reserves the last N scrambling code groups.

Reserved The Last [] Codes Per Group Reserves the last N scrambling codes of eachgroup.

Reserved The Last [] Codes Reserves the last N scrambling codes.

Available Scrambling Codes Available scrambling codes.



474


Reserved Scrambling Codes Reserved scrambling codes.

Table 6-32 Parameters on the Cell Strategy tab page


Cell Type Indicates the type of a cell (Indoor, Outdoor,High_Site, High_Speed_Way, Boundary,Normal, Special).

Select Usable Group Indicates the scrambling code groups used by thesame type of cell.

Scrambling Code Reuse Tier Indicates the number of layers for scramblingcode reuse for the same type of cell.

Scrambling Code Reuse Distance Indicates the scrambling code reuse distance forthe same type of cells.



Reuse Rule Sets the rules for reusing scrambling codes.The value can be Distance, Tier, or Distance+Tier.The default value is Tier.

Allocate Rule Sets the rules for allocating scrambling codes.The value can be Average or MaxUsage.The default value is MaxUsage.

Consecutive Allocate Sets whether scrambling codes under one basestation are allocated consecutively.If this option is selected, scrambling codes areallocated consecutively. This parameter isselected by default.

Group Different From Neighbor Site Sets whether different scrambling code groups areallocated to neighboring base stations.If this option is selected, different scramblingcode groups are allocated to neighboring basestations. This parameter is selected by default.

Allocate Different Scrambling Code forCells in the Same Transceiver

If this option is selected, different scramblingcodes are allocated to inter-frequency cellssharing sectors.



475


Delete Scrambling Code Sets whether to delete the existing scramblingcodes of cells.If this option is selected, the existing scramblingcodes of cells are deleted.

Iteratively Generate Scrambling Code Sets whether to generate scrambling codes byiterations.If scrambling codes fail to be allocated to cellswhen this parameter is selected, you can reducethe reuse distance by iteration based on the stepdefined by Distance Decending Percentage(%)to allocate scrambling codes until the allocation issuccessful.

Distance Decending Percentage(%) Sets the percentage of the step for reducing thescrambling code reuse distance.

Area Selects the area where scrambling codes need tobe planned.l You can select all the cells in an area or click

Cell Filter to select only the cells to beplanned in the area.

l If you select certain cells to plan thescrambling codes, the U-Net plans thescrambling codes for the selected cells bytaking into account the existing scramblingcodes allocation of other cells.

l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify thecontents to be found, set the search direction,and set whether to match cases.

l Comments: Users can filter cells based on theinformation defined in Comments.

6.13.7 Parameters for Viewing Planning Results of UMTSScrambling Codes

This section describes the parameters for viewing the planning results of UMTS scramblingcodes. You can refer to this section when viewing the planning results of UMTS scramblingcodes in the Scrambling Code Display dialog box.



Existing Code Indicates the existing scrambling code.



476


Suggest Code Indicates the scrambling codes that are recommended forsetting.

Confirm Code Indicates the scrambling codes whose settings areconfirmed.

Use Times Indicates that the statistical information is collected by thenumber of times a scrambling code is reused.

Min Reuse Distance(km) Indicates that the statistical information is collected byscrambling code reuse distance.

Min Reuse Tier Indicates that the statistical information is collected by thenumber of layers a scrambling code is reused.

6.13.8 Parameters for Filtering and Auditing Scrambling CodePlanning Results

This section describes the parameters for filtering and auditing scrambling code planning results.

Table 6-34 Parameters for filtering or auditing scrambling code planning results


None Indicates that no filter criterion is applied.

Allocation Failed Cells Indicates the cells for which scrambling code allocationfails.

No Allocation Cells Indicates the cells that are not allocated with scramblingcodes.

Reuse Tier <= Indicates the cells for which the number of scramblingcode reuse layers is less than the specified value. AUARFCN must be specified.

Reuse Distance(km) <= Indicates the cells for which the scrambling code reusedistance is less than the specified value. A UARFCN mustbe specified.

Using Reserved Code Indicates the cells that use reserved scrambling codes. AUARFCN must be specified.

Using Forbidden Code Indicates the cells that use forbidden scrambling codes.

Using Non-continuous Code Indicates the co-site and intra-frequency cells that do notuse consecutive scrambling codes in the same scramblingcode group. A UARFCN must be specified.

Using Same Group withNeighbor Site

Indicates the cells that use the same scrambling code groupas the adjacent sites. A UARFCN must be specified.



477


ARFCN Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number.


Indicates whether to highlight filtered cells on the map ornot.

6.13.9 Parameters for Setting BandsThis section describes the parameters used for setting the frequency band information about theUMTS.

Table 6-35 Parameters for setting frequency band information



UARFCN(UL) Uplink UTRA absolute radiofrequency channel number.


UARFCN(DL) Downlink UTRA absoluteradio frequency channelnumber.


Frequency(UL)(MHz) Uplink start frequency. Unit: MHz.Value range: real numbers,separated by semicolons. Thenumber is consistent withthat of UARFCN(UL)s.

Frequency(DL)(MHz) Downlink start frequency. Unit: MHz.Value range: real numbers,separated by semicolons. Thenumber is consistent withthat of UARFCN(DL)s.



6.13.10 Parameters for Creating a Measurement Report AnalysisGroup

This section describes the parameters for creating a measurement report (MR) analysis group.



478

Parameters in the UMTS Measure Report dialog boxParameter Description Remarks

Name Name of a MR analysisgroup.

-

Polygon Computation area. l If there is no computationarea, you can create a polygon

through .l The computation area size

affects the MR analysisefficiency. To obtain analysisresults quickly, you need todraw a proper computationarea.

Path Path of the MR data to beselected.

-

Config Columns dialog boxParameter Description Remarks

Configuration File Column configuration filethat is imported into an MRfile.

Select a column to be importedand save it as a configuration file.Next time when you import theMR file, you only need to directlyimport the configuration file.This parameter is set based on siterequirements.

1st.Data Row Row in an MR file fromwhich data is imported.

This parameter is set based on siterequirements.

Longitude Longitude. This parameter is mandatory.

Latitude Latitude. This parameter is mandatory.

RNC ID ID of an RNC to which a cellbelongs.

This parameter is mandatory.

Cell ID ID of a cell. This parameter is mandatory.

Cell MR Count Number of MRs for a cellwith a specific longitude andlatitude.


Cell Average RSCP Average RSCP of all MRs fora cell with a specificlongitude and latitude.




479

Parameter Description Remarks

Cell Average EcIo Average EcIo value of allMRs for a cell with a specificlongitude and latitude.


Cell IMSI Count Number of IMSIs containedin all MRs for a cell with aspecific longitude andlatitude.

This parameter is optional.

6.13.11 Parameters for Geographically Displaying MeasurementReport Analysis Results

This section describes the parameters for geographically displaying measurement report analysisresults.

Parameters in the Measure Report Study Types dialog boxParameter Description

RSCP analysis Geographically displays the received signalcode power (RSCP) for the primary servingcell of each grid.

EcIo analysis Geographically displays the EcIo value forthe primary serving cell of each grid.

User count analysis Geographically displays the number of usersof each grid.

Cell coverage area analysis Geographically displays the cell coveragearea.

LAC area analysis Geographically displays the coverage area ofcells with the same LAC.

RNC area analysis Geographically displays the coverage area ofcells under the same RNC.

Single Cell RSCP analysis Geographically displays the RSCP for asingle cell of each grid.

Single Cell EcIo analysis Geographically displays the EcIo value for asingle cell of each grid.

Single Cell User count analysis Geographically displays the number of usersof a single cell of each grid.



480

6.13.12 Parameters for Creating a Capacity Expansion AnalysisGroup

This section describes the parameters for creating a UMTS network capacity expansion analysisgroup in the Network Expansion Analysis dialog box.

Network Expansion Analysis dialog box



Name Name of a capacityexpansion analysisitem.

-

Computation Area Computation area. l If there is no computation area,you can create a polygon through

.l The computation area size affects

the capacity expansion analysisefficiency. To obtain analysisresults quickly, you need to drawa proper computation area.

Table 6-37 Parameters on the DataSource tab page


Measure Report Select a data source. The U-Net currently supportsonly MRs as the data source.

Path Path of the MR data to beselected.

-

Table 6-38 Parameters on the Strategy tab page


Add Sector Select a capacity expansionmode.

The U-Net currently supportsonly the capacity expansionpolicy of adding sectors.

Site Name Name of a site. -

Transceiver Name of a transceiver. -



481


Cell Name Name of a cell. The U-Net differentiatesbetween split cells andoriginal cells by cell name.

CI Identity of a cell, which isunique within an area.

The ID of a new split cellmust be different from that ofthe cell before splitting.

Antenna Antenna of a cell. A split cell uses the splitdirectional antenna.

Cell Comments Comments for a cell. -

Table 6-39 Parameters on the Parameter tab page


Min RSCP Threshold(dBm)

Minimum RSCPthreshold.The default value is -110dBm.

This parameter is used for calculatingcells of the UE's active set for eachgrid.Other cells can be added to the UE'sactive set only when the RSCPs ofthe cells in the current positionexceed this threshold.

RSCP Margin(dB) RSCP margin.The default value is 6 dB.

This parameter is used for calculatingcells of the UE's active set for eachgrid.The cells can be added to the UE'sactive set only when the differences(absolute value) between the RSCPsof other cells in this position and theRSCP of the primary serving cell areless than or equal to the parametervalue.

ActiveSet Size Size of a UE's active set. All the cells that meet conditions ofMin RSCP Threshold and RSCPMargin can be added to the activeset. If the number of cells that meetthe conditions exceed the value ofActiveSet Size, the exceedednumber of cells cannot be added tothe active set and these cells areconsidered as pilot pollution cells.

Measure ReportDuration(s)

Period for reporting MRs.The default value is 12seconds.

This parameter is used for calculatingtraffic based on the number of MRs.You can configure this parameterbased on site requirements.



482


Cell MR PercentThreshold

Cell MR percentagethreshold.

If MR data records of multiple cellsexist on a grid and the percentage ofthe number of MR data records of acell to the total number of MRrecords on the grid is less than thisthreshold, the cell does notparticipate in the calculation of thegrid.

Config Columns dialog box


Configuration File Column configuration filethat is imported into an MRfile.

Select a column to beimported and save it as aconfiguration file. Next timewhen you import the MR file,you only need to directlyimport the configuration file.This parameter is set basedon site requirements.

1st.Data Row Row in an MR file fromwhich data is imported.

This parameter is set basedon site requirements.

Longitude Longitude. This parameter is mandatory.

Latitude Latitude. This parameter is mandatory.

RNC ID ID of an RNC to which a cellbelongs.


Cell ID ID of a cell. This parameter is mandatory.

Cell MR Count Number of MRs for a cellwith a specific longitude andlatitude.


Cell Average RSCP Average RSCP of all MRs fora cell with a specificlongitude and latitude.


Cell Average EcIo Average EcIo value of allMRs for a cell with a specificlongitude and latitude.


Cell IMSI Count Number of IMSIs containedin all MRs for a cell with aspecific longitude andlatitude.

This parameter is optional.



483

6.13.13 Parameters for Geographically Displaying CapacityExpansion Analysis Results

This section describes the counters used for geographically analyzing the capacity expansioneffect.

Expansion Study Types dialog boxCounter Description

RSCP Geographically displays the received signal code power(RSCP) for the primary serving cell of each grid.

EcIo Geographically displays the EcIo value for the primary servingcell of each grid.

RSSI Geographically displays the received signal strength indicator(RSSI) value of each grid.

Best Server Geographically displays the primary serving cell of each grid.

Pilot Pollution Geographically displays the number of pilot pollution sourcesof each grid.NOTE

The number of pilot pollution sources refers to the number of cells thatmeet handover conditions and exceed the UE active set threshold ofeach grid.

Handover Area Geographically displays the soft handover status of each grid.Soft handover grids are the grids for which the number of cellsthat meet handover conditions does not exceed the active setthreshold.

6.13.14 Parameters for Viewing Network Capacity ExpansionResults

This section describes the parameters for viewing the network capacity expansion results.

Table 6-40 Parameters on the Site tab page


Site Name Name of a site.

CS Traffic Before Expansion(Erlang) CS traffic of a site before the network capacityexpansion.

CS Traffic After Expansion(Erlang) CS traffic of a site after the network capacityexpansion.



484


CS Traffic Variation CS traffic change of a site after the network capacityexpansion.CS Traffic Variation = CS Traffic After Expansion -CS Traffic Before Expansion

Table 6-41 Parameters on the Transceiver tab page


Splitted Indicates whether cells are split.True: Cells are split.False: Cells are not split.

Old Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver before splitting.

New Transceiver Name Name of a transceiver after splitting.NOTE

When Splitted of a cell is set to False, no new cell is split.

CS Traffic Before Expansion(Erlang) CS traffic of a transceiver before the networkcapacity expansion.

CS Traffic After Expansion(Erlang) CS traffic of a transceiver after the network capacityexpansion.

CS Traffic Variation CS traffic change of a transceiver after the networkcapacity expansion.CS Traffic Variation = CS Traffic After Expansion -CS Traffic Before Expansion

Transceiver Name Name of a split transceiver.

CS Traffic(Erlang) CS traffic of a split transceiver.

Table 6-42 Parameters on the Cell tab page


Status Indicates whether a cell is a split one.

Cell Name Name of a cell.

CS Traffic(Erlang) CS traffic of a split cell.

SHO Ratio Soft handover ratio of a split cell.

SHO Overhead Soft handover overhead of a split cell.



485

Table 6-43 Parameters on the SHO Ratio tab page


Cell Name Name of a source cell.

Cell ID ID of a source cell.

RNC ID ID of the RNC to which the source cell belongs.

Dest CellName Name of the destination cell where the handover isperformed.

Dest CellID ID of the destination cell where the handover isperformed.

Dest RNCID ID of the RNC to which the destination cell wherethe handover is performed belongs.

SHO Ratio Ratio of soft handovers.



486

7 CDMA Network Planning

About This Chapter

This section describes the CDMA network planning. On the CDMA network, the U-Net supportsonly the function of planning neighboring cells and PN codes.

7.1 Process of CDMA Network PlanningThis section describes the process of CDMA network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning a CDMA network by using the U-Net.





7.6 Setting CDMA NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells Planning

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 7 CDMA Network Planning


487

After creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network.You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells foreach cell one by one.

7.8 CDMA PN Code PlanningThe CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread thespectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN codeplanning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.

7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network PlanningThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using theU-Net.



488

7.1 Process of CDMA Network PlanningThis section describes the process of CDMA network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning a CDMA network by using the U-Net.

Figure 7-1 shows the process of CDMA network planning.

Figure 7-1 Process of CDMA network planning


Table 7-1 Description of the CDMA Network Planning Process




You can import geographic data in various vector andgrid formats and set coordinate systems. You can alsoadd points, lines, or polygons to create vector objects.Themethod for importing geographic data for differentnetwork systems to the U-Net is the same. For details,see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.



489



The U-Net enables you to calculate path loss between atransmitter and a receiver based on a propagation model.Then you can use the calculated path loss matrix toperform prediction.The method for setting propagationmodels and frequency bands for different networksystems on the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4Setting Propagation Models and Bands.

4 Adding a device You can import or create antennas, create TMAs, feeders,or site equipment.The method for creating site equipmentfor different network systems on the U-Net is the same.For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.


You can import existing base station data to create basestations or use a base station template to automaticallycreate base stations. You can also create sites,transmitters, or repeaters separately. For details, see 7.6Setting CDMA NE Parameters.

6 Planning PN codes/Planningneighboring cells

For details, see 7.8.2 Planning PN Codes and 6.9Planning UMTS Neighboring Cells.The planning results can be applied to NEs.





Procedure




490






Step 3 Click OK.

----End


Choose File > Save or click to save all the information about the project in a projectfile.You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder forsaving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacitysimulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.

NOTE



NOTE




491








7.6 Setting CDMA NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.




492

ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net imports site information in the same way. Fordetails, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.


ContextFor networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a single site in the same way. For details,see 3.7.2 Creating a Single Site.

7.6.3 Setting a CDMA Base Station TemplateThis section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations byusing the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet yourrequirements, you can customize a base station template.


1. Select Template Management from the base station template drop-down list on thetoolbar and open the Station Template Properties dialog box.



For example, .l Create a base station template.



2. Set the properties in the base station template. For details, see Parameter for SettingCDMA Base Station Templates.



Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station Templates.4. Click OK.

----End



493





Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a base station automatically in the sameway. For details, see 3.7.4 Creating Base Stations in Batches.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a repeater in the same way. For details,see 3.7.5 Creating Repeaters.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net creates a transceiver in the same way. For details,see 3.7.6 Creating a Transceiver.

7.6.7 Setting CDMA Cell ParametersThis section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. After setting transceiver parameters, you canset cell parameters.



494

Procedure




Step 4 On the CDMACell tab page of the displayed dialog box, set the properties of the CDMA cell.For parameter description, see Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA Cells.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

7.6.8 Interface Reference for Setting CDMA NE ParametersThis section describes the parameters for setting CDMA NE parameters by using the U-Net.

Parameter for Setting CDMA Base Station TemplatesThis section describes the parameters for creating base station templates or modifying theproperties of base station templates. You can refer to this section when managing base stationtemplates in the Station Template Properties dialog box.







Transceiver Area on the CDMA Tab PageParameter Description



Model Indicates the type of the antenna on the transceiver.




495








Cell Area on the CDMA Tab PageParameter Description


Parameters for Setting the Parameters of CDMA CellsThis section describes the parameters for creating or modifying the properties of a CDMA cell.

Table 7-2 Parameters on the CDMACell tab page






MSC ID Indicates the number of a mobile switching center(MSC) on the live network.

BSC ID Indicates the number of a base station controller (BSC)on the live network.

BTS ID Indicates the number of a base station on the livenetwork.

Cell ID Indicates the number of a cell on the live network.

Sector ID Indicates the number of an antenna.

PN Indicates the PN code assigned to a cell.



496


N*PN INC Indicates the base of a PN code.The number of assigned PN codes is the multiple ofthe base.

PN GROUP Indicates a PN code group.


Neighbors list Sets the list of neighboring cells by clicking thisbutton.Intra-frequency Neighbors indicates a list of intra-frequency neighboring cells.

Comment Remarks.

















497





















498














7.7 CDMA Neighboring Cells PlanningAfter creating NodeBs, you need to plan neighboring cells for the cells on the CDMA network.You can automatically plan neighboring cells in batches or manually plan neighboring cells foreach cell one by one.


Planning neighboring cells is mandatory during initial construction of a network. Whetherneighboring cells are properly planned has direct impacts on the network performance.Traditionally, neighboring cells are manually planned, which features low work efficiency.



499

Currently, neighboring cells are automatically planned, which greatly improves work efficiency,reduces network construction cost, and accelerates network construction. Manual adjustmentsto the results of automatic planning can be made based on the actual situation.

















NOTE




cells.



500





technology.

Procedure








Step 6 Click OK.

----End

7.7.3 Planning CDMA Neighboring CellsThe U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. You can enablethe U-Net to configure neighboring relationships for each cell automatically to reduce handoverproblems resulting from inappropriate neighboring cell configuration.



into the U-Net.

Procedure




501

Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.


Step 4 Set planning parameters in the displayed dialog box. For detailed description of parameters, see7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring Cells.

Step 5 Click Run.

After the planning is complete, the planning results are displayed in the lower pane of the U-Netmain window. For detailed description of parameters, see Parameters for ViewingNeighboring Cell Planning Results.

----End



2. In the navigation tree, choose Neighbor Planning > CDMA.



5. Click OK.

l You can also view, filter, check, and export neighboring cell planning results. For details,see Managing the Result of Neighboring Cell Planning.

7.7.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor CellsThis section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planningis complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modifyneighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.

Prerequisites

The neighboring cell planning is complete.

Procedure



NOTE






502























503























504




505

Figure 7-4 Filter

----End

7.8 CDMA PN Code PlanningThe CDMA system adopts the spread spectrum communication technology to spread thespectrum of signals on forward and reverse links through PN codes. Therefore, proper PN codeplanning is of great importance for improving CDMA network quality.

7.8.1 Basic Knowledge of PN CodesSimilar to the noise sequence, the pseudo-random number (or PN code) is a type of periodicalbinary sequence that seems to be random but actually is regular.

Significance of PN Code PlanningIn the CDMA system, the sectors are differentiated by PN code phase offset. The PN code offsetphases are limited, and a maximum of 512 phases can be used. Therefore, PN code offset needsto be planned. If the reuse distance of PN code offset is too short or the propagation delay is toolong, the propagation of the pilot signals in the air is delayed, compared with the terminal. If thetransmission delay of pilot signals between two cells just compensates for the PN code timeoffset, errors occur when the terminal traces pilot signals. If an error occurs during the callprocess when the terminal identifies the system, the terminal will be handed over to incorrectcells, and call drop may occur.

PN Code Planning ScenariosThe CDMA PN codes can be planned on the basis of network topology and in the followingscenarios: co-PN RRU networking, co-deployment of outdoor macro base stations, indoor microbase stations, and remote RRUs, and repeater networking.



506

The PN code planning is applicable to expanded networks or new networks.

7.8.2 Planning PN CodesThis section describes how to use the U-Net to plan PN codes. You must import a PN groupbefore using this function.

Prerequisites

PN group data has been obtained from customer representatives.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.

Step 3 Right-click and choose Open PN Group from the shortcut menu. The PN Group dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 4 Right-click in the dialog box, and choose Import from the shortcut menu.

Step 5 Select a PN group file and import it to the U-Net.

Step 6 Repeat Step 1 to Step 2.


Step 8 In the displayed dialog box, set planned PN code parameters. For details about the parameters,see 7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN Codes.

Step 9 Click Run.After PN codes are planned, the PN Display dialog box is displayed. For details about theparameters, see 7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning Results.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Show PN code relationships for sectors on the GIS.

1. In the navigation tree, select the box in front of PN Planning.

2. On the map, select a sector or click the head of a row in the planning result table.

The system displays the sectors having the same PN code as the selected sector.

7.8.3 Checking PN Code Planning ResultsYou can filter PN code planning results by specifying a threshold. This helps you to easily locatethe base stations and cells that do not meet the specified thresholds.

Prerequisites

PN code planning is complete.



507

Procedurel Set criteria for checking PN code planning results.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.3. Right-click and choose Open PN Table from the shortcut menu. The PN Display

dialog box is displayed.4. In the dialog box, right-click and choose Audit from the shortcut menu. The Audit

Form dialog box is displayed.5. Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-6. The U-Net allows you to select

multiple check criteria at a time.

Table 7-6 Conditions for checking PN codes


Data Source Indicates the data source.l Existing: The PN codes already exist.l Suggest: The data after PN code planning is not applied

to NEs.

Min Distance Indicates the minimum reuse distance.

Min Layer Indicates the minimum number of reuse layers.

Min Score Indicates the minimum reuse score.

Distance Scope(km)

Indicates the reuse distance scope.

Layer Scope Indicates the reuse layer scope.

Score Scope Indicates the reuse score scope.

Neighbour sectorsused the same PNcode

Indicates that the same PN codes exist between neighboringcells.

6. Click OK to export a check report.

l Perform a 1way-2way check.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.3. Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Check from the shortcut menu. The

1Way-2Way Check dialog box is displayed.4. Set the check criteria by referring to Table 7-7.



508

Table 7-7 1way-2way check criteria


ARFCN Indicates the absolute radio frequency channel number(ARFCN).

Check 1-wayProblem

Indicates that the 1-way check is performed.

Check 2-wayProblem

Indicates that the 2-way check is performed.

Base on ExistedNeighbor and PN

Indicates that the check is based on the data on the existingnetwork.

Base on PlannedNeighbor and PN

Indicates that the check is based on the planning results.

5. Click OK to export a check report. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.8

Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking Results.l Filter 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose PN Planning.3. Right-click and choose 1Way-2Way > Open from the shortcut menu.4. On the One way result or Two way result tab page of the displayed Check Result

dialog box, right-click and choose Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation from theshortcut menu. The Filter Redundant Neighbor Relation dialog box is displayed.

5. Set the filter conditions by referring to Table 7-8.

Table 7-8 Conditions for filtering 1way-2way redundant neighbor relationships


Distance threshold between source celland its neighbor cell(km) >=:

Indicates that the distance between thesource cell and its neighboring cellexceeds the predefined value.

Angle threshold of its neighbor cellrelative to source cell >=:

Indicates that the angle between thesource cell and its neighboring cellexceeds the predefined value.

Angle threshold of source cell relative toits neighbor cell >=:

Indicates that the angle between theneighboring cell and the source cellexceeds the predefined value.

Layer threshold between source cell andits neighbor cell >=:

Indicates that the number of layersbetween the source cell and itsneighboring cell exceeds the predefinedvalue.

6. Click OK.



509

NOTE

In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, filtered 1way-2way redundant neighborrelationships are displayed.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

In the displayed Neighbor Relation dialog box, right-click an item and you can delete thecorresponding data item.

7.8.4 Setting the Display Properties of PN CodesThis section describes how to set the display properties of PN codes on the U-Net. You can setto display cells with identical or adjacent PN codes or set colors and contrast for the cells withidentical or adjacent PN codes, helping you view the planning result of PN codes.

Prerequisites

PN code planning is complete.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, right-click PN Planning and choose Display Option from the shortcutmenu. See Figure 7-5.

Figure 7-5 Display Option

Step 3 In the displayed Display Options dialog box, set the parameters for setting the display propertiesof PN codes. For details about the parameters, see 7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the DisplayProperties of PN Codes.

----End



510

7.9 Interface Reference to CDMA Network PlanningThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for CDMA network planning by using theU-Net.

7.9.1 Parameters for Planning PN CodesThis section describes the parameters for planning PN codes. You can refer to this section whenviewing PN code planning results in the CDMA PN Plan Setting dialog box.


Delete Existed PN Indicates whether to delete the existing PN codes.

Rhombus AngleA: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the numberof layers. The distance between base stations is less than 5km.

Rhombus AngleB: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the numberof layers. The distance between base stations is not less than5 km but less than 10 km.

Rhombus AngleC: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the numberof layers. The distance between base stations is not less than10 km but less than 20 km.

Rhombus AngleD: Indicates the rhombus angle used for calculating the numberof layers. The distance between base stations is not less than20 km.

POI Indicates whether indoor and outdoor cells use the same PNgroup.TRUE: The same PN group is used. FALSE: Different PNgroups are used.

PM TRUE: PN codes in the same PN group can be allocated toonly the cells with the same geographic location (within thedistance specified by MAXDIST_ALLOWED) under thesame base station. FALSE: PN codes in the same PN groupcan be allocated regardless of geographic locations.

MaxDistance Indicates the maximum distance (km) between cells that thesame PN group is allocated to.

Area Indicates the area whose PN codes need to be planned.You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to selectonly the cells to be planned in the area.



511

7.9.2 Parameters for Viewing PN Code Planning ResultsThis section describes the parameters for viewing PN code planning results. You can refer tothis section when viewing PN code planning results in the PN Display dialog box.


MSC_BSC_BTS_Sector Indicates the combination of the MSC ID, BSC ID, BTS ID,and sector ID.

Existed PNG Indicates the existing PN code group of the NE.

Existed PN Indicates the existing PN codes of the NE.

Suggest PNG Indicates the PN groups after the planning.

Suggest PN Indicates the PN codes after the planning.

Sector Name Indicates the name of a sector.

Scene Indicates a scenario.

Score Indicates the PN code reuse score. This parameter measuresthe PN code reuse quality.

Distance Indicates the PN code reuse distance.

Layer Indicates the number of layers involved in the PN codereuse.

Co-Sector Indicates a sector that shares the PN code with the sourcesector.

7.9.3 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of PN CodesThis section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of PN codes. You canrefer to this section when viewing and setting PN code display properties in the DisplayOptions dialog box.



Suggest Displays PN codes in the planning result.

Existed Displays PN codes delivered to the NE.

PN INC Intervals between adjacent PN codes.

Same PN Displays cells with identical PN codes.

Neighborhood PN Displays cells with adjacent PN codes.



512

Table 7-10 Parameters on the Same PN tab page


Indoor Sets the color for indoor cells with identicalPN codes.

Outdoor Sets the color for outdoor cells with identicalPN codes.

Special Sets the color for special cells with identicalPN codes.

Add To Legend Displays neighbor relationships on the mapor not.


Table 7-11 Parameters on the Neighborhood PN tab page


Indoor Sets the color for indoor cells with identicalPN codes.

Outdoor Sets the color for outdoor cells with identicalPN codes.

Special Sets the color for special cells with identicalPN codes.

Add To Legend Displays neighbor relationships on the mapor not.


7.9.4 Parameters for Planning CDMA Neighboring CellsThis section describes the parameters for planning CDMA neighboring cells.



Methods Select Selects a network planning scenario. In the CDMA network,the neighboring cells can be planned only on the basis ofnetwork topology.

Max Neighbor Distance(km) Indicates the maximum neighboring cell distance.If the distance between two cells exceeds the specifiedvalue, the two cells cannot be planned as neighboring cells.



513


Planning Neighbor based onexisted Neighbors

Plan neighboring cells based on the existing neighboringrelationships.If this option is not selected, the existing neighboringrelationships are deleted and neighboring cells arereplanned.

Force Co-site Distance Configures internal cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.

Area Indicates the planning area.l You can select all the cells in an area or click Filter to

select only the cells to be planned in the area.l In the Filter dialog box, you can specify the contents to

be found, set the search direction, and set whether tomatch cases.

Table 7-13 Parameters on the Intra-Frequency tab page


Force Symmetry Indicates whether to forcibly configure unidirectionalneighboring cells as bidirectional neighboring cells.If this option is selected during network capacity expansion,the unidirectional neighboring cells are configured asbidirectional neighboring cells to adjust the originalneighboring relationship table.

Main Frequency Indicates the main ARFCN.

Base on Main Frequency Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN neighboring cells areconfigured based on the configured main-ARFCNneighboring cell relationships.If this option is selected, the non-main-ARFCN neighboringrelationship can be configured only if the main-ARFCNneighboring relationship has been configured.

Base on Topology Indicates that the non-main-ARFCN intra-frequencyneighboring cell is planned based on the topology.If this option is selected, the neighboring cell relationshipcan be configured regardless of whether main-ARFCNneighboring cell relationship has been configured.


Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for a newly established indoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for a newly established outdoor cell.



514





Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for an existing indoor cell.




Indicates the maximum number of outdoor neighboringcells planned for an existing outdoor cell.


















515


Legend Description






















516
























517









7.9.8 Parameters for Viewing 1way-2way Checking ResultsThis section describes the parameters for viewing results of 1way-2way checking

Table 7-19 Parameters on the One way resulttab page


PN Indicates the PN codes.

SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC Indicates the three sectors with One wayrelations.

DistanceAB Indicates the distance between sector A andsector B.

DistanceBC Indicates the distance between sector B andsector C.

Table 7-20 Parameters on the Two way resulttab page


PN Indicates the PN codes.

SectorA<-->SectorB<-->SectorC<-->SectorD

Indicates the four sectors with Two wayrelations.



518


DistanceAB Indicates the distance between sector A andsector B.

DistanceBC Indicates the distance between sector B andsector C.

DistanceCD Indicates the distance between sector C andsector D.



519

8 Multi-Mode Network Planning

About This Chapter

The U-Net supports the planning of the multi-mode network. You can model the actual networkenvironment by importing geographic data, assigning propagation models, and creating basestations based on the imported geographic data. Then you can plan neighboring cells on thehybrid network consisting of the GSM, UMTS, and LTE-FDD, and predict both GSM and UMTSnetwork coverage range to meet your network planning requirements.

8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network PlanningThis section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net.





8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode NetworkThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You needto define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation.

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 8 Multi-Mode Network Planning


520

8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.

8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode NetworkBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode NetworkAfter creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network.The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based ondifferent networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSMnetwork neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed afterconsidering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.



521

8.1 Process of Multi-Mode Network PlanningThis section describes the process of multi-mode network planning. You can refer to this sectionwhen planning a multi-mode network by using the U-Net.

Figure 8-1 shows the process of multi-mode network planning.

Figure 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning




522

Table 8-1 Process of multi-mode network planning









Set traffic parameters related to terminals and services,which are to be used during prediction.For details, see8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-ModeNetwork.


You can import existing base station data to create basestations or use a base station template to automaticallycreate base stations. You can also create sites,transmitters, or repeaters separately.For details, see 8.7Setting Multi-Mode NE Parameters.



8 Planningneighboring cells

For details, see 8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in aMulti-Mode Network.The planning results can be applied to NEs.


For details, see 8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network.



8.2 Creating a ProjectThis section describes how to create a project. You can select different project templates fordifferent network systems. The U-Net creates the project based on the selected template.



523

Currently, the U-Net provides project templates for the following network systems: GSM,UMTS, CDMA, LTE-FDD, and LTE-TDD.


to the network planning for an area or a city.

l One U-Net project may correspond to the network planning of multiple network systems.For example, a U-Net project can be created for the planning of a GSM/UMTS hybridnetwork.

Procedure



Step 2 Select a project template.

l Different network systems correspond to different project templates. You need to select anappropriate project template based on the actual network system.

l If multiple network systems are involved, you need to select the required templates. Forexample, If you need to create a project for a GSM/UMTS hybrid network, you need to selectproject templates for both the GSM and the UMTS networks.


Step 3 Click OK.

----End



You can save project files in .ipl format: .ipl or .ipl (with all data). In the former format,only NE's parameter planning configuration for the project is saved; in the latter format,all the planning calculation results are saved. The former format is selected by default.



524

The U-Net automatically creates an .ipl project file and a project name.losses folder forsaving the information about the path loss matrix and calculation results of capacitysimulation, coverage prediction, and neighboring cell planning in the specified save path.

NOTE


l Open an existing project file.

Choose File > Open to open an existing .ipl project file.

NOTE



Context

The method for importing geographic data for different network systems to the U-Net is thesame. For details, see 3.3 Importing Geographic Data.


Context

The method for setting propagation models and frequency bands for different network systemson the U-Net is the same. For details, see 3.4 Setting Propagation Models and Bands.



Context

The method for creating site equipment for different network systems on the U-Net is thesame. For details, see 3.5 Adding a Device.



525

8.6 Managing Traffic Parameters in a Multi-Mode NetworkThe U-Net obtains the average load of the network based on the simulation calculation of thedetailed user distribution and thus calculates various counters of the radio network. You needto define the traffic parameters before performing prediction and capacity simulation.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets environment types in the same way. Fordetails, see 3.6.5 Setting Environment Types.


Context

For networks with different modes, the U-Net sets user types in the same way. For details, see3.6.6 Setting User Types.


Context


8.6.4 Setting Multi-Mode Service TypesSet the service type such as the voice service and data service. You can modify the parametersof existing service types. If the existing service types do not meet the requirements, you cancreate service types.

Procedure





526


Create a service type 1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >Services > RAT.

2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.3. Set new service type parameters.l For GSM networks, see Parameters for Setting the

GSM Services.l For UMTS networks, see Parameters for Setting the

UMTS Services.l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for Setting the

LTE-FDD Services.l UnionService: see Table 8-2.

Modify an existing servicetype

1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters >Services > Network system > An existing service type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify service type parameters.

Table 8-2 Parameters for setting the multi-mode services

Parameter Meaning


Type Indicates a service type.l CSServie: voice services.l PSServie: data services.

AMR Rate(kbit/s) Indicates the rate of a voice service. The unit is kbit/s.The values are 4.75, 5.15, 5.9, 6.7, 7.4, 7.95, 10.2, and 12.2.

Activity Indicates the uplink/downlink activation factor. Thisparameter is required for only voice services.l Uplink: uplink activation factor. The value ranges from 0

to 1.l Uplink: downlink activation factor. The value ranges from

0 to 1.

Max Throughput(kbit/s) Indicates the maximum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: maximum uplink throughput. The value ranges

from 0 to 107.l Downlink: maximum downlink throughput. The value





527

Parameter Meaning

Min Throughput(kbit/s) Indicates the minimum uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: minimum uplink throughput. The value ranges

from 0 to 107.l Downlink: minimum downlink throughput. The value



Average Throughput(kbit/s) Indicates the average uplink/downlink throughput.l Uplink: average uplink throughput.l Downlink: average downlink throughput.NOTE


Transmission Efficiency Indicates the uplink/downlink transmission rate.l Uplink: uplink transmission rate. The value ranges from

0 to 1.l Downlink: downlink transmission rate. The value ranges

from 0 to 1.

Select Service Indicates the type of a service that processes on a specificnetwork.

----End

8.6.5 Setting Multi-Mode Terminal TypesThis section describes how to create a new multi-mode terminal type for planning and analysison multi-mode networks.

Procedure





528



1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >RAT.

2. Choose New from the shortcut menu.3. Set parameters of the new terminal type.l For GSM networks, see Parameters for setting GSM terminal

types.l For UMTS networks, seeParameters for setting UMTS terminal

types.l For LTE-FDD networks, see Parameters for setting LTE-FDD

terminal types.l UnionTerminal: For example, if a multi-mode terminal supports

both GSM and UMTS, set GSM and UMTS in Select Terminal.


1. In the navigation tree, choose Traffic Parameters > Terminals >Network system > An existing terminal type.

2. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.3. Modify parameters of the existing terminal type.

Step 3 Click OK.

----End

8.7 Setting Multi-Mode NE ParametersYou can import existing base station data to create base stations or use a base station templateto automatically create base stations. You can also create sites, transmitters, or repeatersseparately.


Context





529

Context


8.7.3 Setting a Multi-Mode Base Station TemplateThis section describes how to manage base station templates. You can create base stations byusing the predefined templates of the U-Net. If the predefined templates do not meet yourrequirements, you can customize a base station template.








530

Such as .

l Create a base station template.



2. Set properties of the BTS template.

– For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD base station template, seeParameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base Station Templates.

– For details about setting the properties of an GSM base station template, seeParameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.

– For details about setting the properties of an UMTS base station template, seeParameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.

3. Click OK.

l View and modify properties of the base station template.

1. Select a base station template in the Available Templates area.

2. Click Properties. The Station Template Properties dialog box is displayed.

3. Query and modify properties of the base station template.

– For details about querying and modifying the properties of an LTE-FDD basestation template, see Parameters for Setting LTE-FDD Base StationTemplates.

– For details about querying and modifying the properties of an GSM base stationtemplate, see Parameter for Setting GSM Base Station Templates.

– For details about querying and modifying the properties of an UMTS base stationtemplate, see Parameter for Setting UMTS Base Station Templates.

4. Click OK.

----End







531




8.7.6 Setting Multi-Mode Cell ParametersThis section describes how to set LTE-FDD cell parameters. After a transceiver is set, the U-Net automatically assigns a cell to the transceiver. You must set parameters for multi-mode cellsif the transceiver is a multi-mode transceiver.

ProcedureStep 1 In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.



Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set properties of cells on the Network system tab page.l For details about setting the properties of an LTE-FDD cell, see Parameters for Setting the

Parameters of LTE-FDD Cells.l For details about setting the properties of a GSM cell, see Parameters for Setting the

Parameters of GSM Cells.l For details about setting the properties of a UMTS cell, see Parameters for Setting the

Parameters of UMTS Cells.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

8.8 Prediction of a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode NetworkBy calculating counters, U-Net can estimate network performance, such as cell coverage andchannel quality.

8.8.1 Basic Knowledge of Prediction in a GSM/UMTS Dual-ModeNetwork

This chapter describes the basic knowledge of prediction, including the formula for calculatinglink loss, method for determining the calculation area, meaning of prediction counters, and



532

prediction algorithm. You can develop a better understanding of the prediction function bylearning the basic knowledge.

Basic Knowledge of Coverage Prediction Counters in a GSM/UMTS Dual-ModeNetwork

This section describes the meaning of each coverage prediction counter.

The coverage prediction counters in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network are as follows:l CoverageBySignelLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal chip power is greater than

the sensitivity of the receiver) of a cell.l CoverageByCirLevel: valid coverage area (where the signal CIR is greater than the

specified threshold) of a cell.

Procedure for Performing Coverage PredictionThis section describes the procedure for performing prediction through the U-Net.





533

Prediction Algorithm in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network

In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, the prediction is performed separately in the GSMnetwork and the UMTS network. Therefore, for details about the prediction algorithm, see GSMPrediction Algorithm and UMTS Prediction Algorithm.

Basic Knowledge of Link Loss

Link loss refers to the loss on the entire link from the transmitter to the receiver. When calculatinglink loss, the U-Net considers various loss factors such as path loss, equipment loss, and shadowfading. Loss factors of the uplink are different from loss factors of the downlink.







Factor Meaning













534

Factor Meaning










l Calculation



l Force calculation

If path loss matrices are available, the U-Net deletes all the matrices regardless of thevalidity and calculates the path loss matrix of each cell again. Afterwards, the U-Net checksthe validity of calculation results and updates the results.

Procedure






535












----End




536

8.8.3 Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-ModeNetwork

The U-Net calculates the prediction as per prediction group. Each prediction group consists ofone or more prediction items. You can create prediction groups and modify the properties.

Procedure



1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. In the displayed dialog box, set the precision of prediction on the Predictions tab page.





Figure 8-6 New

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, set prediction group name, whether to calculate immediately, andselect prediction counters. For counter descriptions, see Basic Knowledge of GSM PredictionCounters and Basic Knowledge of UMTS Prediction Counters.

Step 5 Click Next.

Step 6 In the displayed dialog box, set the prediction group properties. For detailed description ofparameters, see 8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTS Dual-Mode Network.



537

Step 7 Click OK.


----End

Follow-up Procedure






----End


Procedure









538

NOTE




----End



1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver > Sitex_x.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Click Antenna Config tab Page.5. Modify the value of Mechanical Downtilt or Electrical Downtilt.






menu.

8.8.6 Exporting Planning ResultsYou can export and print prediction results in batches or export the detailed prediction result byBin point.

Exporting Coverage Prediction Statistical Results in BatchesAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can select one or more counters and then exporta statistical report on the prediction as a .csv file and a prediction map in .mif or .jpg format.




539

Exporting Detailed Prediction Results by Bin PointsAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can export detailed prediction results of the Binpoints in a specified area.

Procedure


Step 2 Select the objects to be exported.


Export the detailed predictionresults of a prediction group


Export the detailed predictionresults of a single counter in aprediction group

In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx >counter item.

Step 3 Choose Export BIN By > Polygon from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the area to be exported.

The U-Net only exports the detailed prediction results of the Bin points in the selected area.


----End

Printing Coverage Prediction Results in BatchesAfter the prediction calculation is complete, you can print the prediction results of counters inbatches. The results include prediction chart, geographic data, and base station data.


8.8.7 Parameters for Creating a Prediction Group in a GSM/UMTSDual-Mode Network

This section describes the parameters for creating a prediction group and setting its properties.You can refer to this section when creating a prediction group in the New Prediction Groupdialog box or setting the properties of a prediction group in the Group Properties dialog box.



540

Parameters in the New Prediction Group Dialog BoxParameter Meaning

Group Name Indicates the name of a prediction group,which uniquely identifies a prediction group.The U-Net enters the default name of eachnew prediction group.

Prediction Type Selects the prediction of the GSM/UMTSdual-mode network.

Study Selected Indicates the prediction counter.

Calculate Now Indicates whether to calculate the predictioncounter immediately.

Parameters in the Group Properties dialog box

Table 8-4 Parameters on the General tab Page

Parameter Meaning



Cell Edge Coverage Probability Indicates the probability of cell edgecoverage, that is, the probability that thereceive signal strength is stronger than thespecified threshold at the edge of a cell.

Polygon Selects the area calculated in prediction.

Technology Selects both GSM and UMTS.

With Shadow Indicates whether shadow fading isconsidered in the calculation.

Indoor Coverage Indicates whether penetration loss isconsidered in the calculation.

Table 8-5 Parameters on the GSM tab Page

Parameter Meaning

CIRGate(dB) Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used todetermine the GSM coverage area based onCIR.

Sensitivity(dBm) Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.



541

Parameter Meaning

Terminal Indicates the type of a terminal.

Service Indicates the service type.

Table 8-6 Parameters on the UMTS tab Page

Parameter Meaning

CIRGate(dB) Indicates the C/I threshold, which is used todetermine the UMTS coverage area based onCIR.

Sensitivity(dBm) Indicates the sensitivity of a receiver.

Terminal Indicates the type of a terminal.

Service Indicates the service type.

8.9 Neighboring Cell Planning in a Multi-Mode NetworkAfter creating NodeBs, you must plan neighboring cells for the cells on the multi-mode network.The U-Net supports the function of performing neighboring cell planning separately based ondifferent networks. UMTS network planning can be performed after considering the co-site GSMnetwork neighboring relationships. LTE-FDD neighboring cell planning can be performed afterconsidering the co-site GSM and UMTS network neighboring relationships.




The U-Net determines the neighbor relationships of a serving cell from the following aspects:l If a cell is covered by the same base station as the serving cell, it is considered as a

neighboring cell of the serving cell.



542


l The existing neighboring cell relationships are not changed.l Whether a cell is configured as a neighboring cell of the serving cell to ensure bidirectional

neighbor relationship.


l Topology: algorithm based on topologyl Prediction: algorithm based on coverage predictionl Topology + Prediction: algorithm based on topology and coverage prediction



l 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planning for a New Networkl 6.9.4 Neighboring Cell Replanning for a Partially Expanded Networkl 6.9.5 Replanning of Neighboring Cells from 2G Network to 3G Networkl 6.9.6 Checking and Optimizing Neighboring Cell Configuration

NOTE




cells.l The neighbor relationships to be imported must be collected into a neighbor relationship

template. You can obtain the neighbor relationship template by exporting neighborrelationships.



Cell ID, Sector ID, ARFCN, and BNDCLS.



543

l Neighbor relationships of a multi-mode network must be imported separately by networktechnology.

Procedure








Step 6 Click OK.

----End

8.9.3 Planning Neighboring Cells in a Multi-Mode NetworkThe U-Net provides the function of automatically planning neighboring cells. With this functionenabled, the neighboring cell relationships for each cell can be planned automatically. Thisreduces the number of handovers due to improper neighboring cell configuration. For a hybridnetwork supporting LTE-FDD, the U-Net plans a GSM/UMTS neighboring cell for blindhandover from a LTE-FDD cell.

Contextl The U-Net supports cell planning in GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD dual-mode or multi-mode

networks.

l The U-Net performs automatic neighboring cell planning on a per RAT basis. For example,in a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, automatic neighboring cell planning must beperformed separately in the GSM network and the UMTS network.

l In a GSM/UMTS dual-mode network, UMTS neighboring cell planning can be performedin reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-sited GSM cell.

l On a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-mode network, LTE-FDD neighboring cell planningcan be performed in reference to the neighboring cell planning of the co-site GSM or UMTScell.

l This section describes the neighboring cell planning on a GSM/UMTS/LTE-FDD multi-mode network.

Procedure

Step 1 For neighboring cell planning of a GSM network, see 5.9.3 Planning GSM NeighboringCells.



544

Step 2 For neighboring cell planning of a UMTS network, see 6.9.3 Initial Neighboring Cell Planningfor a New Network.

Step 3 For neighboring cell planning of an LTE-FDD network, see Planning LTE-FDD NeighboringCells.

----End

8.9.4 Viewing the Planning Result of Neighbor CellsThis section describes how to manage the result of neighboring cell planning. After the planningis complete, you can view, filter, remove the filter effect on, audit, export, and modifyneighboring cell relationships of all the cells in the network.

Prerequisites

The neighboring cell planning is complete.

Procedure



NOTE













545




















546




















547




548

Figure 8-8 Filter

----End













549









550

9 FAQ

About This Chapter

This section provides the frequently asked questions (FAQs) related to the U-Net.

9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installing the U-NetThis section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensurethat the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.

9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net Software Installation Packages At Huawei SupportWebsiteThis section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packagesat huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available athuawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packagesbased on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you downloadinstallation packages from huawei support website.

9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field Mapping AreaIn the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported matchthose in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displaysthe Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in thissection.

9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or Export Data From an XLS File in MicrosoftOffice 2007This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS filein Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net toimport data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has beeninstalled.

9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7 Operating System When the Directory ofthe Map Contains Chinese CharactersThis section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system whenthe directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information whenthe directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operatingsystem.

9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function ProperlyThis section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function isused, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Refer

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 9 FAQ


551

to the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthViewfunction.

9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable the Progress Bar for Creating a Projectto Display ProperlyThis section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creatinga project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creatinga project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly afterthe printer is disconnected from the network.

9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit Operating SystemThis section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message whenthe U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to thefollowing information if the preceding problem occurs.

9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results in Project Creation FailureThis section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damagedor missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You canrefer to this section when a project fails to be created.



552

9.1 How Do I Select the Required Software Before Installingthe U-Net

This section describes how to select the required software before installing the U-Net to ensurethat the U-Net runs properly. Refer to the following information before you install the U-Net.

Question

How do I select the required software before installing the U-Net?

Answer

The software to be installed in advance varies according to the U-Net version. Select the softwareto be installed based on the U-Net version.

If... Then...

The U-Net 3.5 is to be installed l Install the Microsoft Office 2003.l Log in to http://www.microsoft.com,

and download the .NET Framework2.0.

The U-Net 3.6 or U-Net 3.7 is to be installed Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, anddownload the .NET Framework3.5.

The U-Net 3.8 is to be installed Log in to http://www.microsoft.com, anddownload the .NET Framework4.0.

The Volcano propagation model is required Contact Siradel to purchase Volcano 3.1.2 ora later version.

----End

9.2 How Do I Select The GENEX U-Net SoftwareInstallation Packages At Huawei Support Website

This section describes how to select the proper GENEX U-Net software installation packagesat huawei support website. Four GENEX U-Net software installation packages are available athuawei support website. You need to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packagesbased on the configurations of PCs. Refer to the following information before you downloadinstallation packages from huawei support website.

Question

How to select the GENEX U-Net software installation packages at Huawei support website?



553

http://www.microsoft.com




AnswerStep 1 View the four GENEX U-Net software installation packages at http://support.huawei.com, as

shown in Figure 9-1.

Figure 9-1 GENEX U-Net V300R008C00

l Huawei.UNet32(exclude framework)

Supports 32-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.l Huawei.UNet64

Supports 64-bit operating system, including the .net framework.l Huawei.UNet64(exclude framework)

Supports 64-bit operating system, excluding the .net framework.l Huawei.UNet32

Supports 32-bit operating system, including the .net framework.NOTE

l Normally, Windows XP is a 32-bit operating system.l Windows 7 operating system falls into 32-bit and 64-bit operating systems. Right-click My

Computer and choose Properties from the shortcut menu to view bits of the operating system andselect corresponding installation packages.

Step 2 Check whether the .net framework is installed in Add/Remove Programs and select installationpackages based on the actual situation.

If... Then...

The .net framework hasbeen installed.

Download the installation package excluding the .net framework.

The .net framework isnot installed.

Download the installation package including the .net framework.

----End

9.3 How Do I Check Field Matching in the Field MappingArea

In the Field Mapping area, you can check whether the fields in the file to be imported matchthose in the U-Net system. When you import a file to the U-Net and the system already displaysthe Data Import or Import File dialog box, you can refer to the information provided in thissection.



554

Question

How to check field matching in the Field Mapping area?

Answer

Step 1 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Source row, as shown inFigure 9-2.

Figure 9-2 Field Mapping area

l The Source row displays the column fields of the file to be imported.

l If the Source row cannot display field names correctly, you need to modify the file to beimported.

l The U-Net has requirements on the format of the file to be imported. Therefore, it isrecommended that you export the existing data in the system to a file, which is used as atemplate. After that, you modify data based on the template and then import the file to theU-Net.

Step 2 In the Field Mapping area, check the display result of each cell in the Destination row.

If... Then...

Display IGNORE. l It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported do not matchthose in the system. Therefore, the data of this column cannotbe imported to the U-Net.

l If the fields in the file to be imported match some existing fields

in the system. You can click next to the cell to manuallymatch them.

NOTEl Among the fields in the system, there are one or more fields that must

be matched. These fields must match those in the file to be imported.Otherwise, you cannot click Import or the system prompts an errormessage when you click Import.

l For example, when you import a site file, Site Name is a field that mustbe matched.

Display existing fieldnames in the system.

It indicates that the fields in the file to be imported match those inthe system. Therefore, the data of this column can be imported tothe U-Net.

----End



555

9.4 How Do I Use the U-Net to Import Data Into or ExportData From an XLS File in Microsoft Office 2007

This section describes how to use the U-Net to import data into or export data from an XLS filein Microsoft Office 2007. Refer to the following information if you cannot use the U-Net toimport data into or export data from an XLS file after the Microsoft Office 2007 has beeninstalled.

QuestionWhen data is being imported into or exported from an XLS file, a dialog box is displayed, asshown in Figure 9-3. How can I solve the problem? The following takes exporting neighboringcell relationships for example.

Figure 9-3 Export neighbor relation

AnswerSet regional language of the operating system to be the same as the language of the currentversion of Microsoft Office 2007 by referring to workaround measures provided by theMicrosoft.

If the language of the current version of Microsoft Office 2007 is English, set regional languageof the operating system to English (United States) on the Regional Options tab page, as shownin Figure 9-4.



556

Figure 9-4 Regional and Language Options

----End

9.5 How Do I Import a Map in an English Windows 7Operating System When the Directory of the Map ContainsChinese Characters

This section describes how to import a map in an English Windows 7 operating system whenthe directory of the map contains Chinese characters. Refer to the following information whenthe directory of an imported map contains Chinese characters in an English Windows 7 operatingsystem.

QuestionHow to solve the problem if a map fails to be imported and displayed in an English Windows 7operating system because the directory of the map contains Chinese characters?

Answer

Step 1 Choose Control Panel > Region and Language > Administrative, as shown in Figure 9-5.



557

Figure 9-5 Region and Language

Step 2 Click Change system locale.

Step 3 In the displayed dialog box, select Chinese (Simplified,PRC) from the Current systemlocale drop-down list box, as shown in Figure 9-6.



558

Figure 9-6 Region and Language Settings

Step 4 Restart the PC.

----End

9.6 How Do I Use the EarthView Function ProperlyThis section describes how to solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function isused, such as failure to load the Google Earth, garbled images, and other abnormal display. Referto the following information if the preceding problems occur when you are using the EarthViewfunction.

QuestionHow do I solve the problems that occur when the EarthView function is used, such as failure toload the Google Earth, garbled images, abnormal display during remote connection attempts,and other abnormal display events?

Answer

Step 1 Ensure that the Google Earth client in 6.0.3.2197 or later is installed.

Step 2 You are advised to select DirectX in the Graphics Mode area, as shown in Figure 9-7.



559

Figure 9-7 Google Earth Options

----End

9.7 How Do I Configure the Default Printer to Enable theProgress Bar for Creating a Project to Display Properly

This section describes how to configure the default printer to enable the progress bar for creatinga project to display properly. Refer to the following information if the progress bar for creatinga project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the new project runs properly afterthe printer is disconnected from the network.

QuestionThe progress bar for creating a project remains unchanged for a long period of time but the newproject runs properly after the printer is disconnected from the network. How can I solve theproblem?

AnswerIf you set a remote printer as a default printer, the access to a local printer takes a long periodof time or fails. In this case, the system runs slowly or the progress bar for creating a projectremains unchanged when you obtain printer parameters to create a project.

Set a local printer that is accessible as the default printer or delete all printers.

----End



560

9.8 How Do I Draw a Polygon in the Windows XP 64-bitOperating System

This section describes how to solve the problem that the system displays an error message whenthe U-Net is used to draw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system. Refer to thefollowing information if the preceding problem occurs.

QuestionHow to solve the problem that the system displays an error message when the U-Net is used todraw a polygon in the Windows XP 64-bit operating system?

AnswerThe MSVCR71.DLL system library file needs to be invoked when you are using the U-Net todraw a graph. This system library file is delivered with all Windows operating systems by defaultexcept the Windows XP 64-bit operating system.

In a Windows XP 32-bit operating system, search the MSVCR71.DLL system library file inthe System32 directory. Then copy the file to the SysWOW64 directory in the Windows XP64-bit operating system.

----End

9.9 How Do I Rectify the ODBC Drive Fault That Results inProject Creation Failure

This section describes how to solve the problem when a project fails to be created due to damagedor missing information in the regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll file of JET 4.0 in the registry. You canrefer to this section when a project fails to be created.

QuestionHow do I solve the problem when a project fails to be created and the dialog box in Figure9-8 is displayed?

Figure 9-8 Creating project failed

Answer

Step 1 Choose Start > Run. The Run dialog box is displayed.



561

Step 2 Type regsvr32 msjetoledb40.dll in the dialog box.

Step 3 Click OK.

Step 4 Restart the computer.

----End



562

10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions

About This Chapter

The U-Net provides functions in addition to network planning, such as moving a map, zoomingin or out a map, measuring distances on a map, and setting NE display.

10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a MapThis section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, changethe scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left,or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling doesnot change.

10.2 Measuring Distance on the MapThis section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance betweentwo points on the map by using the distance measurement tool.

10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two PointsYou can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terraininformation about the two points.

10.4 Querying the Legend InformationThis section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window.You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results,and capacity simulation results in the map window.

10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google EarthThe U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons)and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the GoogleEarth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed inthree-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results andreduces the workload of field survey.

10.6 Setting Layer Display PropertiesThis section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported,the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You canselect a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer isaccurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers sothat you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 10 U-Net Auxiliary Functions


563

10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map LayersYou can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .pngor .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of theactual geographic data.

10.8 Managing Table WindowsYou can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and trafficparameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing orswitching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the informationprovided in this section.

10.9 Managing Docked WindowsThe U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysiswindow, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style ofdocked windows.

10.10 Managing the Explorer WindowThe Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In theExplorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manageeach node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You canmodify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the datacorresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a largeamount of data.

10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEsThis section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports severalmodes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about basestations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quicklyidentify a base station.

10.12 Searching Sites and CellsThis section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searchingsites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you needto type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell,or repeater in the map window.

10.13 Grouping Sites and CellsThis section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on thegrouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existingattributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customizea grouping mode.

10.14 Displaying the Cell HexagonDisplay the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular gridbased on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reducesadjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency.

10.15 Importing BCP DataThe U-Net allows you to import basic call process (BCP) data. By importing such data, you canobtain configuration data on the live network, such as neighbor relationships and frequencies.

10.16 Printing Planning ResultsYou can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent networkconstruction.

10.17 Calibrating Propagation Models



564

You can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path lossmatrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value.

10.18 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary FunctionsThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.



565

10.1 Moving, Centering, and Zooming In/Out on a MapThis section describes how to adjust a map. You can magnify a certain area on a map, changethe scaling of a map, center a map based on a selected object, and move a map up, down, left,or right. When you center a map based a certain object or move a map, the existing scaling doesnot change.

Procedurel Zoom in on or zoom out on a map.

You can zoom in on and zoom out on a map by changing the position of the mouse pointer.

1. Click on the toolbar to zoom in on or zoom out on a map.

2. Click on the map.

– Click in the map window to zoom in on the map.

– Right-click in the map window to zoom out on the map.TIP

l You can scroll the mouse wheel forward or backward to zoom in on or zoom out on themap.

l Alternatively, you can right-click in the map window and choose Zoom In or Zoom Outto zoom in on or zoom out on the map.

l Magnify an area on a map.

1. Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and chooseDefine a Zoom Area from the shortcut menu.

2. Click a corner of the area to be magnified on the map.

3. Hold and drag the mouse pointer to the diagonal corner of the area.

Release the mouse button. Then, the selected area is magnified.

l Select a scaling.


2. Select a scaling from the drop-down list box.

If the required scaling is not available in the list, you can click

, type the required scaling in the box, and press Enter. The U-Net zooms in on or zooms out on the map based on the specified scaling.

l Move a map.


2. Move the mouse pointer to the map and drag the map to the required direction.

l Center the map.

– To enable the map to center on the map, click on the toolbar.



566

– To enable the map to center on an object in the map window, right-click an object inthe Explorer window and choose Center in The Map from the shortcut menu.

----End

10.2 Measuring Distance on the MapThis section describes how to measure the linear distance and the folding line distance betweentwo points on the map by using the distance measurement tool.

Procedure

Step 1 Click on the toolbar. Alternatively, right-click in the map window and choose DistanceMeasurement from the shortcut menu.

Step 2 Click a point on the map and use it as the starting point for measuring the distance.

Then, the starting point is fixed. When the pointer moves away from the starting point, a reddotted line appears between the pointer and the starting point. The distance between the pointerand the starting point is displayed in the status bar in real time.

Step 3 Click another point on the map and use it as the second point for measuring the distance.

Then, the red dotted line between the starting point and the second line becomes a red continuousline.

Step 4 Repeat Step 3 to add several points to form a folding line.

Then, the following information is displayed in the status bar:

Distance: Distance between the second-to-last point and the last point/Distance between the firstpoint and the last point

Step 5 Double-click the line or right-click in the map window to complete the distance measurement.

----End

10.3 Querying the Terrain Profile Between Two PointsYou can query the terrain profile between any two points to understand and analyze the terraininformation about the two points.

Procedure

Step 1 Click on the toolbar in the U-Net main interface.

The Terrain View window is displayed in the U-Net main interface.

Step 2 Click in the map window to determine the start point of the terrain analysis line.

After determining the start point, move the cursor. A dotted line appears between the cursor andthe start point.

Right-click to exit the drawing of the terrain analysis line.



567

Step 3 Click in another place in the map window to determine the end point of the terrain analysis line.

After the end point is determined, a continuous line appears between the two points.

The terrain profile of the two points is displayed in the Terrain View window.

NOTE

l The system allows you to draw only one terrain analysis line.

l After a terrain analysis line is drawn, click in any place in the map window. The original terrain analysisline disappears and the system begins to draw a new terrain analysis line.

Step 4 As shown in Figure 10-1, set the following parameters in the Terrain View window:l Transceiver height: Indicates the height of a transmitter.l Receiver height: Indicates the height of a receiver.l Show building: Indicates whether to show the buildings.l Frequency: Indicates the frequency of a transmitter.

After the parameters are set, the Terrain View window will automatically update and displaythe terrain profile.

Figure 10-1 Terrain View window

----End

10.4 Querying the Legend InformationThis section describes how to query the legend information about each object in the map window.You can query the legend information about the geographic data, DT data, prediction results,and capacity simulation results in the map window.

ContextYou can select legend objects for display based on the service analysis requirement. For example,during the prediction, the map displays multiple prediction results and you may find it difficultto query the required prediction result. In this case, you can select or clear a legend object todisplay or hide certain prediction results. Therefore, you can focus on the key services. Then,only the selected legend object is displayed in the legend window.

This section describes how to query the legend information about the prediction results. Theprocedure for querying other legend information is similar to the procedure for querying thelegend information about the prediction results.



568

Procedure

Step 1 Select a legend object.1. In the Explorer window, click the Operation tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Predictions > Groupx > counter item.3. Choose Properties from the shortcut menu.4. Click the Display tab.5. In the last column of the object list, select legend objects as required.

NOTEThe non-selected object will not be displayed in the legend window.

If the default legend objects cannot meet your analysis requirements, you can define newobjects. For example, to add a new legend object before an existing legend object, you canselect the existing legend object and choose Actions > Insert Before; then, the systemcreates the new legend object automatically.

6. Select Add to legend. The legend of prediction is displayed in the Legend window.7. Optional: Select Show Statistic. The statistics on the selected ranges are displayed in the

Legend window.

Step 2 Set the display parameters of the legend.

You can set the color, description, and value range of a legend in the object list.

Step 3 Query the legend information.Choose Window > Legend. The Legend window is displayed.

After the prediction calculation is complete, the description information and color of all theselected legend objects in the project are displayed in the legend window.

----End

10.5 Exporting a Map to the Google EarthThe U-Net enables you to display the map elements (such as base stations, cells, and polygons)and planning results (such as prediction results and capacity simulation results) on the GoogleEarth and export them as .kmz files. In this way, a two-dimensional map can be displayed inthree-dimensional mode, which enables you to easily query the network planning results andreduces the workload of field survey.

Prerequisitesl A coordinate system is available.l The PC is connected to the Internet.

Procedure

Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The Earth View dialog box is displayed.You must set a coordinate system. For detailed description of parameters, see 3.3.7 Configuringthe Projection Mode and Spheroid Data.



569

Step 2 Select the object to be displayed on the Google Earth. For detailed description of parameters,see 10.18.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google Earth.

Step 3 Click View to connect the U-Net to the Google Earth.

Step 4 Optional: Click Save to save the selected U-Net data to a .kmz file.

By default, the .kmz file is saved on the desktop of the PC and the file name isUNet_Generated.kmz. You can also click to reset the path to save the file and the file name.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can query objects displayed in three-

dimensional mode on the Google Earth. See Figure 10-2.l After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can select or clear the objects

described in Step 2 in the navigation tree in the Explorer window of the U-Net. In this way,the objects can be displayed or hidden on the Google Earth.

l After the U-Net is connected to the Google Earth, you can modify the objects described inStep 2, such as creating or deleting a prediction group or a polygon. Upon completion ofthe modification, perform Step 1 to Step 4 again to refresh the display status of the GoogleEarth.

Figure 10-2 Three-dimensional display of objects on the Google Earth

10.6 Setting Layer Display PropertiesThis section describes how to set layer display properties. After the geographic data is imported,the data is displayed on different layers in the map window based on the data types. You can



570

select a layer to be displayed and adjust its position to ensure that the data on this layer isaccurately and clearly displayed. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of layers sothat you can check the display and print effect of multiple layers.


ContextA map consists of a series of layers. The top layer can be clearly viewed in the map. It can alsobe clearly viewed after the map is printed. The visibility of the bottom layer depends on thedefinition and transparency of the upper layers.

On the U-Net, the display sequence of the layers is determined by the sequence of the nodesunder the Map node on the Geo tab page in the Explorer window. You can adjust the sequenceof each node under the Map node to adjust the display sequence of each layer.

You can use the U-Net to adjust the display sequence of the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text,Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights and the display sequence of the sublayers of theselayers. In addition, you can adjust the display sequence of the prediction counters in the mapwindow.

Procedurel Select the layer objects to be displayed.

In the Explorer window, you can select or clear the check box of a layer object to displayor hide the layer object. For example, if you select the check box of Map on the Geo tabpage, all the layers corresponding to the nodes under the Map node are displayed in themap window. If you clear the check box of a node under the Map node, the layercorresponding to the node is hidden in the map window.

NOTE

The hidden object in the map window is still taken into account during calculation.

l Adjust the position of a layer.

During network planning, the U-Net supports the offset of the layers Satellitic,Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings, Clutter, and Heights. This enables users to adjustthe map and positions of the sites.

1. In the Explorer window, click the GEO tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.3. Choose Adjust Map from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Map dialog box is

displayed.. See Figure 10-3.



571

Figure 10-3 Adjust Map

4. Select the layer to be adjusted from the Map Layer drop-down list.

If only one layer is selected after the layer is selected, its geodetic coordinates at thenorthern boundary are displayed in the Top of Layer field and its geodetic coordinatesat the western boundary is displayed in the Left of Layer field. The vertical offset ofthe layer is displayed in the Y Offset text box and the horizontal offset of the layer isdisplayed in the X Offset text box. If two or more layers are selected or no layer isselected, no value is displayed for Top of Layer, Left of Layer, Y Offset, and XOffset.

NOTEFor the offset of the layers Geometry, Text, and Vector, The values of Top of Layer and Leftof Layer are not displayed. For the offset of the layers Satellitic, Buildings, Clutter, andHeights, The values of Top of Layer and Left of Layer indicate the geodetic coordinates ofcorresponding layers.

5. Type the layer offset in the text box in the middle and set the offset direction by clickingUp, Down, Left, or Right.

The offset of a layer ranges from 10 meters to 10,000 meters.6. Click Close. The layer position adjustment is complete.

The positions of layers are refreshed in the map window accordingly.l Adjust the display sequence of layers.

1. On the Geo tab page of the Explorer window, select the nodes corresponding to thetarget layer objects under the Map node.

The layer objects include the layers Satellitic, Geometry, Text, Vector, Buildings,Clutter, and Heights.

2. Click a layer object and drag it to the new position.



572

The horizontal black line indicates the position where the object is to be placed whenyou release the mouse. After you drag the object, the U-Net automatically refreshesthe display effect of the map based on the adjusted sequence.

----End

10.7 Saving Display Effect of Map LayersYou can export the display effect of overlapped layers in the map window as images in .bmp, .pngor .jpg format. The resolution of the exported images is consistent with the resolution of theactual geographic data.


Procedure

Step 1 Select the objects to be exported.


Exportoverlapped layers

1. Under the Geo tab in the Explorer window, select the layers to beexported under the Map node.

2. In the navigation tree, choose Map.

Export a singlelayer


2. In the navigation tree, choose Map > sub map layer.

Step 2 Choose Save As from the shortcut menu. The Export Map Layer dialog box is displayed.

Step 3 Set the area for export.

l Full Map: exports the entire map.

l A polygon: exports the external rectangular area of a polygon.

Step 4 Set the resolution for export.

l Origin Map Scale: exports images according to the original resolution of the geographicdata.

l Current Map Scale: exports images according to the display resolution of the geographicdata in the map window.

Step 5 Set the save path, file name, and file format of the exported file.TIP

The higher the resolution is, the larger the map size is. Before exporting a map, ensure that the save pathhas sufficient free disk space.

Step 6 Click Save.

----End



573

10.8 Managing Table WindowsYou can open table windows with various contents (such as NE parameters and trafficparameters) in a U-Net project. When performing common operations (such as closing orswitching tables) or using shortcut menus in a table window, you can refer to the informationprovided in this section.

Procedurel Table 10-1 lists the common operations provided in a table window.

Table 10-1 Common operations provided in a table window

If... Then...

Close a table window. Click .

Display a table window atthe very front.

Double-click the title of the table window.Usually, table windows are displayed as tabs in theworking area of the U-Net main window.

Switch a table window. Click the tab title. Alternatively, you can click on theright and then select the required table window from thedrop-down list.

Drag a column in a tablewindow.

Click the column name to select it. Then, click the columnname again, hold the left mouse button, and drag thecolumn to the required position when the mouse arrow

changes to .Not all the table windows support this function.

l Table 10-2 describes the shortcut menus provided in a table window.

NOTE

If a shortcut menu item in a table window grays out, it indicates that the function is not supported in thetable window or the function is currently unavailable.

Table 10-2 Shortcut menus provided in a table window

Name Description

Import Imports a file in the .txt, .csv, .xls, or .xlsx format.NOTEl If a file fails to be imported, check whether the parameter names in the

file to be imported match those in the table window.

l You can right-click in a table window and then choose DisplayColumns from the shortcut menu to display all the parameter names ofthe current table.

Export Exports the data of all the available columns in a table. The fileexported is in the .txt, .csv, or .xls format.



574

Name Description

Record Properties Displays the property panel of the NE corresponding to the selectedcell.

Table Fields Opens the window for customizing table fields. The window is usedfor setting customized fields and supports the Site, Transceiver, andCell tables.You can click Add, Delete, or Properties to add, delete, or modifya customized field. For parameter description, see 10.18.2Parameters for Setting Custom Fields.

Display Columns Opens the Columns to be displayed window, which is used toshow or hide table columns.

Hide Columns Hides the currently selected column. After performing thisoperation, you can use the Display Columns function to show thecolumn again.TIP

You can click a column title to select the column.

Freeze Columns Freezes the currently selected column.A frozen column is displayed as the first column in a table. Whenyou view table data, the frozen column is displayed in the windowall the time for viewing.

Unfreeze allColumns

Unfreezes a frozen column.l This function is available after you perform the Freeze

Columns operation.l Before performing this operation, you must select a table

column.

Copy Copies selected data.

Paste Pastes data.

Delete Deletes data in the selected row.

Filter by Selection Filters data according to the selected cell.Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of theselected cell. If the data is consistent, the system displays the datarecord corresponding to the selected cell.TIP

You can also select multiple cells in a same column and then perform datafiltering. If the data of any cell is the same as that of other cells in thecolumn, the data remains to be displayed.



575

Name Description

Filter ExcludingSelection

Filters data reversely according to the selected cell.l Compare the data of other cells in the column with the data of

the selected cell. If the data is different, the system displays thedata record corresponding to the selected cell.

l You can also select multiple cells in a same column and thenperform data reverse filtering. If the data is not the same as thatof other cells in the column, the data remains to be displayed.

Remove Filter Removes all the filter conditions.This function is available after you perform the Filter bySelection or Filter Excluding Selection operation.

Sort Ascending Sorts table data in the selected column in ascending order.

Sort Descending Sorts table data in the selected column in descending order.

NOTE

The system saves the current table settings while saving the project, for example, display order ofcolumns, row height, and column width.

----End

10.9 Managing Docked WindowsThe U-Net provides multiple types of docked windows, such as explorer window, point analysiswindow, event window, and resource usage window. You can customize the display style ofdocked windows.

Procedurel Display a docked window.

– If you want to display a docked window, select Window > Name of the dockedwindow.

– If you do not want to display a docked window, deselect Window > Name of the dockedwindow.

l Hide a docked window.

When a docked window is not active, you can click at the upper right corner of thewindow to hide it at the window border. When you place the pointer at the correspondingposition of the window border, the system automatically displays the docked window.When you move the pointer away, the system automatically hides the docked window.

To undo the operation of hiding a docked window, you can click at the upper rightcorner of the window. Then, the hidden docked window is displayed.

l Float a docked window.



576

Double-click the title bar of the docked window. The docked window moves away fromthe dock area and floats over the workspace. If you double-click the title bar again, thedocked window returns to the previous dock area.

You can move a docked window by clicking or moving the title bar.

----End

10.10 Managing the Explorer WindowThe Explorer window is a docked window, which plays an important role in the U-Net. In theExplorer window, data items and objects are arranged in the form of nodes. You can manageeach node by right-clicking it and then choosing an option from the shortcut menu. You canmodify the contents under a node or edit a subnode under a node. In addition, the datacorresponding to most nodes can be managed in tables. This helps you to easily manage a largeamount of data.

ContextThe Explorer window provides the following sections:

l GEO ( ), which provides entries to geographic data management

l Data ( ), which provides entries to radio data management and calculation

l Network ( ), which provides entries to engineering parameter management

l Operation ( ), which provides entries to prediction, simulation, and planning.

For details about each section, see 1.3 Main Window of the U-Net. This section describes onlythe basic operations of the Explorer window.

Procedurel Switch to a specific section in the Explorer window.

Click a tab in the Explorer window to switch to the corresponding section. For example,to display the Data section, click the Data tab.

l Expand or collapse a section in the Explorer window.

The objects are organized in the form of nodes in each section. Any section that containsone or more object nodes has an expand button ( ) or a collapse button ( ) next to thesection name. To expand a section, click next to the section name.

l Display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the corresponding nodein the navigation tree of the Explorer window.

You can display or hide an object on the map by selecting or deselecting the correspondingnode in the navigation tree of the Explorer window. You can deselect the nodecorresponding to an object to hide this object on the map. In this way, another object canbe clearly displayed on the map. For example, you can hide all the prediction results exceptone prediction result. In this way, the reserved prediction result can be clearly displayed.

The following description takes the hiding of one object as an example to explain thisoperation. Click a tab in the Explorer window and then deselect an object under the tab.The deselected object is hidden and will not be displayed in the map window.



577

NOTE

l The hidden object is not displayed in the map window, but is still considered during calculation.

l You can hide all the contents under a node by deselecting the node name. If the check box next to anode is displayed as , it indicates that certain objects are displayed and certain objects are hiddenunder this node.

----End

10.11 Setting the Display Properties of NEsThis section describes how to set the display properties of NEs. The U-Net supports severalmodes to display the information about base stations. You can select the information about basestations to be displayed and set the display style of base stations. In this way, you can quicklyidentify a base station.

ContextThe method for setting the display style of the Site is similar to that of the Transceiver. Thissection takes setting the display style of the Transceiver as an example.

Procedure



Step 3 Choose Display Setting from the shortcut menu. The Display Field dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set the display style. For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.4 Parameters for SettingNE Display Properties.

Step 5 Click OK.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureAll the NEs in the project are displayed in the map window according to the preset display style.

10.12 Searching Sites and CellsThis section describes how to search sites and cells. The U-Net provides the function of searchingsites, transceivers, cells, and repeaters. To search a site, transceiver, cell, or repeater, you needto type only its name. Then, the U-Net directly locates the corresponding site, transceiver, cell,or repeater in the map window.

Procedurel Search a site or a cell by using the toolbar.

1. On the toolbar, choose Edit > Find. Then, select an NE type from the Find drop-downlist box, as shown in Figure 10-4.



578

Figure 10-4 Find

2. Type the NE name in the Name text box, as shown in Figure 10-5.

Figure 10-5 Name

3. Click Enter.

The U-Net automatically locates the NE in the map window.l Search a site or a cell in the corresponding search window.

1. In the Explorer window, click the Network tab.2. In the navigation tree, choose Transceiver.3. Choose Find from the shortcut menu. The Find Transceiver dialog box is displayed.4. Set search conditions.

For details, see 10.18.3 Parameters for Searching for Base Stations.5. Click Find.

The search result is displayed in the Result area and the statistical result is displayedin the lower part of the dialog box.

6. Click Geometry to locate the selected cell in the map window.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Export base station data.

In the Find Transceiver dialog box, click Export to export data of the located base station.For detailed operations, see 3.7.1 Importing Base Station Information.

l Delete a transceiver.Select the transceiver to be deleted in the Result area and click Delete.

l View transceiver data.Click Open in the Find Transceiver dialog box to view transceiver parameters.

10.13 Grouping Sites and CellsThis section describes how to group sites and cells. You can group sites and cells based on thegrouping modes predefined by the U-Net. Sites and cells can be grouped based on their existingattributes. If the predefined grouping modes do not meet your requirements, you can customizea grouping mode.



579

Procedure

Step 1 Select a grouping mode.

If... Then...

The predefinedgrouping modesmeet yourrequirements

Go to Step 3.

The predefinedgrouping modes donot meet yourrequirements

Customize a grouping mode. Go to Step 2.

Grouping modes arenot displayed afteryou choose GroupBy from the shortcutmenu

Go to Step 6 to set the grouping modes to be displayed.

Step 2 Customize a grouping mode.


2. In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver.

3. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.

4. Right-click the table and choose Table Fields from the shortcut menu. The TransceiverTable Fields dialog box is displayed.

5. Click Add. The Field Define dialog box is displayed.

6. Set a new grouping mode.

l Group: name of the customized group. In normal cases, you do not need to set thisparameter.

l Legend: field name. If you type a new field name in the text box, the field name isdisplayed in the table.

l Type: field type. You can select Text, Integer, Double, or True/False from the drop-down list box.

l Size: length of the field name. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type isset to Text.

l Default Value: You are advised to retain the default setting of this parameter.

l Choice List: field value. The value of this parameter is valid only when Type is set toText, Integer, or Double. You can type the value of each field in the Choice List textbox and separate them by pressing Enter.

7. Click OK. The new grouping mode takes effect.


Step 4 In the navigation tree, choose Site/Transceiver.



580

Step 5 Choose Group By > group dimension from the shortcut menu.

The system automatically groups cells or sites based on the selected grouping mode.

Step 6 Customize the grouping modes to be displayed.


2. Select Site or Transceiver in the navigation tree.

3. Right-click Site or Transceiver and choose Group By > More from the shortcut menu.The GroupBy Config dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-6. The followingtakes the Site node for example.

Figure 10-6 GroupBy Config dialog box

4. In the GroupBy Config dialog box, select the customized grouping mode that needs to bedisplayed when you choose Group By from the shortcut menu.

5. Click OK.

NOTE

You can right-click Site and choose Group By > Grouping Mode to set secondary grouping modes.

----End



581

Follow-up ProcedureAfter the grouping is complete, view the grouping result.

Site groups are displayed based the grouping mode under the Site node in the navigation tree.

10.14 Displaying the Cell HexagonDisplay the hexagon cellular grid for cell coverage. Users can accurately stitch the cellular gridbased on the cell coverage radius of the selected site during site deployment. This reducesadjustment workload and coverage hole and improve site deployment efficiency.

PrerequisitesThe value of Hexagon Radius for the transmitter is not empty during site deployment orengineering parameter import.

Procedure

Step 1 Click on the toolbar. The cell cellular grid is displayed in the map window, as shown inFigure 10-7.

Figure 10-7 Show Cell Hexagon



582

l After the transmitter location is changed, the cellular grid also moves to the new location.l After the transmitter is deactivated or deleted, the cellular grid of the transmitter disappears.

Step 2 Click again. The cellular grid in the map window disappears.

NOTE

The Hexagon Radius(m) attribute of the transmitter determines the size of the hexagon cellular grid. Afterthe value of Hexagon Radius(m) is changed, the size of the hexagon cellular grid on the map is alsochanged.

----End

10.15 Importing BCP DataThe U-Net allows you to import basic call process (BCP) data. By importing such data, you canobtain configuration data on the live network, such as neighbor relationships and frequencies.

Context

If the project supports GSM or UMTS, you can import the BCP data of GSM or UMTS.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Import Excel > Configuration Package. The Import ConfigurationPackage dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-8.

NOTE

If the hybrid network is any combination of LTE-FDD, GSM, and UMTS, you also need to select therelated radio access technologies (RATs).

Figure 10-8 Import Configuration Package

Step 2 In NE Version, select an NE version.

Step 3 Click Select Configuration Package to select one or more BCP configuration file packagesyou want to import.



583

Step 4 Click OK.

----End

10.16 Printing Planning ResultsYou can print the U-Net planning results to facilitate file storing and subsequent networkconstruction.

10.16.1 Print SuggestionsThe appearance of a map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects includedin the map window. On the U-Net, objects are arranged in layers. The top layers on the map canbe clearly displayed and printed. The visibility of the bottom layers depends on the definitionand transparency of the top layers.

On the U-Net, the visible objects (such as sites, cells, prediction results, and capacity simulationresults) on the Data tab page are more clearly displayed than the visible objects on the Geo tabpage.

You are advised to arrange layers on the Geo tab page in the following sequence from top tobottom. Thus, the vector layer can be clearly printed.

l Points (vector)l Highways and lines (vector)l Geographic data about clutter classes (transparent grid)l Satellite maps or geographic data about clutter heights (non-transparent)

NOTE

For the methods of selecting display objects and setting the display sequence, see 10.6 Setting Layer DisplayProperties. For the methods of setting the color, transparency, and shading effect, see 3.3.5 Setting DisplayParameters of Geographic Data.

10.16.2 Printing MapsBefore printing a map, you can set the print properties such as print area and print layout basedon the actual requirements. After making the settings, you can select a printer to print the map.

ContextBefore printing a map, you can set print properties and preview the print effect.l You can print either an entire map or a part of a map.l You can use the default print layout or change it as required.

Print layout involves setting the scaling, selecting the ruler, legend, and area, adding a titleor mark, and setting the size, source, orientation, and margin of the paper.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the print layout.1. Choose File > Print Setting. The Print Setting dialog box is displayed.2. Select the target print template in the Print Template area.



584

For detailed operations on print templates, see 10.16.3 Customizing a Print Template.3. Set print properties in the Print Setting area.

For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.6 Parameters for Setting the PrintProperties.

4. Preview the print effect in the Preview area.

Step 2 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Printer to set the printer, print area, and the number ofcopies to print.You can select a PDF printer to print the map as a .pdf file.

Step 3 In the Print Setting dialog box, click Print or choose File > Print to print.The U-Net supports printing a map into several pages. When the size of the map exceeds thepaper size, the system automatically prints it into several pages.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Export the print template

After setting the print layout, click Export in the Print Setting dialog box to export theprint properties of the selected print template as a .cfg configuration file for future use.

l Import the print templateClick Import to import the print template.

10.16.3 Customizing a Print TemplateThe system provides three types of pre-defined print templates. If these print templates cannotmeet your requirements, you can customize a print template.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose File > Print Setting. The PrintSetting dialog box is displayed.

Step 2 Click Add to create a print template.

The system automatically creates a print template with the default setting in the PrintTemplate area.

Step 3 Modify the properties of the new print template.For details, see 10.18.6 Parameters for Setting the Print Properties.

Step 4 Optional: Click Export to export the parameters of the selected template into a .cfgconfiguration file for future use.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel Delete a print template.

You can click Delete to delete a selected template. However, you cannot delete the lasttemplate.

l Import a print template.



585

1. Click Import. The Open dialog box is displayed.2. Select the configuration file (in .cfg format) of the print template.3. Click Open.

NOTE

If the name of the print template to be imported is the same as that of an existing template, the systemdisplays a prompt asking you whether to overwrite the existing template.

10.17 Calibrating Propagation ModelsYou can calibrate propagation models based on the CW data. After the calibration, the path lossmatrix calculated based on the propagation model is close to the actual measurement value.

10.17.1 Importing DT DataThe U-Net enables you to import DT data for calibrating propagation models.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data is imported.l Base stations (sites and cells) are available.

Contextl Currently, the U-Net supports only the DT data in .txt, .xls and .csv files exported by using

the GENEX Probe.l For CDMA networks, the U-Net does not support the functions such as importing and

filtering DT data.l DT data is classified into two types: Drive Test and CW Measurement.l This section describes how to import CW Measurement data. The method of importing

Drive Test data is similar to that of importing CW Measurement data.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement.

Step 3 Choose Import from the shortcut menu.

Step 4 In the displayed dialog box, select the file format and the file to be imported.

Step 5 Click Open. The Import File dialog box is displayed.

Step 6 Set import parameters.l Import Drive Test data. For parameter description, see 10.18.7 Parameters for Importing

Drive Test Data.l Import CW data. For parameter description, see 10.18.8 Parameters for Importing CW

Measurement Data.

Step 7 Click Import to start importing DT data.



586

l In the process of data importing, the system displays prompts in the Event Viewer window.In this case, pay attention to the prompts.

l After the data import is complete, the DT data file is displayed under the CWMeasurement > Sitex_x node on the navigation tree.

----End

Follow-up Procedurel View and edit a DT site.

In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. Choose OpenTable from the shortcut menu. In the displayed table, you can view and edit DT siteproperties or delete a single DT site. For parameter description, see 10.18.9 Parametersfor Viewing DT Point Information.

l Delete a DT file.In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file. ChooseDelete from the shortcut menu.

l Move a DT site in the map window.You can directly select a DT site in the map window and then drag it.

l Set the display effect of a DT site.In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement. Choose Display Setting from theshortcut menu.For parameter description, see 10.18.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Propertiesof DT Points.

10.17.2 Filtering DT DataAfter the DT data is imported, you can filter data according to the cell features so that you canfilter out the DT points that are incorrect or not required. The U-Net supports filtering based onthe level, the distance between the DT point and the cell, the azimuth of the sector, and the clutterclass.

Prerequisitesl The geographic data is imported.l The DT data is imported.l This section describes how to filter CW Measurement data. The method of filtering Drive

Test data is similar to that of filtering CW Measurement data.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.

Step 3 Choose Filter from the shortcut menu. The Filter dialog box is displayed.

Step 4 Set filtering conditions.

NOTE

The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.



587

l Distance area, set the maximum and minimum distance between DT points and the cell.If the distance between a DT point and the cell is within the range of [maximum, minimum],the DT point is not filtered out.

l Measurement area, set the maximum and minimum receive level of DT points.If the receive level of a DT point is within the range of [maximum, minimum], the DT pointis not filtered out.

l Azimuth area, set the azimuth of the sector. The azimuth is the angle between the DT pointand the north direction of the map.You can set multiple filtering conditions related to the azimuth. In the Azimuth List list, thedata within the range of [Start,End] is not filtered out.

l In the Clutter area, select a clutter class.The DT points related to the selected clutter class is not filtered out.Select All: Select clutter types in batches.Select None: Clear clutter types in batches.

For details about the parameters, see 10.18.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT Data.

Step 5 Determine whether to select Delete Outside Points.

If you select this option, the system deletes the information about the DT points that are filteredout; if you do not select this option, the system just hides the information about the DT pointsthat are filtered out in the filtering results.

Step 6 Click OK to filter the DT data.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the filtering, you can view the filtering results.

1. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.2. Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.3. Check the filtering results.

10.17.3 Filtering DT Data in BatchesThis section describes how to filter drive test (DT) data in batches. You can filter DT data bycell to view the required data of cells.

Prerequisites1. The geographic data has been imported.2. The DT data has been imported.

Procedure


Step 2 On the displayed Data tab page, choose Drive Test > DT data file in the navigation tree.



588

NOTE

The U-Net can filter DT data that is exported to a file in .txt, .xls, or .csv format using the GENEX Probe.

Step 3 Right-click the selected DT file and choose Open Table from the shortcut menu. The DT datawindow is displayed.

Step 4 You can perform the following operations as required.

If... Then...

You want to view the data of a cell In the DT data window, right-click a cellwhose data needs to be viewed and chooseFilter by Selection from the shortcut menu.The data of only the selected cell is displayedin the DT data window.

You want to view the data of other cellsexcept for the selected cell

In the DT data window, right-click the cellwhose data does not need to be viewed andchoose Filter Excluding Selection from theshortcut menu. The data of all cells except forthe selected cell is displayed in the DT datawindow.

You want to view the data of one or more cells 1. Select the cells that need to be displayedfrom the Serving Cell drop-down list boxin the DT data window.

2. Click OK. The data of the selected cells isdisplayed in the DT data window.

NOTEYou can right-click in the DT data window and choose Remove Filter from the shortcut menu to removethe filter effect.

----End

10.17.4 Calibrating Propagation Models Based on the CWMeasurement Data

Common propagation models cannot meet the requirements of actual networking scenarios thatfeature complicated terrain conditions. To prevent the great path loss error caused by using acommon propagation model for calculation, you must adjust the coefficients of the propagationmodel before service planning. In this way, you can obtain a propagation model suitable for theactual network environment. Currently, the U-Net enables you to calibrate only the SPM2G,SPM900 and Volcano propagation models.

PrerequisitesThe CW Measurement data is imported.



589

ContextThe purpose of propagation model calibration is to optimize the coefficients of a propagationmodel by using the actual CW measurement data. The current U-Net supports propagationcalibration based on the CW measurement data only.

The common counters for analyzing the calibration results are as follows:l Average error: Average value of the prediction error.l Standard deviation: Mean square of the difference between the prediction error and the

average error.l Correlation coefficient: indicates the correlation between the actual CW measurement data

and the data calculated by the propagation model.

Prediction error indicates the error between the CW measurement data and the data calculatedby the propagation model.

If the standard deviation and average error of the calibration result are small, it indicates that thecalibrated propagation model matches the actual environment.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement.

Step 3 Choose Automatically Calibrate from the shortcut menu. The Adjust Form dialog box isdisplayed.

Step 4 Select the propagation model to be calibrated in Select Propagation Model.

Step 5 Select the CW file for propagation model calibration in Select Measurement File.

Step 6 Set the parameters for calibrating the propagation model in Calibrate Limitation.l Selecting (clearing)Losses Per Clutter indicates whether the impact of the clutter factor is

considered.If this option is selected, the loss of each clutter class is calibrated.

l Set the standard deviation in Standard Deviation. The default value is 8 dB.Usually, the value of this parameter is set to 8 dB in the case of flat areas and to 11 dB in thecase of hilly areas.

l Set the cell edge coverage probability in Cell Edge Coverage Probability. The default valueis 75%.

Step 7 Select the coefficients of the propagation model to be calibrated.You can calibrate the coefficients of the propagation model one by one until you obtain thedesired propagation model. Alternatively, you can also calibrate all the coefficients at a time.

Step 8 Click Calibrate to start the calibration.

After the calibration, the Result window is displayed.

Step 9 Query the calibration results.

For detailed description of parameters, see 10.18.10 Interface Description: CalibrationResults of Propagation Models.



590

If... Then...

The calibrated propagation model meetsyour requirements

Click Commit to make the calibration resultstake effect.

The calibrated propagation model does notmeet your requirements

Click Next to select other coefficients forcalibration until you obtain the desiredpropagation model.

The calibration operations are the same asStep 7 to Step 9.

----End

10.17.5 Checking the Parameter Settings of the Propagation ModelTo check whether the parameter settings of the propagation model are appropriate, use thepropagation model to calculate the signal strength at each drive test point, and compare thecalculation results with the actual drive test results.

PrerequisitesThe CW measurement or Drive Test data has been imported.

NOTE

If you need to check the calibration effect of the propagation model, the following prerequisites must be met:

l The propagation model has been calibrated.

l The calibration of the propagation model has taken effect.

ContextThis section uses the CW measurement data as an example.

Procedure


Step 2 In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.

Step 3 Choose Calculate Signal Levels from the shortcut menu.

Note the messages displayed in the Event Viewer window.

Step 4 After the calculation is completed, In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement >Sitex_x > drive test file.

Step 5 Choose Open Table from the shortcut menu.l The table lists the actual signal strength at each drive test point, signal strength at each drive

test point calculated by the calibrated propagation model, and the difference between the twovalues.

l For details about the parameters in the table, see 10.18.9 Parameters for Viewing DT PointInformation.



591

Step 6 Optional: Display the drive test results in a graphic window.

1. In the navigation tree, choose CW Measurement > Sitex_x > drive test file.

2. Choose Open the Analysis Tool from the shortcut menu.

l The system displays a graphic window, which lists the drive test results.

l You can select a display object from the drop-down list in the upper right corner of thegraphic window, for example, the actual DT data M(dBm), calculated theoretical dataP(dBm), and the difference value Error(P-M)(dB) between the two. In addition, youcan view the CDF curve P-M(CDF) for the DT data and theoretical data M,P(dBm) orthe difference value.

l When you click a drive test point in the graphic window, the information about the drivetest point is displayed in the GIS window and the table.

----End

10.18 Interface Description: U-Net Auxiliary FunctionsThis section describes the interfaces and parameters for U-Net auxiliary functions.

10.18.1 Parameters for Exporting Maps to the Google EarthThis section describes the parameters for connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files.You can refer to this section when connecting to the Google Earth or exporting .kmz files in theEarth View dialog box.


Sites Indicates whether to export information aboutbase stations to the Google Earth.

By default, thisoption is selected.

Export Sites Indicates the base stations to be displayed.You can select all the base stations in theentire map or the base stations in a selectedpolygon. You can also select only a specifiedbase station.

The default value isFull Map.

Transceiver Radius Indicates the radius of cell icons in GoogleEarth.

The value range isfrom 1 to 1,000 andthe unit is meter.The default value is50.

Polygons Indicates whether to export polygons to theGoogle Earth.


Predictions Indicates whether to export the predictionresults to the Google Earth.


Transparency Indicates the transparency of the predictionresults on the Google Earth.

The default value is75%.



592


Simulation Users Indicates whether to export the capacitysimulation results to the Google Earth.


Drive Test Indicates whether to export DT data to theGoogle Earth.


CW Measurement Indicates whether to export CW test data tothe Google Earth.


10.18.2 Parameters for Setting Custom FieldsThis section describes the parameters for setting custom fields. You can refer to this sectionwhen setting parameters for custom fields in the Field Define window.

Parameters in the Field Define WindowParameter Description

Group This parameter is not in use. You do not need to set it.

Legend Indicates the name of a custom field.

Type Indicates the data type of a custom field.

Size If Text is selected as the data type, the Size box is available, where youcan set the text length.The value range is from 1 to 300.If you select other data types, the Size box is unavailable.

Default Value Indicates the default value of a custom field.

Choice List Indicates other values of a custom field.l After you set Choice List, a drop-down list is provided for the field.

Then, you can set the field to Default Value or values in ChoiceList.

l When entering values in Choice List, press Enter after entering avalue to enter another value.

l If True/False is selected as the data type, the default values inChoice List are True and False, which cannot be modified.

10.18.3 Parameters for Searching for Base StationsThis section describes the parameters for searching for base stations. You can refer to this sectionwhen searching for base stations in the Find Transceiver dialog box.



593


Filter Area Displays the available area for the filtering.

First row ofparameters

Indicates the first filtering condition.l Select a network parameter from the first drop-

down list.l Select an operation relation from the second drop-

down list.l Type a value in the text box.The filtering condition takes effect only after thecorresponding check box is selected.

Second row ofparameters

Indicates the second filtering condition.l Select an antenna- or equipment-related parameter

from the first drop-down list.l Select an operation relation from the second drop-

down list.l Select an antenna- or equipment-related value from

the third drop-down list.The filtering condition takes effect only after thecorresponding check box is selected.

Condition Indicates the relation between the two filteringconditions.l Andl Or

Result Displays the searching result. The result is valid onlyafter you click Find.

10.18.4 Parameters for Setting NE Display PropertiesThis section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of base stations. You canrefer to this section when setting the base station display properties in the Display Field dialogbox.

Parameters in the Display Field dialog box

Table 10-3 Parameters on the Label Display tab page


Available Fields Lists the parameters that can be displayed in the map window.



594


Selected Fields Lists the selected parameters. The selected parameters aredisplayed in the map window.You can select the parameters to be displayed in the mapwindow by using >, >>, <, and << buttons.

Table 10-4 Parameters on the Group By Display tab page


Display Type Indicates the group type.l If Automatic is selected, the U-Net automatically sets

different colors for displaying each transceiver after youclick in the U-Net main window.

l If Default is selected, the default display settings are usedfor all transceivers.

l If GroupBy is selected, the display style is set for thetransceivers that are grouped by the specified type.You can right-click Transceiver and choose Group Byfrom the shortcut menu on the Network tab page in thebrowse window to specify the type by which thetransceivers are grouped.NOTE

If transceivers have been grouped, the items in the table areconsistent with the group. When Group By is selected for thefirst time, the system automatically sets a color for each group.

l If DisCreteValue is selected, the transceivers aregrouped by certain property such as name and you can setthe display style for each transceiver group separately.In addition, you need to select a property from the Fielddrop-down list.

l If ValueIntervals is selected, the display style is set forthe transceivers within the property ranges.In addition, you need to select a property from the Fielddrop-down list and set Min Value and Max Value in thedisplay style list.

NOTEThe method for setting the display style of Site is similar to that ofTransceiver. The grouping types available are only Default andGroupBy.

Field Indicates the NE property field.This parameter is valid when Display Type isDisCreteValue or ValueIntervals.



595


Indicates the legend cell.For example,

.

Double-click the legend cell. In the displayed Display dialogbox, set parameters such as the NE display color.Parameters in the Display dialog box describes theparameters.

Legend Indicates the legend description.

Actions l You can select Shading for the U-Net to automaticallyset the display properties according to the step length setby users.

l You can select Export Legend to export the presetdisplay properties.

l You can select Import Legend to import the presetdisplay properties.

Parameters in the Display dialog box

Table 10-5 Parameters on the Symbol Style tab page


Color Indicates the display color of base stations or transceivers.

Selected Color Indicates the display color of the selected base stations ortransceivers.

Size Indicates the display size of base stations or transceivers.

Symbol Indicates the display shape of base stations or transceivers.

Example Previews the display of base stations or transceivers.

Table 10-6 Parameters on the Font tab page


Color Indicates the display color of parameters related to basestations or cells.

Font Indicates the display font of parameters related to basestations or cells.

Size Indicates the display size of parameters related to basestations or cells.

Style Indicates the display style of parameters related to basestations or cells.



596


Example Previews the display of parameters related to base stations orcells.

10.18.5 Parameters for Importing and Exporting DataThis section describes the parameters for importing or exporting data such as site data, cell data,and carrier data. You can refer to this section when exporting data in the Data Export dialogbox or importing data in the Data Import dialog box.

Parameters in the Data Export Dialog BoxParameter Description

Configuration File Indicates a configuration file template. Users can save thespecified export fields as a template and import this templatein the future by loading.l Save: saves a template.l Load: loads a template.

Header Indicates whether to export a field name.

Field Separator Indicates the method of separating fields.l <Tab>: Separates fields with tab characters.l ,: Separates fields with commas.l ;: Separates fields with semicolons.l <Space>: Separates fields with space characters.

Available Fields Displays the existing fields in the current project.

Exported Fields Displays the fields to be exported to the station data file.

Preview Previews the data export effect.

Parameters in the Data Import Dialog BoxParameter Description

Configuration File Indicates the path of a configuration file.A configuration file saves the field mapping information.l Click Save to save the current field mapping information

as a configuration file.l Click Load to import an existing configuration file. Then,

the U-Net can use the existing field mapping information.



597


1st. Data Row Indicates the starting row of the data for import. Data in thisrow and the subsequent rows is imported.

Field Separator Indicates the method of separating fields.l <Tab>: Separates fields with tab characters.l ,: Separates fields with commas.l ;: Separates fields with semicolons.l <Space>: Separates fields with space characters.

Update Records Indicates whether to overwrite the existing data in the project.For example, a site with Site Name set to xxx exists in the U-Net. A site with Site Name set to xxx also exists in the file tobe imported. If you select Update Records, the parametersrelated to the site xxx will be updated.

FieldMapping

Source Indicates the fields of the file to be imported.

Destination Indicates the existing fields that match the fields of the file tobe imported.If no match field is available, <IGNORE> is displayed. If afield of the file to be imported matches an existing field, theexisting field name is displayed.l The system automatically matches the fields in the file to

be imported with the fields provided by the U-Net. If afield in the file to be imported does not match any field inthe U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. If a field in the file to beimported matches a field in the U-Net, the field name inthe U-Net is displayed.

l You can click in the Destination row, and then manuallyselect a field from the drop-down list box to match the fieldin the Source row.

10.18.6 Parameters for Setting the Print PropertiesThis section describes the parameters for setting the print properties. You can refer to this sectionwhen setting the print properties in the Print Setting dialog box.


Print Template area The existing print templates are listed in this area.

Add Enables you to add a print template.

Delete Enables you to delete a selected print template.



598


Pagetabpage

Name Indicates the template name.

Orientation Indicates the page orientation.l Portrait: prints a document with the short edge of the paper

at the top of the page.l Landscape: prints a document with the long edge of the

paper at the top of the page.

Paper Indicates the paper size and source.l Size: indicates the paper size.l Source: indicates the paper source.

Scaling Indicates the map scale.l Fit to Page: indicates that the selected map area is

automatically adjusted to a proper size.l Scale: indicates that the selected map area is printed

according to the typed scale.

Margins Indicates the page margins.The unit is millimeter.

Componentstabpage

Map Rulers: indicates whether to print the map ruler.Select the print area in Print Area.

Legend Indicates whether to print the legend information.Position: indicates the legend position.

Comments Indicates whether to add comments.l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.l Comments are typed in the text box.l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is

displayed on the map.l Properties: indicates the properties such as content and

character formats.

Header/Footertabpage

Logo1 and Logo2 Indicates whether to add logos. you can add two logos at most.l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is

displayed on the map.You can click Properties to set the size of the logo. The size unitis millimeter. You can also click File to select the file thatcontains the logo.



599


Title Indicates whether the title is displayed on the map.l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.l The contents of the title are typed in the text box.l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is


character formats.

Header/Footer Indicates whether to add the header and footer.l Position: indicates the position of the selected object.l The contents of the header or footer are typed in the text box.l On the Map: indicates whether the selected object is


character formats.

Previewarea

Import Enables you to import an existing print setting template.

Export Enables you to export the current print settings as a template.

Printer Enables you to set a printer.

Preview Enables you to preview.

Print Enables you to perform a print task.

NOTE

The default values of the preceding parameters vary with the templates.

10.18.7 Parameters for Importing Drive Test DataThis section describes the parameters for importing drive test (DT) data. You can refer to thissection when setting parameters in the Import File dialog box to import DT data.


Configuration File Indicates the path of aconfiguration file.A configuration file savesthe field mappinginformation.

l Click Save to save the current fieldmapping information as aconfiguration file.

l Click Load to import an existingconfiguration file. Then, the U-Netcan use the existing field mappinginformation.



600


1st. Data Row Indicates the starting row ofthe data for import. Data inthis row and the subsequentrows is imported.

In normal cases, the first row in theimported file is a title. Therefore,import the file from its second row.

Field Separator Indicates the method ofseparating fields.l <Tab>: Separates fields

with tab characters.l ,: Separates fields with

commas.l ;: Separates fields with

semicolons.l <Space>: Separates

fields with spacecharacters.

-

Receiver Height Height of a receiver. The default value is 2, and the unit ismeter.

Gain Gain of a receiver. The default value is 0, and the unit isdB.

Loss Path loss of a receiver. The default value is 0, and the unit isdB.

Network Type Network type.This parameter isconfigurable only for amulti-mode network.

-

Match Mode This parameter is displayedonly when Network Typeis set to GSM. The defaultvalue is BCCH+BSIC.l Select BCCH+BSIC

when DT files aregenerated using theAssistant or Probe, andBCCH and BSIC in thesource DT filesuniquely identify aGSM cell.

l Select LAC+CI whenDT files are generatedusing the TEMS, andLAC and CI in thesource DT filesuniquely identify aGSM cell.

You can select LAC+CI or BCCH+BSIC for importing the DT data asrequired.



601


Config Columns When you click ConfigColumns, the CharacterColumn Mapping Formdialog box is displayed, inwhich you can set themappings between the fieldnames in the imported DTfile and those in the U-Net.

l The drop-down list box in thedialog box contains the field namesin the to-be-imported DT file.

l You can manually set themappings between the field namesin the U-Net and those in the DTfile.

l Mappings of the Longitude andLatitude fields must be setirrespective of the RAT.

l For the LTE network, the SignalLevel and PCI fields aremandatory in the dialog box. Youmust set the mappings between thetwo fields and those in the DT file.Otherwise, DT data cannot beimported. The PCI field in thedialog box needs to map the PCIfield in the DT file for the U-Net tolocate cells.

l For the GSM network, the BCCH,BSIC, and Signal Level fields aremandatory in the dialog box. Youmust set the mappings between thethree fields and those in the DTfile. Otherwise, DT data cannot beimported. The BCCH field in thedialog box needs to map theBCCH field in the DT file for theU-Net to locate the ARFCNs in theDT file, and the BSIC field in thedialog box needs to map theBSIC field in the DT file for the U-Net to locate cells.

l For the UMTS network, the SignalLevel and Scrambling Codefields are mandatory in the dialogbox. You must set the mappingsbetween the two fields and those inthe DT file. Otherwise, DT datacannot be imported. TheScrambling Code field in the U-Net needs to map the ScramblingCode field in the DT file for the U-Net to locate cells.

l The U-Net automatically placesthe DT data under the



602


corresponding cells based on thescrambling code.

FieldMapping

Source Indicates the fields of thefile to be imported.

The system automatically matches thefields in the DT data with the fieldsprovided by the U-Net. If a field in theDT data file does not match any fieldin the U-Net, IGNORE is displayed. Ifa field in the DT data file matches afield in the U-Net, the field name inthe U-Net is displayed.

Destination

Indicates the existing fieldsthat match the fields of thefile to be imported.

Lazy Import Delayed import. If this option is selected, data is notimported immediately after you clickImport. The data is read after the DTfeature database is verified.

10.18.8 Parameters for Importing CW Measurement DataThis section describes the parameters for importing CW Measurement data. You can refer tothis section when setting parameters in the Import File dialog box for importing CWMeasurement data.


Configuration File Indicates the path of aconfiguration file.A configuration file savesthe field mappinginformation.

l Click Save to save the current fieldmapping information as aconfiguration file.

l Click Load to import an existingconfiguration file. Then, the U-Netcan use the existing field mappinginformation.

1st. Data Row Indicates the starting rowof the data for import. Datain this row and thesubsequent rows isimported.

In normal cases, the first row in theimported file is a title. Therefore,import the file from its second row.



603


Field Separator Indicates the method ofseparating fields.l <Tab>: Separates

fields with tabcharacters.

l ,: Separates fields withcommas.

l ;: Separates fields withsemicolons.

l <Space>: Separatesfields with spacecharacters.

-

ReferenceCell

Name Indicates the name of thetransceiver correspondingto the CW Measurementdata.

CW Measurement data will beimported into the selected transceiver.

Frequency

Indicates the frequency ofthe transceiver.

-

Receiver Height Height of a receiver. The default value is 2, and the unit ismeter.

Gain Gain of a receiver. The default value is 0, and the unit isdB.

Loss Path loss of a receiver. The default value is 0, and the unit isdB.

FieldMapping

Source Indicates the fields of thefile to be imported.

l The system automatically matchesthe fields in the file to be importedwith the fields provided by the U-Net. If a field in the file to beimported does not match any fieldin the U-Net, IGNORE isdisplayed. If a field in the file to beimported matches a field in the U-Net, the field name in the U-Net isdisplayed.

l You can click in theDestination row, and thenmanually select a field from thedrop-down list box to match thefield in the Source row.

The Latitude, Longitude, and SignalLevel fields are mandatory. Thesefields must be mapped with thecorresponding fields in the U-Net.



604


Destination

Indicates the existing fieldsthat match the fields of thefile to be imported.

Otherwise, importing the CW datafails.

10.18.9 Parameters for Viewing DT Point InformationThis section describes the parameters for viewing DT point information.


ID Indicates the ID of a DT point. This is an internal identification.

Longitude Indicates the longitude of a DT point.Manual modification is allowed.

Latitude Indicates the latitude of a DT point.Manual modification is allowed.

Height(m) Indicates the height where a DT point is located.

Clutter Indicates the clutter ID and type of a DT point.

Clutter Height Indicates the clutter height where a DT point is located.

Serving cell Indicates the cell where the drive test point is located.The parameter exists only in the drive test data.

Distance(m) Indicates the distance from a DT point to the transceiver that theDT point belongs to.

M(dBm) Indicates the signal strength measured at a DT point.Manual modification is allowed.



605


P(dBm) Indicates the signal strength calculated by the calibratedpropagation model in a DT point.Manual modification is allowed.

Error(P-M)(dB) Indicates the difference between the measured value and thecalculated value.

10.18.10 Interface Description: Calibration Results of PropagationModels

This section describes the interface of propagation model calibration results, which helps youto learn the meaning of each area in the window.

Figure 10-9 shows the interface of propagation model calibration results.

Figure 10-9 Interface of propagation model calibration results



606

No. Name Description

(1) Calibration result counterarea

This area lists the statistical counters of calibrationresults.l Average indicates the average error of the

calibration.l Standard Deviation indicates the standard

deviation of the calibration.l Cor.Coeff.: Indicates the correlation coefficient.

If the correlation coefficient is greater, you caninfer that the DT data is close to the calculationresults of the propagation model. The value rangeis from 0 to 1.

l RMS: Indicates the root mean square of thecalibration.

(2) Calibration result tablearea

This area lists the coefficient values before and afterthe calibration.If a coefficient value changes after the calibration,this coefficient is marked in blue.

(3) Calibration result chartarea

This area directly displays the propagation modelcalibration results in a coordinate chart.l The x-coordinate indicates the propagation

distance.l The y-coordinate indicates the path loss value.l Data in red indicates the actual path loss value,

which is obtained on the basis of the DT data orCW data.

l Data in green indicates the path loss valuecalculated by the propagation model before thecalibration.

l Data in blue indicates the path loss valuecalculated by the propagation model after thecalibration.

(4) Button area This area provides two buttons, with which you canmake the calibration results take effect and performfurther calibration.

10.18.11 Parameters for Filtering the DT DataThis section describes the parameters related to the filtering of the drive test (DT) or continuouswave (CW) data. You can refer to this section when setting relevant parameters in the Filterdialog box to import the DT or CW data.

NOTE

The drive test data can be filtered by Clutter only.



607


Distancearea, wheredata isfilteredaccording tothe distancebetween theDT pointand theserving cell

Min Distance Indicates the minimumdistance.

The unit is meter.

Max Distance Indicates the maximumdistance.

The unit is meter.

Measurement area,where datais filteredaccording tothe receivelevel of theDT point.

MinMeasurement

Indicates the minimumreceive level.

The unit is dBm.

MaxMeasurement

Indicates the maximumreceive level.

The unit is dBm.

Azimutharea, wheredata isfilteredaccording tothe cellazimuth

Start Azimuth Indicates the start value ofthe azimuth interval.

The unit is degree. Thevalue must be an integer.

End Azimuth Indicates the end value ofthe azimuth interval.

The unit is degree. Thevalue must be an integer.

Add Adds an azimuth interval. -

Azimuth List Lists all azimuth intervals. -

Remove Removes the selectedazimuth interval.

-

Clutter area,where datais filteredaccording tothe clutterclass.

Indicates all theclutter classes inthe geographicdata.

You can select the clutterclasses through the checkboxes.The DT data related to theselected clutter class is notfiltered out.

By default, all clutter classesare selected.

Select All/Select None

Select All/Select None:Select or clear clutter typesin batches.

-



608


DeleteOutsidePoints

- l If this option is selected,the system deletes theinformation about theDT points that arefiltered out.

l If this option is notselected, the system justhides the informationabout the DT points thatare filtered out in thefiltering results.

By default, this option is notselected.

10.18.12 Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT PointsThis section describes the parameters for setting the display properties of DT points.

Parameters for Setting the Display Properties of DT PointsParameter Description

Display Type Indicates the display type.

Field Type Indicates the type of the field to be displayed.

Color Indicates the color for highlighting a field within a certain valuerange.

Min Indicates the minimum value of a field to be displayed.

Max Indicates the maximum value of a field to be displayed.

Legend Indicates the value range of a field to be displayed.To display the legends in this row, select the checkbox on the rightof the row, for example, .

Fast Display Indicates the fast display mode.l If a large amount of DT data is available, you are advised to

select this option to quickly update the DT data displayed inthe map window.

l You can only set the display color and size for DT points afterselecting this option.

Add to Legend Indicates whether to add legend information to the legendwindow.You can choose Window > Legend to open the legendinformation window.



609

11 Acronyms and Abbreviations

This section describes the acronyms and abbreviations involved in the U-Net.

Acronym/Abbreviation Full Name

A

ACP Automatic Cell Planning

AMS Adaptive MIMO Switching

ARFCN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number

B

BCCH Broadcast Control Channel

BER Bit Error Rate

BLER Block Error Rate

C

C/A Carrier-to-Adjacent (Ratio)

C/I Carrier-to-Interference (Ratio)

CDF Cumulative Distribution Function

CM Cubic Metric

CME Configuration Management Express

CW Continuous Wave

D

DEM Digital Elevation Model

DL Downlink

DTM Digital Terrain Model

DT Drive Test

GENEX U-NetUser Guide 11 Acronyms and Abbreviations


610


F

FDD Frequency Division Duplex

FTP File Transfer Protocol

G

GIS Geographic Information System

GUI Graphical User Interface

H

HARQ Hybrid Automatic Retransmission Request

HICH Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

HO Handover

HR Half Rate

HS-DSCH High Speed Downlink Shared Channel

HSN Hopping Sequence Number

HS-SCCH High Speed Shared Control Channel

I

ICIC Inter-Cell Interference Coordination

IoT Interference over Thermal

IP Internet Protocol

IBCA Interference Based Channel Allocation

L

LTE Long Term Evolution

M

MBMS Multimedia Broadcast and Multicast Service

MCS Modulation and Coding Scheme

MIMO Multiple Input Multiple Output

N

Ncs Cyclic Shifts

NF Noise Figure

O

OFDM Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing



611


P

PN Pseudo-Noise

PAPR Peak Average Power Ratio

PBCH Physical Broadcast Channel

PCFICH Physical Control Format Indicator Channel

PCI Physical Cell ID

PDCCH Physical Downlink Control Channel

PDF Probability Distribution Function

PDSCH Physical Downlink Shared Channel

PHICH Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

PMCH Physical Multicast Channel

PRACH Physical Random Access Channel

PUCCH Physical Uplink Control Channel

PUSCH Physical Uplink Shared Channel

Q

QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation

QPSK Quadrature Phase Shift Keying

R

RA Random Access

RB Resource Block

RE Resource Element

RRM Radio Resource Management

RRU Remote Radio Unit

RSCP Received Signal Code Power

RSRP Reference Signal Received Power

RSRQ Reference Signal Received Quality

RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator

RxLev Received signal level

RxQual Received Signal Quality

S



612


SC-FDMA Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access

SFBC Spatial Frequency Block Code

SINR Signal-to-Interference-and-Noise Ratio

SPM Standard Propagation Model

T

TA Tracking Area

TCH Traffic Channel

TCP Transfer Control Protocol

TDD Time Division Duplex

TMA Tower Mounted Amplifier

TS Timeslot

TTI Transmission Time Interval

TSC Training Sequence Code

U

UE User Equipment

UL Uplink

V

VAMOS Voice services over Adaptive Multi-user channels on OneSlot

Z

ZC Zadoff-Chu Sequence



613

Documents

Genex U-net User Guide(v300r008c00_03)(PDF)-En